CH 5

Standard RLL Chapter
Instructions
In This Chapter...
5
Introduction................................................................................................................ 5-2
Using Boolean Instructions........................................................................................ 5-5
Boolean Instructions ................................................................................................ 5-10
Comparative Boolean............................................................................................... 5-26
Immediate Instructions............................................................................................ 5-32
Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions....................................................... 5-39
Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions......................................... 5-52
Logical Instructions (Accumulator).......................................................................... 5-69
Math Instructions..................................................................................................... 5-86
Transcendental Functions....................................................................................... 5-118
Bit Operation Instructions...................................................................................... 5-120
Number Conversion Instructions
(Accumulator)......................................................................................................... 5-127
Table Instructions................................................................................................... 5-141
Clock/Calendar Instructions................................................................................... 5-171
CPU Control Instructions........................................................................................ 5-173
Program Control Instructions................................................................................ 5-175
Interrupt Instructions............................................................................................. 5-183
Message Instructions.............................................................................................. 5-186
Intelligent I/O Instructions..................................................................................... 5-194
Network Instructions.............................................................................................. 5-196
MODBUS RTU Instructions .................................................................................... 5-204
ASCII Instructions................................................................................................... 5-210
Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions......................................................................... 5-230
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Introduction
DL06 Micro PLCs offer a wide variety of instructions to perform many different types of
operations. This chapter shows you how to use each standard Relay Ladder Logic (RLL)
instruction. In addition to these instructions, you may also need to refer to the Drum instruction
in Chapter 6, the Stage programming instructions in Chapter 7, PID in Chapter 8, LCD in
Chapter 10 and programming for analog modules in D0-OPTIONS-M.
There are two ways to quickly find the instruction you need.
• If you know the instruction category (Boolean, Comparative Boolean, etc.), just use the title at the
top of the page to find the pages that discuss the instructions in that category.
• If you know the individual instruction name, use the following table to find the page(s) that discusses
the instruction.
Instruction Page Instruction Page

Accumulating Fast Timer (TMRAF) 5–42 And Store (AND STR) 5–16
Accumulating Timer (TMRA) 5–42 And with Stack (ANDS) 5–72
Add (ADD) 5–86 Arc Cosine Real (ACOSR) 5–119
Add Binary (ADDB) 5–99 Arc Sine Real (ASINR) 5–118
Add Binary Double (ADDBD) 5–100 Arc Tangent Real (ATANR) 5–119
Add Binary Top of Stack (ADDBS) 5–114 ASCII Clear Buffer (ACRB) 5–228
Add Double (ADDD) 5–87 ASCII Compare (CMPV) 5–220
Add Formatted (ADDF) 5–106 ASCII Constant (ACON) 5–187
Add Real (ADDR) 5–88 ASCII Extract (AEX) 5–219
Add to Top (ATT) 5–162 ASCII Find (AFIND) 5–216
Add Top of Stack (ADDS) 5–110 ASCII Input (AIN) 5–212
And (AND) 5–14 ASCII Print from V–memory (PRINTV) 5–226
And Bit-of-Word (AND) 5–15 ASCII Print to V–memory (VPRINT) 5–221
And (AND) 5–31 ASCII Swap Bytes (SWAPB) 5–227
AND (AND logical) 5–69 ASCII to HEX (ATH) 5–134
And Double (ANDD) 5–70 Binary (BIN) 5–127
And Formatted (ANDF) 5–71 Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) 5–128
And If Equal (ANDE) 5–28 Binary to Real Conversion (BTOR) 5–131
And If Not Equal (ANDNE) 5–28 Compare (CMP) 5–81
And Immediate (ANDI) 5–33 Compare Double (CMPD) 5–82
AND Move (ANDMOV) 5–167 Compare Formatted (CMPF) 5–83
And Negative Differential (ANDND) 5–22 Compare Real Number (CMPR) 5–85
And Not (ANDN) 5–14 Compare with Stack (CMPS) 5–84
And Not Bit-of-Word (ANDN) 5–15 Cosine Real (COSR) 5–118
And Not (ANDN) 5–31 Counter (CNT) 5–45
And Not Immediate (ANDNI) 5–33 Data Label (DLBL) 5–187
And Positive Differential (ANDPD) 5–22 Date (DATE) 5–171
5-2 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G


Decode (DECO) 5–126 Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants (LDSX) 5–62
Decrement (DEC) 5–98 Load Address (LDA) 5–60
Decrement Binary (DECB) 5–105 Load Double (LDD) 5–58
Degree Real Conversion (DEGR) 5–133 Load Formatted (LDF) 5–59
Disable Interrupts (DISI) 5–184 Load Immediate (LDI) 5–37
Divide (DIV) 5–95 Load Immediate Formatted (LDIF) 5–38
Divide Binary (DIVB) 5–104 Load Label (LDLBL) 5–142
Divide Binary by Top OF Stack (DIVBS) 5–117 Load Real Number (LDR) 5–63
Divide by Top of Stack (DIVS) 5–113 Master Line Reset (MLR) 5–181
Divide Double (DIVD) 5–96 Master Line Set (MLS) 5–181
Divide Formatted (DIVF) 5–109 MODBUS Read from Network (MRX) 5–204
Divide Real (DIVR) 5–97 MODBUS Write to Network (MWX) 5–207
Enable Interrupts (ENI) 5–183 Move Block (MOVBLK) 5-189
Encode (ENCO) 5–125 Move (MOV) 5–141
End (END) 5–173 Move Memory Cartridge (MOVMC) 5–142
Exclusive Or (XOR) 5–77 Multiply (MUL) 5–92
Exclusive Or Double (XORD) 5–78 Multiply Binary (MULB) 5–103
Exclusive Or Formatted (XORF) 5–79 Multiply Binary Top of Stack (MULBS) 5–116
Exclusive OR Move (XORMOV) 5–167 Multiply Double (MULD) 5–93
Exclusive Or with Stack (XORS) 5–80 Multiply Formatted (MULF) 5–108
Fault (FAULT) 5–186 Multiply Real (MULR) 5–94
Fill (FILL) 5–146 Multiply Top of Stack (MULS) 5–112
Find (FIND) 5–147 No Operation (NOP) 5–173
Find Block (FINDB) 5–169 Not (NOT) 5–19
Find Greater Than (FDGT) 5–148 Numerical Constant (NCON) 5–187
For / Next (FOR) (NEXT) 5–176 Or (OR) 5–12
Goto Label (GOTO) (LBL) 5–175 Or (OR) 5–30
Goto Subroutine (GTS) (SBR) 5–178 Or (OR logical) 5–73
Gray Code (GRAY) 5–138 Or Bit-of-Word (OR) 5–13
HEX to ASCII (HTA) 5–135 Or Double (ORD) 5–74
Increment (INC) 5–98 Or Formatted (ORF) 5–75
Increment Binary (INCB) 5–105 Or If Equal (ORE) 5–27
Interrupt (INT) 5–183 Or If Not Equal (ORNE) 5–27
Interrupt Return (IRT) 5–183 Or Immediate (ORI) 5–32
Interrupt Return Conditional (IRTC) 5–183 OR Move (ORMOV) 5–167
Invert (INV) 5–129 Or Negative Differential (ORND) 5–21
LCD 5–200 Or Not (ORN) 5–12
Load (LD) 5–57 Or Not (ORN) 5–30
Load Accumulator Indexed (LDX) 5–61 Or Not Bit-of-Word (ORN) 5–13
DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-3

Or Not Immediate (ORNI) 5–32 Shuffle Digits (SFLDGT) 5–139
Or Out (OROUT) 5–17 Sine Real (SINR) 5–118
Or Out Immediate (OROUTI) 5–34 Source to Table (STT) 5–156
Or Positive Differential (ORPD) 5–21 Square Root Real (SQRTR) 5–119
Or Store (ORSTR) 5–16 Stage Counter (SGCNT) 5–47
Or with Stack (ORS) 5–76 Stop (STOP) 5–173
Out (OUT) 5–17 Store (STR) 5–10
Out Bit-of-Word (OUT) 5–18 Store (STR) 5–29
Out (OUT) 5–64 Store Bit-of-Word (STRB) 5–11
Out Double (OUTD) 5–64 Store If Equal (STRE) 5–26
Out Formatted (OUTF) 5–65 Store If Not Equal (STRNE) 5–26
Out Immediate (OUTI) 5–34 Store Immediate (STRI) 5–32
Out Immediate Formatted (OUTIF) 5–35 Store Negative Differential (STRND) 5–20
Out Indexed (OUTX) 5–67 Store Not (STRN) 5–29
Out Least (OUTL) 5–68 Store Not (STRN) 5–10
Out Most (OUTM) 5–68 Store Not Bit-of-Word (STRNB) 5–11
Pause (PAUSE) 5–25 Store Not Immediate (STRNI) 5–32
Pop (POP) 5–65 Store Positive Differential (STRPD) 5–20
Positive Differential (PD) 5–19 Subroutine Return (RT) 5–178
Print Message (PRINT) 5–190 Subroutine Return Conditional (RTC) 5–178
Radian Real Conversion (RADR) 5–133 Subtract (SUB) 5–89
Read from Intelligent I/O Module (RD) 5-194 Subtract Binary (SUBB) 5–101
Read from Network (RX) 5–196 Subtract Binary Double (SUBBD) 5–102
Real to Binary Conversion (RTOB) 5–132 Subtract Binary Top of Stack (SUBBS) 5–115
Remove from Bottom (RFB) 5–153 Subtract Double (SUBD) 5–90
Remove from Table (RFT) 5–159 Subtract Formatted (SUBF) 5–107
Reset (RST) 5–23 Subtract Real (SUBR) 5–91
Reset Bit-of-Word (RST) 5–24 Subtract Top of Stack (SUBS) 5–111
Reset Immediate (RSTI) 5–36 Sum (SUM) 5–120
Reset Watch Dog Timer (RSTWT) 5–174 Swap (SWAP) 5–170
Rotate Left (ROTL) 5–123 Table Shift Left (TSHFL) 5–165
Rotate Right (ROTR) 5–124 Table Shift Right (TSHFR) 5–165
RSTBIT 5–144 Table to Destination (TTD) 5–150
Segment (SEG) 5–137 Tangent Real (TANR) 5–118
Set (SET) 5–23 Ten’s Complement (BCDCPL) 5–130
Set Bit-of-Word (SET) 5–24 Time (TIME) 5–172
Set Immediate (SETI) 5–36 Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF) 5–40
SETBIT 5–144 Up Down Counter (UDC) 5–49
Shift Left (SHFL) 5–121 Write to Intelligent I/O Module (WT) 5-195
Shift Register (SR) 5–51 Write to Network (WX) 5–198
Shift Right (SHFR) 5–122

Using Boolean Instructions

Do you ever wonder why so many PLC manufacturers always quote the scan time for a 1K
Boolean program? Simple. Most programs utilize many Boolean instructions. These are
typically very simple instructions designed to join input and output contacts in various series
and parallel combinations. Our DirectSOFT software is a similar program. It uses graphic
symbols to develop a program; therefore, you don’t necessarily have to know the instruction
mnemonics in order to develop your program.
Many of the instructions in this chapter are not program instructions used in DirectSOFT,
but are implied. In other words, they are not actually keyboard commands, however, they
can be seen in a Mnemonic View of the program once the DirectSOFT program has been
developed and accepted (compiled). Each instruction listed in this chapter will have a small
chart to indicate how the instruction is used with DirectSOFT and the HPP.
DS Implied
HPP Used
The following paragraphs show how these instructions are used to build simple ladder
programs.
END Statement
All DL06 programs require an END statement as the last instruction. This tells the CPU
that this is the end of the program. Normally, any instructions placed after the END
statement will not be executed. There are exceptions to this, such as interrupt routines, etc.
This chapter will discuss the instruction set in detail.
DirectSOFT32 Example
DirectSOFT
X0 Y0
OUT
All programs must have
an END statement
END
Simple Rungs
You use a contact to start rungs that contain both contacts and coils. The boolean instruction
that does this is called a Store or, STR instruction. The output point is represented by the
Output or, OUT instruction. The following example shows how to enter a single contact
and a single output coil.
DirectSOFT32 Example
DirectSOFT Handheld Mnemonics
X0 Y0
OUT STR X0
OUT Y0
END
END

Normally Closed Contact

Normally closed contacts are also very common. This is accomplished with the Store Not, or
STRN instruction. The following example shows a simple rung with a normally closed contact.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics
X0 Y0 STRN X0
OUT OUT Y0
END
END
Contacts in Series
Use the AND instruction to join two or more contacts in series. The following example shows
two contacts in series and a single output coil. The instructions used would be STR X0, AND
X1, followed by OUT Y0.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics
X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
AND X1
OUT OUT Y0
END
END
Midline Outputs
Sometimes, it is necessary to use midline outputs to get additional outputs that are conditional
on other contacts. The following example shows how you can use the AND instruction to
continue a rung with more conditional outputs.
DirectSOFT
X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
AND X1
OUT OUT Y0
AND X2
X2 Y1 OUT Y1
AND X3
OUT OUT Y2
END
X3 Y2
OUT
END

Parallel Elements
You may also have to join contacts in parallel. The OR instruction allows you to do this. The
following example shows two contacts in parallel and a single output coil. The instructions
would be STR X0, OR X1, followed by OUT Y0.
DirectSOFT
X0 Y0 STR X0
OUT OR X1
OUT Y0
X1 END
END
Joining Series Branches in Parallel

Quite often, it is necessary to join several groups of series elements in parallel. The Or Store
(ORSTR) instruction allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network
consisting of series elements joined in parallel.
DirectSOFT
X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
OUT AND X1
STR X2
X2 X3 AND X3
ORSTR
OUT Y0
END END
Joining Parallel Branches in Series

You can also join one or more parallel branches in series. The And Store (ANDSTR) instruction
allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network with contact branches in
series with parallel contacts.
DirectSOFT
X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
OUT STR X1
OR X2
X2 ANDSTR
OUT Y0
END
END
Combination Networks
X0 X2 X5 Y0
You can combine the various types of OUT
series and parallel branches to solve
X1 X3 X4
almost any application problem.
The example at right shows a simple
combination network. X6
END

Comparative Boolean
Some PLC manufacturers make it really difficult to do a simple comparison of two numbers.
Some of them require you to move the data all over the place before you can actually perform
the comparison. The DL06 Micro PLCs provide Comparative Boolean instructions that allow
you to quickly and easily solve this problem. The Comparative Boolean provides evaluation of
two BCD values using boolean contacts. The valid evaluations are: equal to, not equal to, equal
to or greater than, and less than.
V1400 K1234 Y3
In the example, when the BCD value in V-memory OUT
location V1400 is equal to the constant value 1234, Y3
will energize.
Boolean Stack
There are limits to how many elements you can include in a rung. This is because the DL06
PLCs use an 8-level boolean stack to evaluate the various logic elements. The boolean stack is
a temporary storage area that solves the logic for the rung. Each time the program encounters a
STR instruction, the instruction is placed on the top of the stack. Any other STR instructions
already on the boolean stack are pushed down a level. The ANDSTR, and ORSTR instructions
combine levels of the boolean stack when they are encountered. An error will occur during
program compilation if the CPU encounters a rung that uses more than the eight levels of the
boolean stack.
The following example shows how the boolean stack is used to solve boolean logic.
X0 X1 ORSTR AND X4 Y0
STR
STR OUT Output
X2 AND X3
STR ANDSTR
X5 OR
STR X0 STR X1 STR X2 AND X3

1 STR X0 1 STR X1 1 STR X2 1 X2 AND X3
2 2 STR X0 2 STR X1 2 STR X1
3 3 3 STR X0 3 STR X0
4 4 4 4
ORSTR AND X4 ORNOT X5

1 X1 or (X2 AND X3) 1 X4 AND {X1 or (X2 AND X3)} 1 NOT X5 OR X4 AND {X1 OR (X2 AND X3)}
2 STR X0 2 STR X0 2
STR X0
3 3 3
ANDSTR
1 XO AND (NOT X5 or X4) AND {X1 or (X2 AND X3)}
2
3

Immediate Boolean
The DL06 Micro PLCs can usually complete an operation cycle in a matter of milliseconds.
However, in some applications you may not be able to wait a few milliseconds until the next
I/O update occurs. The DL06 PLCs offer Immediate input and outputs which are special
boolean instructions that allow reading directly from inputs and writing directly to outputs
during the program execution portion of the CPU cycle. You may recall that this is normally
done during the input or output update portion of the CPU cycle. The immediate instructions
take longer to execute because the program execution is interrupted while the CPU reads or
writes the I/O point. This function is not normally done until the read inputs or the write
outputs portion of the CPU cycle.
NOTE: Even though the immediate input instruction reads the most current status from the input point,
it only uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not use the new status to update the image
register. Therefore, any regular instructions that follow will still use the image register values. Any immediate
instructions that follow will access the I/O again to update the status. The immediate output instruction will
write the status to the I/O and update the image register.
PWR
RUN
CPU
TX1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 RX1
TX2
RX2
LOGIC 06
K oyo
TERM
PORT1 PORT2 RUN STOP
CPU Scan
The CPU reads the inputs from the local

Read Inputs base and stores the status in an input
image register
.
X11 ... X2 X1 X0
OFF ... ON OFF OFF OFF X0
Input Image Register,
OFF X1
Read Inputs from Specialty I/O
Immediate instruction does not use the

Solve the Application Program input image register, but instead reads
the status from the module immediately.
X0 Y0
I
I/O Point X0 Changes
ON X0
Write Outputs OFF X1
Write Outputs to Specialty I/O
Diagnostics

Boolean Instructions
Store (STR)
Aaaa
DS Used
The Store instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch in a
HPP Used
rung with a normally open contact. Status of the contact will be the
same state as the associated image register point or memory location.
Store Not (STRN)
DS Used
The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an additional branch Aaaa
HPP Used
in a rung with a normally closed contact. Status of the contact will be
opposite the state of the associated image register point or memory
location.
Operand Data Type DL06 Range

A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
Control Relays C 0–1777
Stage S 0–1777
Timer T 0–377
Counter C CT 0–177
Special Relay SP 0–777
In the following Store example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2
In the following Store Not example, when input X1 is off output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1 Y2 SP B ENT
OUT STRN 1
GX C ENT
OUT 2

Store Bit-of-Word (STRB)

Aaaa.bb
DS Used The Store Bit-of-Word instruction begins a new rung or an
HPP Used additional branch in a rung with a normally open contact. Status
of the contact will be the same state as the bit referenced in the
associated memory location.
Aaaa.bb
Store Not Bit-of-Word (STRNB)
DS Used The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an additional
HPP Used branch in a rung with a normally closed contact. Status of the
contact will be opposite the state of the bit referenced in the
A aaa bb
V-memory B See memory map 0 to 15
Pointer PB See memory map 0 to 15
These instructions look like the STR and STRN instructions only the address is different.
Take note how the address is set up in the following Store Bit-of-Word example.
When bit 12 of V-memory location V1400 is on, output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
B1400.12 Y2
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR SHFT B V 1 4 0 0
K 1 2 ENT
OUT 2 ENT
In the following Store Not Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location V1400
is off, output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
B1400.12 Y2
OUT
STRN SHFT B V 1 4 0 0
K 1 2 ENT
OUT 2 ENT

Or (OR)
DS Implied The Or instruction will logically OR a normally open contact in
parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will Aaaa
HPP Used
be the same state as the associated image register point or memory
location.
Or Not (ORN)
DS Implied The Or Not instruction will logically OR a normally closed contact Aaaa
HPP Used in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of the contact
will be opposite the state of the associated image register point or
memory location.

A aaa
Inputs X 0-777
Outputs Y 0-777
Stage S 0–1777
Timer T 0–377
Counter CT 0–177
Special Relay SP 0-777
In the following Or example, when input X1 or X2 is on, output Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
X1 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
Q C ENT
OR 2
X2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
In the following Or Not example, when input X1 is on or X2 is off, output Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
R C ENT
ORN 2
X2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

Or Bit-of-Word (OR)
DS Implied The Or Bit-of-Word instruction will logically OR a normally
HPP Used open contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. Status Aaaa.bb
of the contact will be the same state as the bit referenced in the
Or Not Bit-of-Word (ORN)
DS Implied The Or Not Bit-of-Word instruction will logically OR a
HPP Used normally closed contact in parallel with another contact in a Aaaa.bb
rung. Status of the contact will be opposite the state of the bit
referenced in the associated memory location.

A aaa bb
In the following Or Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is on, output Y5
will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 Y7
OUT
B1400.7
STR 1 ENT
OR SHFT B V 1 4 0 0
K 7 ENT
OUT 7 ENT
In the following Or Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on or bit 7 of V1400 is off, output
Y7 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 Y7
OUT
B1400.7
STR 1 ENT
ORN SHFT B V 1 4 0 0
K 7 ENT
OUT 7 ENT

AND (AND) Aaaa

DS Implied The AND instruction logically ands a normally open
HPP Used contact in series with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be the same state as the
associated image register point or memory location.
AND NOT (ANDN) Aaaa
DS Implied The AND NOT instruction logically ands a normally
HPP Used closed contact in series with another contact in a rung.
The status of the contact will be opposite the state of
the associated image register point or memory location

A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
Stage S 0–1777
Timer T 0–377
Counter CT 0–177
In the following And example, when input X1 and X2 are on output Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
V C ENT
AND 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
In the following And Not example, when input X1 is on and X2 is off output Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
W C ENT
ANDN 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

AND Bit-of-Word (AND)

DS Implied The And Bit-of-Word instruction logically ands Aaaa.bb
HPP Used a normally open contact in series with another
contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be
the same state as the bit referenced in the associated
memory location.
Aaaa.bb
AND Not Bit-of-Word (ANDN)
DS Implied The And Not Bit-of-Word instruction logically
HPP Used ands a normally closed contact in series with
another contact in a rung. The status of the contact
will be opposite the state of the bit referenced in the
A aaa bb
In the following And Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 and bit 4 of V1400 is on output
Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 B1400.4 Y5
OUT
STR 1 ENT
AND SHFT B V 1 4 0 0
K 4 ENT
OUT 5 ENT
In the following And Not Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on and bit 4 of V1400 is
off output Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 B1400.4 Y5
OUT
STR 1 ENT
ANDN SHFT B V 1 4 0 0
K 4 ENT
OUT 5 ENT

And Store (ANDSTR)

OUT
DS Implied The And Store instruction logically ands two
1 2
HPP Used branches of a rung in series. Both branches must
begin with the Store instruction.
1
OR Store (ORSTR)
OUT
DS Implied The Or Store instruction logically ORs two
HPP Used branches of a rung in parallel. Both branches must 2
begin with the Store instruction.
In the following And Store example, the branch consisting of contacts X2, X3, and X4 have
been anded with the branch consisting of contact X1.

DirectSOFT
X1 X2 X3 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
$ C ENT
STR 2
X4
V D
ENT
AND 3
Q E
ENT
OR 4
L ENT
ANDST
GX F ENT
OUT 5
In the following Or Store example, the branch consisting of X1 and X2 have been OR’d with
the branch consisting of X3 and X4.

DirectSOFT
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
V C
ENT
AND 2
X3 X4
$ D ENT
STR 3
V E ENT
AND 4
M ENT
ORST
GX F ENT
OUT 5

Out (OUT)
Aaaa
DS Used The Out instruction reflects the status of the rung (on/off) and outputs
HPP Used the discrete (on/off) state to the specified image register point or memory OUT
location.
Multiple Out instructions referencing the same discrete location should not be used since only
the last Out instruction in the program will control the physical output point. Instead, use the
next instruction, the Or Out.
A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
In the following Out example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 and Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2
Y5
GX F ENT
OUT OUT 5
Or Out (OROUT)
The Or Out instruction allows more than one rung of discrete logic to
DS Usied A aaa
control a single output. Multiple Or Out instructions referencing the
HPP Used OROUT
same output coil may be used, since all contacts controlling the output
are logically OR’d together. If the status of any rung is on, the output will
also be on.
A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0-777
In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1 Y2
$ B ENT
OR OUT STR 1
O D F ENT ENT C ENT
INST# 3 5 2
$ E ENT
STR 4
X4 Y2 O D F C
ENT ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 2
OR OUT

Out Bit-of-Word (OUT)

DS Used The Out Bit-of-Word instruction reflects the status of the rung (on/off) Aaaa.bb
HPP Used
and outputs the discrete (on/off) state to the specified bit in the referenced OUT
memory location. Multiple Out Bit-of-Word instructions referencing the
same bit of the same word generally should not be used since only the last
Out instruction in the program will control the status of the bit.

A aaa bb
NOTE: If the Bit-of-Word is entered as V1400.3 in DirectSOFT, it will be converted to B1400.3. Bit-of-Word
can also be entered as B1400.3.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 B1400.3
OUT
B1401.6
OUT
STR 1 ENT
OUT SHFT B V 1 4 0 0
K 3 ENT
OUT SHFT B V 1 4 0 1
K 6 ENT
In the following Out Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on, bit 3 of V1400 and bit 6 of
V1401 will turn on.
The following Out Bit-of-Word example contains two Out Bit-of-Word instructions using the
same bit in the same memory word. The final state bit 3 of V1400 is ultimately controlled by
the last rung of logic referencing it. X1 will override the logic state controlled by X0. To avoid
this situation, multiple outputs using the same location must not be used in programming.
X0 B1400.3
OUT
X1 B1400.3
OUT

Not (NOT)
DS Used The Not instruction inverts the status of the rung at the point
HPP Used of the instruction.
In the following example, when X1 is off, Y2 will energize. This is because the Not instruction
inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
SHFT N O T ENT
TMR INST# MLR
GX C ENT
OUT 2
NOTE: DirectSOFT Release 1.1i and later supports the use of the NOT instruction. The above example rung
is merely intended to show the visual representation of the NOT instruction. The NOT instruction can only be
selected in DirectSOFT from the Instruction Browser. The rung cannot be created or displayed in DirectSOFT
versions earlier than 1.1i.
Positive Differential (PD)

DS Used The Positive Differential instruction is typically known A aaa
HPP Used as a one shot. When the input logic produces an off to on PD
transition, the output will energize for one CPU scan.
In the following example, every time X1 makes an Off-to-On transition, C0 will energize for
one scan.

A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
DirectSOFT
X1 C0 $ B ENT
STR 1
PD
SHFT P SHFT D A ENT
CV 3 0

Store Positive Differential (STRPD)

Aaaa
DS Used The Store Positive Differential instruction begins a new rung or an
HPP Used additional branch in a rung with a contact. The contact closes for one
CPU scan when the state of the associated image register point makes
an Off-to-On transition. Thereafter, the contact remains open until the
next Off-to-On transition (the symbol inside the contact represents the
transition). This function is sometimes called a “one-shot”. This contact
will also close on a program-to-run transition if it is within a retentive
range.
Store Negative Differential (STRND) Aaaa
DS Used The Store Negative Differential instruction begins a new rung or an
HPP Used additional branch in a rung with a contact. The contact closes for one
CPU scan when the state of the associated image register point makes
an On-to-Off transition. Thereafter, the contact remains open until
the next On-to-Off transition (the symbol inside the contact represents
the transition).
NOTE: When using DirectSOFT, these instructions can only be entered from the Instruction Browser.

A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
Stage S 0–1777
Timer T 0–377
Counter CT 0–177
In the following example, each time X1 makes an Off-to-On transition, Y4 will energize for
one scan.
DirectSOFT
X1 $ SHFT P D B ENT
Y4 STR CV 3 1
OUT GX E ENT
OUT 4
In the following example, each time X1 makes an On-to-Off transition, Y4 will energize for
one scan.
DirectSOFT
X1 $ SHFT N D B ENT
Y4 STR TMR 3 1
OUT GX E
ENT
OUT 4

Or Positive Differential (ORPD)

DS Implied The Or Positive Differential instruction logically ors a
HPP Used contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be open until the associated Aaaa
image register point makes an Off-to-On transition,
closing it for one CPU scan. Thereafter, it remains
open until another Off-to-On transition.
Or Negative Differential (ORND)
DS Implied The Or Negative Differential instruction logically ors a
HPP Used contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be open until the associated Aaaa
image register point makes an On-to-Off transition,
closing it for one CPU scan. Thereafter, it remains
open until another On-to-Off transition.

A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
Stage S 0–1777
Timer T 0–377
Counter CT 0–177
In the following example, Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan when X2
transitions from Off to On.
DirectSOFT
$ B ENT
X1 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q SHFT P D C ENT
OR CV 3 2
X2 GX F
ENT
OUT 5
In the following example, Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan when X2
transitions from On to Off.
DirectSOFT
$ B ENT
X1 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q N D C
SHFT ENT
OR TMR 3 2
X2 GX F
ENT
OUT 5

And Positive Differential (ANDPD)

DS Implied The And Positive Differential instruction logically ands
HPP Used a normally open contact in series with another contact Aaaa
in a rung. The status of the contact will be open until
the associated image register point makes an Off-to-On
transition, closing it for one CPU scan. Thereafter, it
remains open until another Off-to-On transition.
And Negative Differential (ANDND)
Aaaa
DS Implied The And Negative Differential instruction logically
HPP Used ands a normally open contact in series with another
contact 5-22in a rung. The status of the contact will
be open until the associated image register point makes
an On-to-Off transition, closing it for one CPU scan.
Thereafter, it remains open until another On-to-Off
transition.
A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
Stage S 0–1777
Timer T 0–377
Counter CT 0–177
In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2
transitions from Off to On.
DirectSOFT
$ B ENT
X1 X2 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q SHFT P D C ENT
OR CV 3 2
GX F
ENT
OUT 5
In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2
transitions from On to Off.
DirectSOFT
X2 $ B ENT
X1 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q N D C
SHFT ENT
OR TMR 3 2
GX F
ENT
OUT 5

Set (SET) Optional

memory range
DS Used The Set instruction sets or turns on an image register point/
A aaa aaa
HPP Used memory location or a consecutive range of image register
points/memory locations. Once the point/location is set it SET
will remain on until it is reset using the Reset instruction. It
is not necessary for the input controlling the Set instruction
to remain on.
Reset (RST) Optional
Memory. range
DS Used The Reset instruction resets or turns off an image register A aaa aaa
HPP Used point/memory location or a range of image registers points/ RST
memory locations. Once the point/location is reset, it is not
necessary for the input to remain on.

A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
Stage S 0–1777
Timer T 0–377
Counter CT 0–177
In the following example when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1 $ B
Y2 Y5 ENT
STR 1
SET
X C F ENT
SET 2 5
In the following example when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be reset or de–energized.
DirectSOFT
X2 $ B
Y2 Y5 ENT
STR 1
RST
S C F ENT
RST 2 5

Set Bit-of-Word (SET)

DS Used The Set Bit-of-Word instruction sets or turns on a bit in a
Aaaa.bb
HPP Used V-memory location. Once the bit is set, it will remain on until it
SET
is reset using the Reset Bit-of-Word instruction. It is not necessary
for the input controlling the Set Bit-of-Word instruction to
remain on.
Reset Bit-of-Word (RST)
A aaa.bb
DS Used The Reset Bit-of-Word instruction resets or turns off a bit in a RST
HPP Used V-memory location. Once the bit is reset it is not necessary for the
input to remain on.

A aaa bb
In the following example when X1 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is set to the on state.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1
B1400.1
SET
STR 1 ENT
SET SHFT B V 1 4 0 0
K 1 ENT
In the following example, when X2 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is reset to the off state.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X2
B1400.1
RST
STR 2 ENT
RST SHFT B V 1 4 0 0
K 1 ENT

Pause (PAUSE)
DS Used The Pause instruction disables the output update on a range of outputs. Y aaa aaa
HPP Used The ladder program will continue to run and update the image register.
PAUSE
However, the outputs in the range specified in the Pause instruction
will be turned off at the output points.

A aaa
Outputs Y 0–777
In the following example, when X1 is ON, Y5–Y7 will be turned OFF. The execution of the
DirectSOFT ladder program will not be affected.
DirectSOFT32
X1 Y5 Y7
PAUSE
Since the D2–HPP Handheld Programmer does not have a specific Pause key, you can use the
corresponding instruction number for entry (#960), or type each letter of the command.
$ B ENT
STR 1
O J G A ENT ENT D F ENT
INST# 9 6 0 3 5
In some cases, you may want certain output points in the specified pause range to operate
normally. In that case, use Aux 58 to over-ride the Pause instruction.

Comparative Boolean
Store If Equal (STRE)
The Store If Equal instruction begins a new rung or additional
DS Implied branch in a rung with a normally open comparative contact. The V aaa B bbb
HPP Used contact will be on when Vaaa equals Bbbb .
Store If Not Equal (STRNE)
The Store If Not Equal instruction begins a new rung or additional
DS Implied branch in a rung with a normally closed comparative contact. The V aaa B bbb
HPP Used contact will be on when Vaaa does not equal Bbbb.

B aaa bbb
V-memory V See memory map See memory map
Pointer P See memory map See memory map
Constant K –– 0–9999
In the following example, when the BCD value in V-memory location V2000 = 4933, Y3 will
energize.
DirectSOFT
V2000 K4933 Y3 $ SHFT E C A A A

STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
E J D D ENT
4 9 3 3
GX D ENT
OUT 3
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 =/ 5060, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
Y3 SP SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K5060
STRN 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
F A G A ENT
5 0 6 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

Or If Equal (ORE)
DS Implied The Or If Equal instruction connects a normally open
comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The V aaa B bbb
HPP Used
contact will be on when Vaaa = Bbbb.
Or If Not Equal (ORNE)
DS Implied The Or If Not Equal instruction connects a normally closed
HPP Used comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The V aaa B bbb
contact will be on when Vaaa does not equal Bbbb.

B aaa bbb
In the following example, when the BCD value in V-memory location V2000 = 4500 or
V2002 =/ 2500, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K4500 Y3
STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
E F A A ENT
4 5 0 0
V2002 K2500 Q SHFT E C A A C

OR 4 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3
DirectSOFT
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K3916 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT D J B G ENT
3 9 1 6
V2002 K2500 R SHFT E C A A C

ORN 4 2 0 0 2
C F A A ENT
2 5 0 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

And If Equal (ANDE)

DS Implied The And If Equal instruction connects a normally open V aaa B bbb
HPP Used comparative contact in series with another contact. The
contact will be on when Vaaa = Bbbb.
And If Not Equal (ANDNE)
DS Implied The And If Not Equal instruction connects a normally V aaa B bbb
HPP Used closed comparative contact in series with another
contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa does not
equal Bbbb.

B aaa bbb
In the following example, when the BCD value in V-memory location V2000 = 5000 and
V2002 = 2345, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
V2000 K5000 V2002 K2345 Y3 $ SHFT E C A A A

STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
F A A A ENT
5 0 0 0
V SHFT E C A A C
AND 4 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3
In the following example, when the BCD value in V-memory location V2000 = 5000 and
DirectSOFT
V2000 K5000 V2002 K2345 Y3 $ SHFT E C A A A

STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
F A A A ENT
5 0 0 0
V SHFT E C A A C
AND 4 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3

Store (STR)
DS Implied The Comparative Store instruction begins a new rung or
A aaa B bbb
HPP Used additional branch in a rung with a normally open comparative
contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater
than Bbbb.
Store Not (STRN)
The Comparative Store Not instruction begins a new rung or A aaa B bbb
DS Implied
HPP Used
additional branch in a rung with a normally closed comparative
contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa < Bbbb.

A/B aaa bbb
Pointer p See memory map See memory map
Timer TA 0–377
Counter CTA 0–177
In the following example, when the BCD value in V-memory location V2000 M 1000, Y3 will
energize.
DirectSOFT
V2000 K1000 Y3 $ SHFT V C A A A

STR AND 2 0 0 0
OUT
B A A A ENT
1 0 0 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 < 4050, Y3 will
energize.
DirectSOFT
V2000 K4050 Y3 SP SHFT V C A A A

STRN AND 2 0 0 0
OUT
E A F A ENT
4 0 5 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

Or (OR)
DS Implied The Comparative Or instruction connects a normally
HPP Used open comparative contact in parallel with another A aaa B bbb
contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or
greater than Bbbb.
Or Not (ORN)
DS Implied The Comparative Or Not instruction connects a
HPP Used normally closed comparative contact in parallel with A aaa B bbb
another contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa <
Bbbb.

A/B aaa bbb
Timer TA 0–377
Counter CTA 0–177
V2002 M 2345, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K6045 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT G A E F ENT
6 0 4 5
V2002 K2345 Q SHFT V C A A C

OR AND 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3
In the following example when the BCD value in V-memory location V2000 = 1000 or
V2002 < 2500, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K1000 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT B A A A ENT
1 0 0 0
R SHFT V C A A C
V2002 K2500 ORN AND 2 0 0 2
C F A A ENT
2 5 0 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

And (AND)
The Comparative And instruction connects a normally A aaa B bbb
DS Implied
HPP Used open comparative contact in series with another contact.
The contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater than
Bbbb.
And Not (ANDN) A aaa B bbb
DS Implied The Comparative And Not instruction connects a normally

HPP Used closed comparative contact in series with another contact.
The contact will be on when Aaaa < Bbbb.

A/B aaa bbb
Timer TA 0–377
Counter CTA 0–177
In the following example, when the value in BCD V-memory location V2000 = 5000, and
V2002 M 2345, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
V2000 K5000 V2002 K2345 Y3 $ SHFT E C A A A

STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
F A A A ENT
5 0 0 0
V SHFT V C A A C
AND AND 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 7000 and
V2002 < 2500, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K7000 V2002 K2500 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT H A A A ENT
7 0 0 0
W SHFT V C A A C
ANDN AND 2 0 0 2
C F A A ENT
2 5 0 0
GX SHFT Y D ENT
OUT AND 3

Immediate Instructions
Store Immediate (STRI)
DS Implied The Store Immediate instruction begins a new rung or X aaa
HPP Used additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact will be
the same as the status of the associated input point at the time
the instruction is executed. The image register is not updated.
Store Not Immediate (STRNI)
The Store Not Immediate instruction begins a new rung or X aaa
DS Implied additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact will be
HPP Used opposite the status of the associated input point at the time
the instruction is executed. The image register is not updated.

aaa
Inputs X 0–777
In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
X1 Y2 $ SHFT I B ENT
STR 8 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2
In the following example, when X1 is off, Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
X1 Y2 SP I B
SHFT ENT
STRN 8 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2
Or Immediate (ORI)
DS Implied The Or Immediate connects two contacts in parallel. The
HPP Used status of the contact will be the same as the status of the X aaa
associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.
The image register is not updated.
Or Not Immediate (ORNI)
DS Implied The Or Not Immediate connects two contacts in parallel.
HPP Used The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the X aaa
associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.
The image register is not updated.


aaa
Inputs X 0–777

DirectSOFT
X1 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
Q SHFT I C ENT
X2 OR 8 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
In the following example, when X1 is on or X2 is off, Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
R SHFT I C ENT
X2 ORN 8 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
And Immediate (ANDI)

DS Implied The And Immediate instruction connects two contacts in
HPP Used series. The status of the contact will be the same as the
X aaa
status of the associated input point at the time the instruction
is executed. The image register is not updated.
And Not Immediate (ANDNI)
DS Implied The And Not Immediate instruction connects two contacts
HPP Used in series. The status of the contact will be opposite the status X aaa
of the associated input point at the time the instruction is
executed. The image register is not updated.

aaa
Inputs X 0–777
In the following example, when X1 and X2 are on, Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
V SHFT I C ENT
AND 8 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5
In the following example, when X1 is on and X2 is off, Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
W SHFT I C ENT
ANDN 8 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

Out Immediate (OUTI)

DS Used The Out Immediate instruction reflects the status of the rung (on/off) and
HPP Used outputs the discrete (on/off) status to the specified module output point
and the image register at the time the instruction is executed. If multiple Out Y aaa
Immediate instructions referencing the same discrete point are used, it is OUTI
possible for the module output status to change multiple times in a CPU
scan. See Or Out Immediate.
Or Out Immediate (OROUTI)
DS Used The Or Out Immediate instruction has been designed to use more than 1
HPP Used rung of discrete logic to control a single output. Multiple Or Out Immediate
Y aaa
instructions referencing the same output coil may be used, since all contacts
controlling the output are OR’d together. If the status of any rung is on at OROUTI
the time the instruction is executed, the output will also be on.

aaa
Outputs Y 0–777
In the following example, when X1 is on, output point Y2 on the output module will turn
on. For instruction entry on the Handheld Programmer, you can use the instruction number
(#350) as shown, or type each letter of the command.
DirectSOFT
X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUTI
O D F A ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 0
C ENT
2

DirectSOFT
$ B ENT
X1 Y2
STR 1
OR OUTI O D F A ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 0
C ENT
X4 Y2 2
OR OUTI $ E ENT
STR 4
O D F A ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 0
C ENT
2

Out Immediate Formatted (OUTIF)

DS Used The Out Immediate Formatted instruction outputs a OUTIF Y aaa
HPP Used 1–32 bit binary value from the accumulator to specified K bbb
output points at the time the instruction is executed.
Accumulator bits that are not used by the instruction
are set to zero.

aaa
Outputs Y 0-777
Constant K 1-32
In the following example, when C0 is on,the binary pattern for X10 –X17 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction. The binary pattern in the
accumulator is written to Y30–Y37 using the Out Immediate Formatted instruction. This
technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to outputs (without waiting for the CPU
scan).
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 5
C0
LDIF X10 Location Constant X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
K8 X10 K8 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Load the value of 8 Unused accumulator bits
consecutive locations into the
are set to zero
accumulator, starting with X10.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
OUTIF Y30
K8
Copy the value in the lower Location Constant Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30
8 bits of the accumulator to
Y30-Y37 Y30 K8 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
$ NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT A ENT

STR 0
SHFT L D I F B A I ENT
ANDST 3 8 5 1 0 8
GX SHFT I F D A I ENT
OUT 8 5 3 0 8

Set Immediate (SETI)

DS Used The Set Immediate instruction immediately sets, or turns
HPP Used on an output or a range of outputs in the image register and
the corresponding output point(s) at the time the instruction Y aaa aaa
is executed. Once the outputs are set, it is not necessary for SETI
the input to remain on. The Reset Immediate instruction
can be used to reset the outputs.
Reset Immediate (RSTI)
DS Used The Reset Immediate instruction immediately resets, or
HPP Used turns off, an output or a range of outputs in the image
register and the output point(s) at the time the instruction is Y aaa aaa
executed. Once the outputs are reset, it is not necessary for RSTI
the input to remain on.

aaa
Ouputs Y 0–777
In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be set on in the image register
and on the corresponding output points.
DirectSOFT
$ B ENT
X1 Y2 Y5 STR 1
SETI X I C F
SHFT ENT
SET 8 2 5
In the following example, when X1 is on, Y5 through Y22 will be reset (off) in the image
register and on the corresponding output module(s).
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 Y5 Y22
$ B ENT
RSTI STR 1
S SHFT I F C C ENT
RST 8 5 2 2

Load Immediate (LDI)

DS Used The Load Immediate instruction loads a 16-bit V-memory value
HPP Used into the accumulator. The valid address range includes all input
point addresses on the local base. The value reflects the current LDI
status of the input points at the time the instruction is executed. V aaa
This instruction may be used instead of the LDIF instruction,
which requires you to specify the number of input points.

aaa
Inputs V 40400-40437
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of X0–X17 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Immediate instruction. The Out Immediate instruction could be
used to copy the 16 bits in the accumulator to output points, such as Y40–Y57. This technique
is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to output points (without waiting for a full CPU
scan to occur).
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
C0 LDI Location
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
V40400 V40400 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Load the inputs from X0 to

X17 into the accumulator,
immediately Unused accumulator bits
are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
OUTI
V40502
Output the value in the

accumulator to output points
Y40 to Y57 Location Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 Y52 Y51 Y50 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40
V40502 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

STR 0
SHFT L D I E A E A A ENT
ANDST 3 8 4 0 4 0 0
GX SHFT I NEXT E A F A C ENT
OUT 8 4 0 5 0 2

Load Immediate Formatted (LDIF)

DS Used The Load Immediate Formatted instruction loads a 1–32 bit binary
LDIF X aaa
HPP Used value into the accumulator. The value reflects the current status of the
K bbb
input module(s) at the time the instruction is executed. Accumulator
bits that are not used by the instruction are set to zero.
aaa bbb
Inputs X 0-777 --
Constant K -- 1-32
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of X10–X17 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction. The Out Immediate
Formatted instruction could be used to copy the specified number of bits in the accumulator
to the specified outputs on the output module, such as Y30–Y37. This technique is useful to
quickly copy an input pattern to outputs (without waiting for the CPU scan).
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
C0 Location Constant
LDIF X10 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
K8 X10 K8 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Load the value of 8

consecutive location into the Unused accumulator bits
accumulator starting with are set to zero
X10
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
OUTIF Y30
K8
Location Constant Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30
Copy the value of the lower
8 bits of the accumulator to Y30 K8 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Y30 - Y37

STR 0
SHFT L D I F B A I ENT
ANDST 3 8 5 1 0 8
GX SHFT I F D A I ENT
OUT 8 5 3 0 8

Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions

Using Timers
Timers are used to time an event for a desired period. The single input timer will time as long
as the input is on. When the input changes from on to off, the timer current value is reset to 0.
There is a tenth of a second and a hundredth of a second timer available with a maximum time
of 999.9 and 99.99 seconds respectively. There is a discrete bit associated with each timer to
indicate that the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. The timing diagram
below shows the relationship between the timer input, associated discrete bit, current value and
timer preset.
Seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X1
TMR T1
X1 K30
Timer Preset
T1
T1 Y0
OUT
Current 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
Value 1/10 Seconds
There are those applications that need an accumulating timer, meaning it has the ability to
time, stop, and then resume from where it previously stopped. The accumulating timer works
similarly to the regular timer, but two inputs are required. The enable input starts and stops
the timer. When the timer stops, the elapsed time is maintained. When the timer starts again,
the timing continues from the elapsed time. When the reset input is turned on, the elapsed
time is cleared and the timer will start at 0 when it is restarted. There is a tenth of a second and
a hundredth of a second timer available with a maximum time of 9999999.9 and 999999.99
seconds respectively. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer
input, timer reset, associated discrete bit, current value and timer preset.
Seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X1
TMRA T0
K30
X1 Enable
X2
X2
Reset Input
T0
Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0
Value 1/10 Seconds
NOTE: Decimal points are not used in these timers, but the decimal point is implied. The preset and current
value for all four timers is in BCD format.

Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF)

DS Used The Timer instruction is a 0.1 second single input timer
HPP Used that times to a maximum of 999.9 seconds. The Timer Fast TMR T aaa
instruction is a 0.01 second single input timer that times up B bbb
to a maximum of 99.99 seconds. These timers will be enabled
if the input logic is true (on) and will be reset to 0 if the input
logic is false (off). Both timers use single word BCD values for Preset Timer#
the preset and current value. The decimal place is implied.
Instruction Specifications
Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the timer number. TMRF T aaa
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory B bbb
location specified in BCD.
Current Value: Timer current values, in BCD format, are Preset Timer#
accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory location*.
For example, the timer current value for T3 physically resides
in V-memory location V3.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is referenced by the associated T memory location.
Operating as a “timer done bit”, it will be on if the current value is equal to or greater than the
preset value. For example, the discrete status bit for Timer 2 is T2.
NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an Operator Interface unit must change
the preset.

A/B aaa bbb
Timers T 0–777 ––
400-677
V-memory for preset values V –– 1200–7377
7400–7577
10000-17777
400-677
Pointers (preset only) P –– 1200–7377
7400–7577*
10000-17777
Constants (preset only) K –– 0–9999
Timer discrete status bits T/V 0–377 or V41100–41117
Timer current values V /T** 0–377
NOTE: *May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used.

** With the HPP, both the Timer discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data
reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “T2” for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and
“TA2” for the current value of Timer T2.
You can perform functions when the timer reaches the specified preset using the discrete status
bit. Or, use comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals, based on one
timer. The examples on the following page show these two methods of programming timers.

Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 3 seconds. The timer
discrete status bit (T2) will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds. The timer is reset
when X1 turns off, turning the discrete status bit off and resetting the timer current value to 0.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Timing Diagram
X1 Seconds
TMR T2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K30
X1
T2 Y0
OUT
T2
Y0
Current 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
$ B ENT Value
STR 1
N C D A ENT
TMR 2 3 0
$ SHFT T C ENT 1/10th Seconds
STR MLR 2
GX A ENT
OUT 0
Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds. Comparative
contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one second intervals respectively. When X1 is
turned off, the timer will be reset to 0 and the comparative contacts will turn off Y3, Y4, and
Y5.
DirectSOFT
X1 Seconds
TMR T20
K45 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Y3 X1
TA20 K10
OUT
Y3
TA20 K20 Y4 Y4
OUT
Y5
TA20 K30 Y5
T2
OUT
Current 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
Value
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 1/10th Seconds

$ B ENT
STR 1
N C A E F ENT
TMR 2 0 4 5
$ SHFT T C A B A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 1 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3
$ SHFT T C A C A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 2 0
GX E ENT
OUT 4
$ SHFT T C A D A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 3 0
GX F ENT
OUT 5

Accumulating Timer (TMRA)

The Accumulating Timer is a 0.1 second two input timer that Enable TMRA T aaa
DS Used B bbb
will time to a maximum of 9999999.9. The TMRA uses two
HPP Used
timer registers in V-memory. Reset
Accumulating Fast Timer (TMRAF)

The Accumulating Fast Timer is a 0.01 second two-input Preset Timer#
DS Used timer that will time to a maximum of 99999.99. The TMRA
HPP Used uses two timer registers in V-memory.
Enable TMRAF T aaa
Each timer uses two timer registers in V-memory. The preset B bbb
and current values are in double word BCD format, and the Reset
decimal point is implied. These timers have two inputs, an
enable and a reset. The timer starts timing when the enable
is on and stops when the enable is off (without resetting the Preset Timer#
count). The reset will reset the timer when on and allow the
timer to time when off.
Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the timer number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or V-memory.
Current Value: Timer current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory
location*. For example, the timer current value for T3 resides in V-memory, V3.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated T memory
location. Operating as a “timer done bit,” it will be on if the current value is equal to or greater
than the preset value. For example, the discrete status bit for timer 2 would be T2.
NOTE: The accumulating timer uses two consecutive V-memory locations for the 8-digit value, therefore
two consecutive timer locations. For example, if TMRA T1 is used, the next available timer number is T3.
NOTE: A V-memory preset is required if the ladder program or an OIP must be used to change the preset.

A/B aaa bbb
Timers T 0–777 ––
400-677
V-memory for preset values V –– 1200–7377
7400–7577
10000-17777
400-677
7400–7577*
10000-17777
Timer discrete status bits T/V 0–377 or V41100–41117
Timer current values V /T** 0–377
NOTE: *May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used.** With the HPP, both the Timer discrete status bits
and current value are accessed with the same data reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as
“T2” for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and “TA2” for the current value of Timer T2.

Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, a two input timer (accumulating timer) is used with a preset of 3
seconds. The timer discrete status bit (T6) will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds.
Notice, in this example, that the timer times for 1 second, stops for one second, then resumes
timing. The timer will reset when C10 turns on, turning the discrete status bit off and resetting
the timer current value to 0.

X1 Seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TMRA T6
X1
K30
C10
C10
Y7 T6
T6
OUT Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0
Value
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)
$ B ENT D A ENT
STR 1 3 0
$ SHFT C B A ENT $ SHFT T G ENT
STR 2 1 0 STR MLR 6
N SHFT A G GX B A ENT
TMR 0 6 OUT 1 0
Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds. Comparative
contacts are used to energized Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one second intervals respectively. The
comparative
Contacts contacts will turn off when the timer is reset.
DirectSOFT
Timing Diagram
X1
Seconds
TMRA T20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K45 X1
C10
C10
TA20 K10 TA21 K0 Y3

Y3
OUT
Y4
TA21 K1
Y5
TA20 K20 TA21 K0 Y4

T20
OUT
Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0
TA21 K1 Value
1/10 Seconds
TA20 K30 TA21 K1 Y5
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont’d)
$ B ENT $ T C A C A
SHFT ENT
STR 1 STR MLR 2 0 2 0
$ C B A V E T C B A
SHFT ENT SHFT SHFT ENT
STR 2 1 0 AND 4 MLR 2 1 0
N A C A E F Q E T C B B
SHFT ENT SHFT SHFT ENT
TMR 0 2 0 4 5 OR 4 MLR 2 1 1
$ SHFT T C A B A ENT GX E ENT
STR MLR 2 0 1 0 OUT 4
V E T C B A $ T C A D A
SHFT SHFT ENT SHFT ENT
AND 4 MLR 2 1 0 STR MLR 2 0 3 0
Q E T C B B V E T C B B
SHFT SHFT ENT SHFT SHFT ENT
OR 4 MLR 2 1 1 AND 4 MLR 2 1 1
GX D ENT GX F ENT
OUT 3 OUT 5

Using Counters
Counters are used to count events . The counters available are up counters, up/down counters,
and stage counters (used with RLLPLUS programming).
The up counter (CNT) has two inputs, a count input and a reset input. The maximum count
value is 9999. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the counter input,
counter reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and counter preset. The CNT counter
preset and current value are bothe single word BCD values.
X1
CNT CT1
X1
Up K3
X2
X2
Reset
CT1
Current 1 2 3 4 0 Counter preset
alue
Counts
The up down counter (UDC) has three inputs, a count up input, count down input and
reset input. The maximum count value is 99999999. The timing diagram below shows the
relationship between the counter up and down inputs, counter reset, associated discrete bit,
current value, and counter preset. The UDC counter preset and current value are both double
word BCD values.
NOTE: The UDC uses two consecutive V-memory locations for the 8-digit value, therefore, two consecutive
timer locations. For example, if UDC CT1 is used, the next available counter number is CT3.
X1
X1 UDC CT2
Up K3
X2 X2
X3
Down
X3
CT2
Reset
Current 1 2 1 2 3 0
Value Counts
Counter Preset
The stage counter (SGCNT) has a count input and is reset by the RST instruction. This
instruction is useful when programming using the RLLPLUS structured programming. The
maximum count value is 9999. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the
counter input, associated discrete bit, current value, counter preset and reset instruction.
X1 X1
SGCNT CT2
K3
CT2
Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value Counts Counter preset
RST
CT2

Counter (CNT)
DS Used The Counter is a two-input counter that increments when the
HPP Used count input logic transitions from Off to On. When the counter
reset input is On, the counter resets to 0. When the current Counter#
value equals the preset value, the counter status bit comes On
and the counter continues to count up to a maximum count of Count CNT CT aaa
9999. The maximum value will be held until the counter is reset. B bbb
Reset
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory
location. Preset
Current Values: Counter current values are accessed by

referencing the associated V or CT memory locations.* The
V-memory location is the counter location + 1000. For example,
the counter current value for CT3 resides in V-memory location
V1003.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory
location. It will be On if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example the
discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
NOTE: A V-memory preset is required if the ladder program or OIP must change the preset.

A/B aaa bbb
Counters CT 0–177 ––
400-677
V-memory (preset only) V –– 1200–7377
7400–7577
10000-17777
400-677
7400–7577*
10000-17777
Counter discrete status bits CT/V 0–177 or V41140–41147
Counter current values V /CT** 1000-1177

** With the HPP, both the Counter discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data
reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and
“CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.

Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, when X1 makes an Off-to-On transition, counter CT2 will
increment by one. When the current value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter status bit
CT2 will turn on and energize Y7. When the reset C10 turns on, the counter status bit will
turn off and the current value will be 0. The current value for counter CT2 will be held in
V-memory location V1002.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Counting diagram
X1
CNT CT2
X1
K3
C10
C10
CT2 or
CT2 Y7 Y7
OUT Current Value 1 2 3 4 0
$ B ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C ENT

STR 1 STR 2 MLR 2
$ SHFT C B A ENT GX B A ENT
STR 2 1 0 OUT 1 0
GY C D ENT
CNT 2 3
Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, when X1 makes an Off-to-On transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at different counts. When
the reset C10 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be
0, and the comparative contacts will turn off.
DirectSOFT
X1
CNT CT2
X1
K3
C10
C10
CTA2 K1 Y3 Y3
OUT
Y4
CTA2 K2 Y4
Y5
OUT
Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value
CTA2 K3 Y5
OUT
$ B ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C

STR 1 STR 2 MLR 2
$ SHFT C B A ENT C ENT
STR 2 1 0 2
GY C D ENT GX E ENT
CNT 2 3 OUT 4
$ SHFT C SHFT T C $ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 2 MLR 2 STR 2 MLR 2
B ENT D ENT
1 3
GX D ENT GX F ENT
OUT 3 OUT 5

Stage Counter (SGCNT)

DS Used The Stage Counter is a single input counter that increments when Counter#
HPP Used the input logic transitions from off to on. This counter differs
from other counters since it will hold its current value until reset SGCNT CT aaa
using the RST instruction. The Stage Counter is designed for B bbb
use in RLLPLUS programs but can be used in relay ladder logic
programs. When the current value equals the preset value, the Preset
counter status bit turns on and the counter continues to count up
to a maximum count of 9999. The maximum value will be held
until the counter is reset.
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory location.
Current Values: Counter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or CT
memory locations*. The V-memory location is the counter location + 1000. For example, the
counter current value for CT3 resides in V-memory location V1003.
location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example, the
discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
NOTE: In using a counter inside a stage, the stage must be active for one scan before the input to the counter
makes a 0-1 transition. Otherwise, there is no real transition and the counter will not count.
the preset.

A/B aaa bbb
400-677
7400–7577
10000-17777
400-677
7400–7577*
10000-17777


Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, stage counter CT7 will
increment by one. When the current value reaches 3, the counter status bit CT7 will turn on
and energize Y7. The counter status bit CT7 will remain on until the counter is reset using the
RST instruction. When the counter is reset, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter
current value will be 0. The current value for counter CT7 will be held in V-memory location
V1007.
DirectSOFT
X1
SGCNT CT7
X1
K3
CT7 Y7 Y7
OUT Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value
C5 CT7 RST
RST CT7
$ B ENT GX B A ENT
STR 1 OUT 1 0
SHFT S SHFT G SHFT GY $ SHFT C F ENT

RST 6 CNT STR 2 5
H D ENT S SHFT C SHFT T H ENT
7 3 RST 2 MLR 7
$ SHFT C SHFT T H ENT
STR 2 MLR 7
Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at different counts. Although
this is not shown in the example, when the counter is reset using the Reset instruction, the
counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be 0. The current value for counter
CT2 will be held in V-memory location V1002 (CTA2).
DirectSOFT
X1
SGCNT CT2
K10
X1
CTA2 K1 Y3
Y3
OUT
Y4
CTA2 K2 Y4
OUT
Y5
Y5 Current 1 2 3 4 0
CTA2 K3
Value
OUT
RST
CT2
$ B ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C

STR 1 STR 2 MLR 2
SHFT S G SHFT GY C ENT

RST 6 CNT 2
C B A ENT GX E ENT
2 1 0 OUT 4
$ SHFT C SHFT T C $ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 2 MLR 2 STR 2 MLR 2
B ENT D ENT
1 3
GX D ENT GX F ENT
OUT 3 OUT 5

Up Down Counter (UDC) UDC CT aaa

Up
DS Used This Up/Down Counter counts up on each off to on B bbb
HPP Used transition of the Up input and counts down on each Down
Counter #
off-to-on transition of the Down input. The counter
is reset to 0 when the Reset input is on. The count
Reset
range is 0–99999999. The count input not being Preset
used must be off in order for the active count input

to function. Caution:
Caution:TheThe
UDCUDC
uses uses
two V-memory
two
Instruction Specification locations
V memory for locations
the 8 digit for
current
the value.
8 digit
This means
current that the
value. ThisUDC usesthat
means two the
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter consecutive UDC uses counter locations. If UDC
two consecutive
number. CT1 is used
counter in the program,
locations. If UDCtheCT1nextis
available
used in counter is CT3.the next
the program,
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or two available counter is CT3.
consecutive V-memory locations, in BCD.
Current Values: Current count is a double word value accessed by referencing the associated V
or CT memory locations* in BCD. The V-memory location is the counter location + 1000. For
example, the counter current value for CT5 resides in V-memory location V1005 and V1006.
location. Operating as a “counter done bit” it will be on if the value is equal to or greater than
the preset value. For example the discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
NOTE: The UDC uses two consecutive V-memory locations for the 8-digit value, therefore two consecutive
timer locations. For example, if UDC CT1 is used, the next available counter number is CT3.
the preset.

A/B aaa bbb
400-677
7400–7577
10000-17777
400-677
Pointers (preset only) P –– 1200–7377*
7400–7577
10000-17777


Up / Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, if X2 and X3 are off, the counter will increment by one when X1
toggles from Off to On . If X1 and X3 are off, the counter will decrement by one when X2
toggles from Off to On. When the count value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter status
bit will turn on. When the reset X3 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the current
value will be 0.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Counting Diagram
X1
UDC CT2
K3 X1
X2
X2
X3
X3
CT2
CT2 Y7
Current 1 2 1 2 3 0
OUT Value
$ B ENT D ENT
STR 1 3
$ C ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C ENT
STR 2 STR 2 MLR 2
$ D ENT GX B A ENT
STR 3 OUT 1 0
SHFT U D C C
ISG 3 2 2
Up / Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 and Y4 at different counts. When the
reset (X3) turns on, the counter status bit will turn off, the current value will be 0, and the
comparative contacts will turn off.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Counting Diagram
X1
UDC CT2
V2000 X1
X2
X2
X3
X3
CTA2 K1 Y3 Y3
OUT
Y4
CTA2 K2 Y4 1 2 3 4 0
Current
Value
OUT
$ B ENT B ENT
STR 1 1
$ C ENT GX D ENT
STR 2 OUT 3
$ D ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 3 STR 2 MLR 2
SHFT U D C C C ENT
ISG 3 2 2 2
SHFT V C A A A ENT GX E ENT

AND 2 0 0 0 OUT 4
$ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 2 MLR 2

Shift Register (SR)

DS Used The Shift Register instruction shifts data through a predefined
HPP Used number of control relays. The control ranges in the shift DATA SR
register block must start at the beginning of an 8 bit boundary
and must use 8-bit blocks. From A aaa
CLOCK
The Shift Register has three contacts.
• Data — determines the value (1 or 0) that will enter the register To B bbb
RESET
• Clock — shifts the bits one position on each low to high
transition
• Reset —resets the Shift Register to all zeros.
With each off-to-on transition of the clock input, the bits which make up the shift register
block are shifted by one bit position and the status of the data input is placed into the starting
bit position in the shift register. The direction of the shift depends on the entry in the From
and To fields. From C0 to C17 would define a block of sixteen bits to be shifted from left to
right. From C17 to C0 would define a block of sixteen bits to be shifted from right to left. The
maximum size of the shift register block depends on the number of available control relays. The
minimum block size is 8 control relays.

A/B aaa bbb
Control Relay C 0–1777 0–1777
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT 5 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 $ B ENT
Data Input SR STR 1
$ C ENT
STR 2
From C0
X2 $ D
Clock Input ENT
STR 3
SHFT S SHFT R SHFT A

To C17 RST ORN 0
X3
Reset Input
B H ENT
1 7
Inputs on Successive Scans Shift Register Bits

Data Clock Reset
C0 C17
1 0-1-0 0
0 0-1-0 0
0 0-1-0 0
1 0-1-0 0
0 0-1-0 0
0 0 1
Indicates Indicates
ON OFF

Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions

Using the Accumulator
The accumulator in the DL06 internal CPUs is a 32-bit register which is used as a temporary
storage location for data that is being copied or manipulated in some manner. For example, you
have to use the accumulator to perform math operations such as add, subtract, multiply, etc.
Since there are 32 bits, you can use up to an 8-digit BCD number. The accumulator is reset to
0 at the end of every CPU scan.
Copying Data to the Accumulator

The Load and Out instructions and their variations are used to copy data from a V-memory
location to the accumulator, or to copy data from the accumulator to V-memory. The following
example copies data from V-memory location V2000 to V-memory location V2010.
V2000
X1 LD 8 9 3 5
V2000
Unused accumulator bits
Copy data from V2000 to the
are set to zero
lower 16 bits of the accumu-
lator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 88 99 33 55
OUT
V2010 8 9 3 5
Copy data from the lower 16 bits V2010

of the accumulator to V2010
Since the accumulator is 32 bits and V-memory locations are 16 bits, the Load Double
and Out Double (or variations thereof) use two consecutive V-memory locations or 8 digit
BCD constants to copy data either to the accumulator from a V-memory address or from a
V-memory address to the accumulator. For example, if you wanted to copy data from V2000
and V2001 to V2010 and V2011 the most efficient way to perform this function would be as
follows:
X1 V2001 V2000
LDD
V2000 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
Copy data from V2000 and

V2001 to the accumulator
Acc. 6 7 3 9 55 00 22 66
OUTD
V2010 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
Copy data from the accumulator to
V2010 and V2011 V2011 V2010

Changing the Accumulator Data

Instructions that manipulate data also use the accumulator. The result of the manipulated
data resides in the accumulator. The data that was being manipulated is cleared from the
accumulator. The following example loads the constant value 4935 into the accumulator, shifts
the data right 4 bits, and outputs the result to V2010.
X1 LD Constant 4 9 3 5
K4935
Load the value 4935 into the

accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0
Shifted out of
accumulator
SHFR 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K4 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
Shift the data in the accumulator

4 bits (K4) to the right
OUT
V2010
0 4 9 3
Output the lower 16 bits of the ac-
cumulator to V2010 V2010
Some of the data manipulation instructions use 32 bits. They use two consecutive V-memory
locations or an 8 digit BCD constant to manipulate data in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is added
with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
V2001 V2000
X1 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
LDD
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6 (Accumulator)
ADDD
+ 2 0 0 0 4 0 4 6 (V2006&V2007)
V2006
Acc. 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2
Add the value in the
accumulator with the value
in V2006 and V2007
OUTD
V2010 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2
Copy the value in the V2011 V2010

accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

Using the Accumulator Stack

The accumulator stack is used for instructions that require more than one parameter to
execute a function or for user-defined functionality. The accumulator stack is used when more
than one Load instruction is executed without the use of an Out instruction. The first load
instruction in the scan places a value into the accumulator. Every Load instruction thereafter
without the use of an Out instruction places a value into the accumulator and the value that
was in the accumulator is placed onto the accumulator stack. The Out instruction nullifies
the previous load instruction and does not place the value that was in the accumulator onto
the accumulator stack when the next load instruction is executed. Every time a value is placed
onto the accumulator stack the other values in the stack are pushed down one location. The
accumulator is eight levels deep (eight 32-bit registers). If there is a value in the eighth location
when a new value is placed onto the stack, the value in the eighth location is pushed off the
stack and cannot be recovered.
X1 LD Constant 3 2 4 5
K3245
Current Acc. value
Accumulator Stack
Load the value 3245 into the accumu- Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 5
lator Level 1 X X X X X X X X
Previous Acc. value X X X X X X X
Level 2 X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
Acc. X X X X X
X X X X
Constant 5 1 5 1 Level 7 X X X X X X X X
LD
K5151 Level 8 X X X X X X X X
Current Acc. value
Load the value 5151 into the accumu- Acc. 0 0 0 0 55 1 5 1

lator, pushing the value 3245 onto the Bucket
Previous Acc. value Accumulator Stack
stack
Acc. 0 0 0 0 33 22 44 55 Level 1 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 5
6 3 6 3 Level 7 X X X X X X X X
LD Constant
K6363 Current Acc. value
Acc. 0 0 0 0 66 33 66 33
Load the value 6363 into the accumu- Bucket
lator, pushing the value 5151 to the 1st Previous Acc. value Accumulator Stack
stack location and the value 3245 to
the 2nd stack location Acc. 0 0 0 0 55 1 5 1 Level 1 0 0 0 0 5 1 5 1
Level 2 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 5
0 0 0 0
Bucket
The POP instruction rotates values upward through the stack into the accumulator. When a
POP is executed, the value which was in the accumulator is cleared and the value that was on
top of the stack is in the accumulator. The values in the stack are shifted up one position in
the stack.

X1 POP Previous Acc. value
Acc. X X X X XX XX XX X
Current Acc. value Accumulator Stack

POP the 1st value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values Level 1 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2
Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 4 5
up one location
Level 2 0 0 0 0 7 9 3 0
OUT
V2000 4 5 4 5 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
V2000
Copy data from the accumulator to Level 8 X X X X X X X X
V2000
POP Previous Acc. value
Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 44 55

accumulator and move stack values Acc. 0 0 0 0 33 77 99 22 Level 1 0 0 0 0 7 9 3 0
up one location
OUT
V2001 3 7 9 2 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
V2001
V2001.
Previous Acc. value

POP
Acc. 0 0 0 0 33 47 69 02

Acc. X X X X 77 99 33 00 Level 1 X X X X X X X X
accumulator and move stack values
up one location Level 2 X X X X X X X X
OUT V2002 7 9 3 0 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
V2002
V2002
Using Pointers
Many of the DL06 series instructions will allow V-memory pointers as operands
(commonly known as indirect addressing). Pointers allow instructions to obtain data from
V-memory locations referenced by the pointer value.
NOTE: DL06 V-memory addressing is in octal. However, the pointers reference a V-memory location
with values viewed as HEX. Use the Load Address (LDA) instruction to move an address into the pointer
location. This instruction performs the Octal to Hexadecimal conversion automatically.
In the following example we are using a pointer operand in a Load instruction. V-memory
location 2000 is being used as the pointer location. V2000 contains the value 440 which the
CPU views as the Hex equivalent of the Octal address V-memory location V2100. The CPU
will copy the data from V2100, which (in this example) contains the value 2635, into the
lower word of the accumulator.

X1 V2076 X X X X
LD
V2077 X X X X
P2000
V2100 2 6 3 5
V2000 (P2000) contains the value 440 V2101 X X X X
HEX. 440 HEX. = 2100 Octal which
contains the value 2635. V2102 X X X X
V2000 V2103 X X X X
Accumulator
0 4 4 0 V2104 X X X X
2 6 3 5
V2105 X X X X
OUT
V2200
Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V2200. V2200 2 6 3 5
V2201 X X X X
The following example is identical to the one above, with one exception. The LDA (Load
Address) instruction automatically converts the Octal address to Hex.
X1 LDA Load the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator with Hexadecimal
O 2100 equivalent to Octal 2100 (440) 2 1 0 0
2100 Octal is converted to Hexadecimal

Unused accumulator bits 440 and loaded into the accumulator
are set to zero
Acc. 0 0 0 0 00 44 44 00
OUT Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V2000 0 4 4 0
V 2000
V2000
V2076 X X X X
V2077 X X X X
V2000 (P2000) contains the value 440 V2100 2 6 3 5

LD
Hex. 440 Hex. = 2100 Octal which V2101 X X X X
P 2000 contains the value 2635
V2102 X X X X
V2100 V2103 X X X X
Accumulator
0 4 4 0 V2104 X X X X
V2105 X X X X 0 0 0 0 22 66 33 55
OUT Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V2200 V2200 2 6 3 5
V 2200
V2201 X X X X

Load (LD)
DS Used The Load instruction is a 16 bit instruction that loads the LD
HPP Used value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a 4 A aaa
digit constant, into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator.
The upper 16 bits of the accumulator are set to 0.

A aaa
V-memory V See memory map
Pointer P See memory map
Constant K 0–FFFF
Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the pointer is outside of the available range.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP76 On when any instruction loads a value of zero into the accumulator.
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the
accumulator stack.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
and output to V2010.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
V2000
X1 LD 8 9 3 5
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into The unused accumulator

the lower 16 bits of the bits are set to zero
accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 88 99 33 55
OUT
V2010
Copy the value in the lower 8 9 3 5

16 bits of the accumulator to V2010
V2010
$ B X
STR 1 SET
SHFT L D
ANDST 3
C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

Load Double (LDD)

DS Used The Load Double instruction is a 32-bit instruction that loads the LDD
HPP Used value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or A aaa
an 8 digit constant value, into the accumulator.

A aaa
Constant K 0–FFFFFFFF

accumulator stack.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32-bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator and output to V2010 and V2011.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 LDD V2001 V2000
V2000 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6

V2001 into the 32 bit
accumulator
Acc. 6 7 3 9 65 00 22 66
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
OUTD
V2010 V2011 V2010
Copy the value in the 32 bit

V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D
ANDST 3 3
C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
GX SHFT D
OUT 3
C A B A ENT
2 0 1 0

Load Formatted (LDF)

DS Used The Load Formatted instruction loads 1–32 consecutive bits
LDF A aaa
HPP Used from discrete memory locations into the accumulator. The
K bbb
instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and the number
of bits (Kbbb) to be loaded. Unused accumulator bit locations
are set to zero.

A aaa bbb
Inputs X 0–777 ––
Outputs Y 0–777 ––
Control Relays C 0–1777 ––
Stage Bits S 0–1777 ––
Timer Bits T 0–377 ––
Counter Bits CT 0–177 ––
Special Relays SP 0–777 ––

accumulator stack.
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C16 (7 bits) will be
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7 bits of the
accumulator are output to Y0–Y6 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
LDF C10 C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10
K7 C10 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
Load the status of 7

consecutive bits (C10–C16) The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
OUTF Y0
K7
Location Constant Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Copy the value from the
specified number of bits in Y0 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
the accumulator to Y0 – Y6
$ SHFT C A ENT
STR 2 0
SHFT L D F
ANDST 3 5
SHFT C B A H ENT
2 1 0 7
GX SHFT F
OUT 5
A H ENT
0 7

Load Address (LDA)

DS Used The Load Address instruction is a 16-bit instruction. It
converts any octal value or address to the HEX equivalent LDA
HPP Used
value and loads the HEX value into the accumulator. This O aaa
instruction is useful when an address parameter is required,
since all addresses for the DL06 system are in octal.
aaa
Octal Address O See memory map

accumulator stack.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the octal number 40400 will be converted to a HEX
4100 and loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The value in the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2000 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 LDA Octal Hexadecimal
O 40400 4 0 4 0 0 4 1 0 0
Load The HEX equivalent to

the octal number into the The unused accumulator
lower 16 bits of the bits are set to zero
accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 4 1 0 0
4 1 0 0
OUT
V2000 V2000
Copy the value in lower 16

bits of the accumulator to
V2000
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D A
ANDST 3 0
E A E A A ENT
4 0 4 0 0
GX SHFT V C A A A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 0 0

Load Accumulator Indexed (LDX)

DS Used Load Accumulator Indexed is a 16-bit instruction that specifies
HPP Used a source address (V-memory) which will be offset by the value LDX
in the first stack location. This instruction interprets the value A aaa
in the first stack location as HEX. The value in the offset address
(source address + offset) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator. The upper 16 bits of the accumulator are set to 0.
Helpful Hint: — The Load Address instruction can be used to convert an octal address to a
HEX address and load the value into the accumulator.
A aaa aaa

accumulator stack.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the HEX equivalent for octal 25 will be loaded into
the accumulator (this value will be placed on the stack when the Load Accumulator Indexed
instruction is executed). V-memory location V1410 will be added to the value in the first level
of the stack and the value in this location (V1435 = 2345) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator using the Load Accumulator Indexed instruction. The value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator is output to V1500 using the Out instruction.
X1 LDA Octal Hexadecimal
O 25 2 5 0 0 1 5
Load The HEX equivalent to The unused accumulator

octal 25 into the lower 16 bits are set to zero
bits of the accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5
LDX
V1410
HEX Value in 1st
Octal stack location Octal Accumulator Stack
Move the offset to the stack.
Load the accumulator with V 1 4 1 0 + 1 5 = V 1 4 3 5 Level 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5
the address to be offset Level 2 X X X X X X X X
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
OUT Level 4 X X X X X X X X
V1500 Acc. 0 0 0 0 2 3 4 5
The value in V1435 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Copy the value in the lower is 2345
16 bits of the accumulator Level 7 X X X X X X X X
to V1500
V1500
$ B ENT
STR 1
L D A C F ENT
SHFT
ANDST 3 0 2 5
SHFT L D X B E B A ENT
ANDST 3 SET 1 4 1 0
GX B F A A
PREV PREV PREV ENT
OUT 1 5 0 0

Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants
(LDSX)
DS Used LDSX
The Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants is a 16-bit
HPP Used K aaa
instruction. The instruction specifies a Data Label Area (DLBL)
where numerical or ASCII constants are stored. This value will be
loaded into the lower 16 bits.
The LDSX instruction uses the value in the first level of the accumulator stack as an offset to
determine which numerical or ASCII constant within the Data Label Area will be loaded into
the accumulator. The LDSX instruction interprets the value in the first level of the accumulator
stack as a HEX value.
Helpful Hint: — The Load Address instruction can be used to convert octal to HEX and load
the value into the accumulator.
aaa
Constant K 1-FFFF

accumulator stack.
In the following example when X1 is on, the offset of 1 is loaded into the accumulator. This
value will be placed into the first level of the accumulator stack when the LDSX instruction
is executed. The LDSX instruction specifies the Data Label (DLBL K2) where the numerical
constant(s) are located in the program and loads the constant value, indicated by the offset in
the stack, into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator.
Hexadecimal
X1 Value in 1st. level of stack is
LD 0 0 0 1 used as offset. The value is 1
K1
bits are set to zero Accumulator Stack
Load the offset value of 1 (K1) into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Level 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Acc.
LDSX
K2
Constant Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Move the offset to the stack. K 0 0 0 2 X X X X X X X X
Level 5
Load the accumulator with the data label
number The unused accumulator Level 6 X X X X X X X X
OUT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
Acc. Level 8 X X X X X X X X
V2000
Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator
to V2000 The unused accumulator
DLBL bits are set to zero
END 0 0 0 0 2 3 2 3
Acc.
DLBL K2
2 3 2 3
NCON
Offset 0
K3333 V2000
NCON
Offset 1
K2323
NCON
Offset 2
K4549

$ B ENT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR 1
SHFT L D SHFT K B ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 1
SHFT L D S X C ENT
ANDST 3 RST SET 2
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT D L B L C ENT
3 ANDST 1 ANDST 2
SHFT N C O N D D D D ENT
TMR 2 INST# TMR 3 3 3 3
SHFT N C O N C D C D ENT
SHFT N C O N E F E J ENT
OUT AND 2 0 0 0
Load Real Number (LDR)

LDR
DS Used The Load Real Number instruction loads a real number contained A aaa
HPP N/A in two consecutive V-memory locations, or an 8-digit constant

A aaa
Real Constant R -3.402823E+38 to + -3.402823E+38

DirectSOFT allows you to enter real numbers directly, by using

LDR
the
intoleading “R” to indicate a real number entry. You can enter a
the accumulator. R3.14159
constant such as Pi, shown in the example to the right. To enter
negative numbers, use a minus (–) after the “R”.
For very large numbers or very small numbers, you can use LDR
exponential notation. The number to the right is 5.3 million. The R5.3E6
OUTD instruction stores it in V1400 and V1401.
These real numbers are in the IEEE 32-bit floating point format, OUTD
so they occupy two V-memory locations, regardless of how big or V1400
small the number may be! If you view a stored real number in hex,
binary, or even BCD, the number shown will be very difficult to
decipher. Just like all other number types, you must keep track of
real number locations in memory, so they can be read with the
proper instructions later. LDR
The previous example above stored a real number in V1400 and V1400
V1401. Suppose that now we want to retrieve that number. Just
use the Load Real with the V data type, as shown to the right.
Next we could perform real math on it, or convert it to a binary
number.

Out (OUT)
DS Used The Out instruction is a 16-bit instruction that copies the value in OUT
HPP Used the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to a specified V-memory location A aaa
(Aaaa).
A aaa

SP53 On if CPU cannot solve the logic.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator are copied to V2010 using the OUT instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1 LD V2000 $ B ENT
8 9 3 5 STR 1
V2000
SHFT L D
Load the value in V2000 into ANDST 3
the lower 16 bits of the The unused accumulator
accumulator bits are set to zero C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 88 99 33 55
OUT GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
V2010

16 bits of the accumulator to 8 9 3 5
V2010 V2010
Out Double (OUTD)

OUTD
DS Used The Out Double instruction is a 32 bit instruction that copies the
A aaa
HPP Used value in the accumulator to two consecutive V-memory locations at a
specified starting location (Aaaa).
A aaa

In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32-bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is
output to V2010 and V2011 using the OUTD instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2001 V2000 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
X1 $ B ENT
LDD STR 1
V2000
SHFT L D D
Load the value in V2000 and ANDST 3 3
V2001 into the accumulator Acc. 6 7 3 9 55 00 22 66
C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
OUTD
GX SHFT D
V2010 OUT 3
Copy the value in the 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6 C A B A ENT
accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2010 2 0 1 0
V2011

Out Formatted (OUTF)

DS Used The Out Formatted instruction outputs 1–32 bits from the
HPP Used accumulator to the specified discrete memory locations. The OUTF A aaa
instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) for the destination K bbb
and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be output.
A aaa bbb
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C16 (7 bits) will be
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7 bits of the
accumulator are output to Y0–Y6 using the OUTF instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
LDF C10 C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10
K7 C10 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

consecutive bits (C10–C16) The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
OUTF Y20
Accumulator
K7
Copy the value of the

specified number of bits
from the accumulator to
Y20–Y26 Location Constant Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
Y20 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
$ SHFT C A ENT
STR 2 0
SHFT L D F
ANDST 3 5
SHFT C B A H ENT
2 1 0 7
GX SHFT F
OUT 5
A H ENT
0 7
Pop (POP)
DS Used The Pop instruction moves the value from the first level of the POP
HPP Used accumulator stack (32 bits) to the accumulator and shifts each
value in the stack up one level.

SP63 ON when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

Pop Instruction (cont’d)

In the example below, when C0 is on, the value 4545 that was on top of the stack is moved
into the accumulator using the Pop instruction The value is output to V2000 using the OUT
instruction. The next Pop moves the value 3792 into the accumulator and outputs the value
to V2001. The last Pop moves the value 7930 into the accumulator and outputs the value to
V2002. Please note if the value in the stack were greater than 16 bits (4 digits) the OUTD
instruction would be used and 2 V-memory locations for each OUTD must be allocated.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
Previous Acc. value
C0 POP
Acc. X X X X XX XX XX XX

Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the
Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 44 55 Level 1 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2
up one location Level 2 0
0 0
0 0 0 7 9 3 0
V2000 Level 5 X X X X X X X X
V2000 4 5 4 5 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2000 Level 7 X X X X X X X X
POP
Previous Acc. value
Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 44 55
Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values Current Acc. value Accumulator Stack
up one location
Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2 Level 1 0 0 0 0 7 9 3 0
V2001
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of Level 5 X X X X X X X X

the accumulator to V2001 V2001 3 7 9 2 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
POP Level 8 X X X X X X X X
Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the Previous Acc. value
up one location Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2
OUT Acc. 0 0 0 0 7 9 3 0 Level 1 X X X X X X X X

Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2002 Level 4 X X X X X X X X
V2002 7 9 3 0 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
$ SHFT C A ENT Level 8 X X X X X X X X
STR 2 0
SHFT P SHFT O P ENT

CV INST# CV
OUT AND 2 0 0 0
SHFT P SHFT O P ENT

CV INST# CV
GX SHFT V C A A B ENT
OUT AND 2 0 0 1
SHFT P SHFT O P ENT

CV INST# CV
GX SHFT V C A A C ENT
OUT AND 2 0 0 2

Out Indexed (OUTX)

DS Used The OUTX instruction is a 16 bit instruction. It copies a 16 bit
HPP Used or 4 digit value from the first level of the accumulator stack to a O UT X
source address offset by the value in the accumulator(V-memory A aaa
+ offset).This instruction interprets the offset value as a HEX
number. The upper 16 bits of the accumulator are set to zero.

A aaa

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value 3544 is loaded into the
accumulator. This is the value that will be output to the specified offset V-memory location
(V1525). The value 3544 will be placed onto the stack when the LDA instruction is executed.
Remember, two consecutive LD instructions places the value of the first load instruction onto
the stack. The LDA instruction converts octal 25 to HEX 15 and places the value in the
accumulator. The OUTX instruction outputs the value 3544 which resides in the first level of
the accumulator stack to V1525.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
Constant
X1 LD
3 5 4 4
K3544
Load the accumulator with
the value 3544
Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 5 4 4
Octal HEX
LDA
2 5 0 0 1 5
O25
Load the HEX equivalent to
octal 25 into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator. This is the
offset for the Out Indexed 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5
Acc.
instruction, which determines
the final destinaltion address
Octal Octal Octal
OUTX
V 1 5 0 0 + 2 5 = V 1 5 2 5
V1500 Accumulator Stack
The hex 15 converts
to 25 octal, which is 3 5 4 4 Level 1 0 0 0 0 3 5 4 4
Copy the value in the first
level of the stack to the added to the base Level 2 X X X X X X X X
address of V1500 to yield V1525
offset address 1525
(V1500+25) the final answer Level 3 X X X X X X X X
$ B ENT
STR 1 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
SHFT L D PREV D F E E ENT
ANDST 3 3 5 4 4 Level 8 X X X X X X X X
L D A C F ENT
SHFT
ANDST 3 0 2 5
GX SHFT X B F A A ENT
OUT SET 1 5 0 0

Out Least (OUTL)

DS Used The OUTL instruction copies the value in the lower eight bits of O UT L
HPP Used the accumulator to the lower eight bits of the specified V-memory A aaa
location (i.e., it copies the low byte of the low word of the
accumulator).
A aaa
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator using the LD instruction. The value in the lower 8 bits of the
accumulator is copied to V1500 using the OUTL instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 Load the value in V1400 into V1400
LD the lower 16 bits of the
V1400 accumulater 8 9 3 5
Copy the value in the lower The unused accumulator

OUTL bits are set to zero
V1500 V1500
Acc. 0 0 0 0 8 9 3 5
$ B ENT
STR 1
0 0 3 5
SHFT L D B E A A ENT
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0 V1500
GX SHFT L B F A A ENT
OUT ANDST 1 5 0 0
Out Most
(OUTM)
DS Used The OUTM instruction copies the value in the upper eight bits of O UT M
HPP Used the lower sixteen bits of the accumulator to the upper eight bits of the A aaa
specified V-memory location (i.e., it copies the high byte of the low
word of the accumulator).
A aaa
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator using the LD instruction. The value in the upper 8 bits of the lower 16
bits of the accumulator is copied to V1500 using the OUTM instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 Load the value in V1400 into V1400
LD the lower 16 bits of the
V1400 accumulator 8 9 3 5
OUTM Copy the value in the upper The unused accumulator

8 bits of the lower 16 bits of bits are set to zero
V1500 the accumulator to 1500
0 0 0 0 8 9 3 5
Acc.
$ B ENT 8 9 0 0
STR 1
V1500
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
GX SHFT M B F A A ENT
OUT ORST 1 5 0 0

Logical Instructions (Accumulator)

And (AND logical)
DS Used The AND instruction is a 16-bit instruction that logically ANDs
HPP Used the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a specified AND
A aaa
V-memory location (Aaaa). The result resides in the accumulator.
The discrete status flag indicates if the result of the AND is zero.

A aaa

SP63 ON if the result in the accumulator is zero.
SP70 ON when the value loaded into the accumulator is zero.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
using the LD instruction. The value in the accumulator is ANDed with the value in V2006
using the AND instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is output to
V2010 using the OUT instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 V2000
LD
2 8 7 A
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
the lower 16 bits of the will be set to 0
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
AND
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
AND the value in the 6A38

accumulator with AND (V2006) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the value in V2006
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
OUT
V2010
2 8 3 8
Copy the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator to V2010 V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
V SHFT V C A A G ENT
AND AND 2 0 0 6
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions - Logical
And Double (ANDD)

DS Used ANDD is a 32-bit instruction that logically ANDs the value in the
HPP Used accumulator with two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8 digit ANDD
(max.) constant value (Aaaa). The result resides in the accumulator. K aaa
Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the ANDD is zero or a
negative number (the most significant bit is on).

aaa

SP70 ON if the result in the accumulator is negative
the accumulator using the LDD instruction. The value in the accumulator is ANDed with
36476A38 using the ANDD instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to V2010 and
V2011 using the OUTD instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 5 V2000 V2000
X1 LDD 5 4 ?
7 E 2 8 7 A
V2000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
ANDD
K36476A38 Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
AND the value in the

accumulator with AND 36476A38 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the constant value
36476A38 Acc. 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0
1 0
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
OUTD
V2010 1 4 4 6 2 8 3 8
V2011

$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
V SHFT D SHFT K D G E H G SHFT A SHFT D I ENT
AND 3 JMP 3 6 4 7 6 0 3 8
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

And Formatted (ANDF)

DS Used The ANDF instruction logically ANDs the binary value in
HPP Used the accumulator with a specified range of discrete memory ANDF A aaa
bits (1–32). The instruction requires a starting location K bbb
(Aaaa) and number of bits (Kbbb) to be ANDed. Discrete
status flags indicate if the result is zero or a negative number
(the most significant bit =1).
B aaa bbb
Inputs X 0-777 -
Outputs Y 0-777 -
Control Relays C 0-1777 -
Stage Bits S 0-1777 -
Timer Bits T 0-377 -
Counter Bits CT 177 -
Special Relays SP 0-777 -
Constant K - 1-32

In the following example, when X1 is on, the LDF instruction loads C10–C13 (4 binary bits)
into the accumulator. The accumulator contents is logically ANDed with the bit pattern from
Y20–Y23 using the ANDF instruction. The OUTF instruction outputs the accumulator’s
lower four bits to C20–C23.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 Location Constant
LDF C10 C13 C12 C11 C10
K4 C10 K4 ON ON ON OFF

consecutive bits (C10-C13) The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ANDF Y20
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
K4
Accumulator
And the binary bit pattern 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
Acc.
(Y20-Y23) with the value in
the accumulator Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
AND (Y20-Y23) ON OFF OFF OFF 1 0 0 0
OUTF C20
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
K4
ndard RLL

4 bits in accumulator to
C20-C23
Location Constant C23 C22 C21 C20
C20 K4 ON OFF OFF OFF
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D F NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT B A E ENT

ANDST 3 5 1 0 4
V SHFT F NEXT C A E ENT
AND 5 2 0 4
GX SHFT F PREV PREV C A E ENT
OUT 5 2 0 4

And with Stack (ANDS)

The ANDS instruction is a 32-bit instruction that logically ANDs
DS Used
the value in the accumulator with the first level of the accumulator
HPP Used
stack. The result resides in the accumulator. The value in the first
level of the accumulator stack is removed from the stack and all ANDS
values are moved up one level. Discrete status flags indicate if
the result of the ANDS is zero or a negative number (the most
significant bit is on).

In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be ANDed
with the binary value in the first level or the accumulator stack. The result resides in the
accumulator. The 32-bit value is then output to V1500 and V1501.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 LDD V1401 V1400
5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A
V1400
1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
ANDS
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
36476A38
AND the value in the
accumulator with the AND (top of stack) 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
first level of the
accumulator stack Acc. 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
0 0
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
OUTD
V1500
Copy the value in the 1 4 4 6 2 8 3 8

accumulator to V1500 V1501 V1500
and 1501
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D B E A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
V SHFT S ENT
AND RST
GX SHFT D B F A A ENT
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Or (OR)
DS Used The Or instruction is a 16-bit instruction that logically ORs the
OR
HPP Used value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a specified
A aaa
V-memory location (Aaaa). The result resides in the accumulator.
The discrete status flag indicates if the result of the OR is zero.

A aaa

using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is OR’d with V2006 using the OR
instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is output to V2010 using the
Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 V2000
LD
2 8 7 A
V2000
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OR
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
Or the value in the 6A38

accumulator with OR (V2006) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the value in V2006
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OUT
V2010
6 A 7 A
16 bits of the accumulator to V2010
V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
Q SHFT V C A A G ENT
OR AND 2 0 0 6
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

Or Double (ORD)
DS Used
ORD is a 32-bit instruction that logically ORs the value in
the accumulator with the value (Aaaa), which is either two ORD
HPP Used
consecutive V-memory locations or an 8-digit (max.) constant K aaa
value. The result resides in the accumulator. Discrete status flags
indicate if the result of the ORD is zero or a negative number
(the most significant bit is on).

aaa

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the LDD instruction. The value in the accumulator is OR’d with
36476A38 using the ORD instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to V2010 and
V2011 using the OUTD instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 V2001 V2000
LDD
5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A
V2000

V2001 into accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
ORD
K36476A38 Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OR the value in the

accumulator with OR 36476A38 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the constant value
36476A38 Acc. 0 1
0 1
0 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 0
1 0
1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OUTD
V2010
7 6 7 F 6 A 7 A
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2010
V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
Q SHFT D SHFT K D G E H G SHFT A SHFT D I ENT
OR 3 JMP 3 6 4 7 6 0 3 8
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

Or Formatted (ORF)
DS Used The ORF instruction logically ORs the binary value in the
HPP Used accumulator and a specified range of discrete bits (1–32). The ORF A aaa
instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and the number of K bbb
bits (Kbbb) to be OR’d. Discrete status flags indicate if the result is
zero or negative (the most significant bit =1).

A/B aaa bbb
Inputs X 0-777 --
Outputs Y 0-777 --
Control Relays C 0-1777 --
Stage Bits S 0-1777 --
Timer Bits T 0-377 --
Counter Bits CT 0-177 --
Special Relays SP 0-777 --
Constant K - 1-32

In the following example, when X1 is on, the LDF instruction loads C10–C13 (4 binary bits)
into the accumulator. The ORF instruction logically ORs the accumulator contents with Y20–
Y23 bit pattern. The ORF instruction outputs the accumulator’s lower four bits to C20–C23.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 LDF C10 Location Constant C13 C12 C11 C10
K4 C10 K4 OFF ON ON OFF
Load the status fo 4
consecutive bits (C10-C13)
into the accumulator The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ORF Y20
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
K4
OR the binary bit pattern
(Y20 - Y23) with the value in
the accumulator Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
OR (Y20-- Y23) ON OFF OFF OFF 1 0 0 0
OUTF C20
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
K4
Copy the specified number
of bits from the accumulator
to C20-C23
$ B ENT
STR 1 C20 K4 ON ON ON OFF

ANDST 3 5 1 0 4
Q SHFT F NEXT C A E ENT
OR 5 2 0 4
OUT 5 2 0 4

Or with Stack (ORS)

DS Used The ORS instruction is a 32-bit instruction that logically ORs the
HPP Used value in the accumulator with the first level of the accumulator
OR S
stack. The result resides in the accumulator. The value in the
first level of the accumulator stack is removed from the stack and
all values are moved up one level. Discrete status flags indicate
if the result of the ORS is zero or a negative number (the most
significant bit is on).

SP70 ON if the result in the accumulator is negative.
In the following example when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be OR’d with
the binary value in the first level of the stack. The result resides in the accumulator.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 V1401 V1400
LDD
5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A
V1400
V1401 in the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
ORS
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OR the value in the 36476A38
accumulator with the value OR (top of stack) 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
in the first level of the
accumulator stack Acc. 0 0
1 0 1
1 0 0 1 0
1 0 0 0
1 0
1 0
1 0 1
1 0 0
1 1
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
OUTD
V1500
Copy the value in the 7 6 7 F 6 A 7 A
V1501 V1501 V1500
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
Q SHFT S ENT
OR RST
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Exclusive Or (XOR)
DS Used The XOR instruction is a 16-bit instruction that performs
HPP Used an exclusive OR of the value in the lower 16 bits of the XOR
accumulator and a specified V-memory location (Aaaa). A aaa
The result resides in the in the accumulator. The discrete
status flag indicates if the result of the XOR is zero.

A aaa

SP70 ON if the result in the accumulator is negative.
using the LD instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusive OR’d with V2006 using
the XOR instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is output to V2010
using the OUT instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 V2000
LD
2 8 7 A
V2000
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
XOR
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
XOR the value in the 6A38

accumulator with XOR (V2006) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the value in V2006
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
OUT
V2010
4 2 4 2
accumulator to V2010 V2010
$ SHFT X B ENT
STR SET 1
SHFT L D SHFT V C A A A ENT

ANDST 3 AND 2 0 0 0
SHFT X SHFT Q SHFT V C A A G ENT

SET OR AND 2 0 0 6
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

Exclusive Or Double (XORD)

DS Used The XORD is a 32-bit instruction that performs an exclusive
HPP Used OR of the value in the accumulator and the value (Aaaa), XORD
which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8 K aaa
digit (max.) constant. The result resides in the accumulator.
Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the XORD is zero
or a negative number (the most significant bit is on).

A aaa

into the accumulator using the LDD instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusively
OR’d with 36476A38 using the XORD instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to
V2010 and V2011 using the OUTD instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2001 V2000
X1 LDD 5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A
V2000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
XORD Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
K36476A38
XORD the value in the 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

Acc.
accumulator with
the constant value
36476A38 XORD 36476A38 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
OUTD Acc. 0 1
0 1
0 0 0 0
1 1
0 0 0 0 1
0 1
0 1
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
V2010

accumulator to V2010
and V2011 6 2 3 9 4 2 4 2
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V2011 V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT X Q SHFT D SHFT K

SET OR 3 JMP
D G E H G SHFT A SHFT D I ENT
3 6 4 7 6 0 3 8
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

Exclusive Or Formatted (XORF)

DS Used The XORF instruction performs an exclusive OR of the binary XO R F A aaa
HPP Used value in the accumulator and a specified range of discrete K bbb
memory bits (1–32).
The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and the number of bits (Bbbb) to be
exclusive OR’d. Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the XORF is zero or negative (the
most significant bit =1).
A/B aaa bbb
Inputs X 0-777 -
Outputs Y 0-777 -
Counter Bits CT 177 -
Constant K - 1-32

In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C13 (4 bits) will be loaded
into the accumulator using the LDF instruction. The value in the accumulator will be logically
exclusive OR’d with the bit pattern from Y20–Y23 using the XORF instruction. The value in
the lower 4 bits of the accumulator is output to C20–C23 using the OUTF instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1
LDF C10 C10 K4 OFF ON ON OFF
K4
Load the status of 4 The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
consecutive bits (C10-C13)
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X0RF Y20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
K4 Accumulator
Exclusive OR the binary bit Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
pattern (Y20-Y23) with the
value in the accumulator Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
XORF (Y20-Y23) ON OFF ON OFF 1 0 1 0
OUTF C20
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
K4
Standard RLL
Copy the specified number

of bits from the accumulator
to C20-C23

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes C20 K4 ON ON OFF OFF
$ B ENT
STR 1

ANDST 3 5 1 0 4
SHFT X Q SHFT F NEXT C A E ENT

SET OR 5 2 0 4
OUT 5 2 0 4

Exclusive Or with Stack (XORS)

The XORS instruction is a 32-bit instruction that performs an
DS Used Exclusive Or of the value in the accumulator with the first level of
HPP Used the accumulator stack. The result resides in the accumulator. The
value in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed from the XO R S
stack and all values are moved up one level. Discrete status flags
indicate if the result of the XORS is zero or a negative number (the
most significant bit is on).

the accumulator using the LDD instruction. The binary value in the accumulator will be
exclusively OR’d with 36476A38 using the XORS instruction. The value in the accumulator is
output to V1500 and V1501 using the OUTD instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 LDD V1401 V1400
5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A
V1400
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
XORS
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
Exclusive OR the value 36476A38
in the accumulator XOR (1st level of Stack) 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
with the value in the
first level of the Acc. 0 0
1 0 0
1 0 1
0 0
1 0 0 0 0
1 0
1 0 0
1 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
accumulator stack
OUTD
V1500
6 2 3 9 4 2 4 2
accumulator to V1500 and V1501 V1501 V1500
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT X Q SHFT S ENT

SET OR RST
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Compare (CMP)
DS Used The CMP instruction is a 16-bit instruction that compares the
HPP Used value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with the value in CMP
a specified V-memory location (Aaaa). The corresponding status A aaa
flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. The
data format for this instruction is BCD/Hex, Decimal and Binary.

A aaa

SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.
SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.
SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value.
In the following example when X1 is on, the constant 4526 will be loaded into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator using the LD instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared
with the value in V2000 using the CMP instruction. The corresponding discrete status flag
will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in
the accumulator is less than the value specified in the CMP instruction, SP60 will turn on,
energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT
X1 LD CONSTANT
K4526 4 5 ?
2 6
Load the constant value

4526 into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator bits are set to zero
Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 2?
2 66
?
Compared
with
CMP
V2000
8 9 4 5
Compare the value in the
accumulator with the value V2000
in V2000
SP60 C30
OUT

$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D SHFT K E F C G ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 4 5 2 6
SHFT C SHFT M P C A A A ENT

2 ORST CV 2 0 0 0
$ SHFT SP G A ENT
STR STRN 6 0
GX SHFT C D A ENT
OUT 2 3 0

Compare Double (CMPD)

DS Used The Compare Double instruction is a 32–bit instruction that
HPP Used compares the value in the accumulator with the value (Aaaa), CMPD
which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8– A aaa
digit (max.) constant. The corresponding status flag will be
turned on indicating the result of the comparison. The data
format for this instruction is BCD/Hex, Decimal and Binary.

A aaa
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared
with the value in V2010 and V2011 using the CMPD instruction. The corresponding discrete
status flag will be turned on, indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the
value in the accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will
turn on energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
X1 V2001 V2000
LDD
4 5 2 6 7 2 9 9
V2000

Acc. 4 5 2 6 7 2 9 9
Compared
CMPD with
V2010
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
accumulator with the value V2011 V2010
in V2010 and V2011
SP60 C30
OUT
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT C SHFT M P D C A B A ENT

2 ORST CV 3 2 0 1 0
$ SHFT SP G A ENT
STR STRN 6 0
GX SHFT C D A ENT
OUT 2 3 0

Compare Formatted (CMPF)

DS Used The Compare Formatted instruction compares the value in the
HPP Used accumulator with a specified number of discrete locations (1–32).
C MP F A aaa
The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and the number
K bbb
of bits (Kbbb) to be compared. The corresponding status flag will
be turned on, indicating the result of the comparison. The data
format for this instruction is BCD/Hex, Decimal and Binary.

A/B aaa bbb
Inputs X 0-777 -
Outputs Y 0-777 -
Counter Bits CT 0-177 -
Constant K - 1-32

In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load Formatted instruction loads the binary
value (6) from C10–C13 into the accumulator. The CMPF instruction compares the value
in the accumulator to the value in Y20–Y23 (E hex). The corresponding discrete status flag
will be turned on, indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in the
accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on
energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
Location Constant
X1 Load the value of the C13 C12 C11 C10
LDF C10
specified discrete locations C10 K4 OFF ON ON OFF
K4 (C10-- C13) into the
accumulator The unused accumulator
CMPF Y20
K4 of the specified discrete 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6
Acc.
location (Y20-- Y23)
SP60 C30 Compared
Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 with
OUT
ON ON ON OFF
E

Compare with Stack (CMPS)

DS Used The Compare with Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction
C MP S
HPP Used that compares the value in the accumulator with the value in
the first level of the accumulator stack. The data format for
this instruction is BCD/Hex, Decimal and Binary.
The corresponding status flag will be turned on, indicating the result of the comparison. This
does not affect the value in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1410 and V1411 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value that was loaded into the
accumulator from V1400 and V1401 is placed on top of the stack when the second Load
instruction is executed. The value in the accumulator is compared with the value in the first
level of the accumulator stack using the CMPS instruction. The corresponding discrete status
flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in
the accumulator is less than the value in the stack, SP60 will turn on, energizing C30.
DirectSOFT32
DirectSOFT V1401 V1400
X1 LDD
Load the value in V1400 and 6 5 0 0 3 5 4 4
V1400

LDD Acc. 6 5 0 0 3 5 4 4
V1410
Compare the value in the V1411 V1410

CMPS accumulator with the value
in the first level of the 5 5 0 0 3 5 4 4
accumulator stack
SP60 C30
Acc. 5 5 0 0 3 5 4 4
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Compared with

Top of Stack
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT L D D B E B A ENT
ANDST 3 3 1 4 1 0
SHFT C SHFT M P S ENT

2 ORST CV RST
$ PREV G A ENT
STR 6 0
GX NEXT NEXT NEXT SHFT C D A ENT
OUT 2 3 0

Compare Real Number (CMPR)

DS Used The Compare Real Number instruction compares a real number
HPP Used value in the accumulator with two consecutive V-memory CMPR
locations containing a real number. The corresponding status A aaa
flag will be turned on, indicating the result of the comparison.
Both numbers being compared are 32 bits long.

A aaa
Constant R -3.402823E+ 038 to + -3.402823E+ 038

SP71 On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid
In the following example, when X1 is on, the LDR instruction loads the real number
representation for 7 decimal into the accumulator. The CMPR instruction compares the
accumulator contents with the real representation for decimal 6. Since 7 > 6, the corresponding
discrete status flag is turned on (special relay SP62), turning on control relay C1.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 LDR Load the real number
R7.0 representation for decimal 7
into the accumulator Acc. 4 0 E 0 0 0 0 0
CMPR Compare the value with the

R6.0 real number representation
for decimal 6 CMPR 4 0 D 0 0 0 0 0
SP62 C1
OUT

Math Instructions
Add (ADD)
DS Used Add is a 16-bit instruction that adds a BCD value in the
ADD
HPP Used accumulator with a BCD value in a V-memory location
A aaa
(Aaaa). (You cannot use a constant as the parameter in the
box.) The result resides in the accumulator.
A aaa
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP66 On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.
using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is added to the
value in V2006 using the Add instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010
using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
X1 4 9 3 5
LD
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the The unused accumulator
accumulator bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0 4 9 3 5 (Accumulator)
ADD
+ 2 5 0 0 (V2006)
V2006
Acc. 7 4 3 5
Add the value in the lower
with the value in V2006
OUT
V2010 7 4 3 5
Copy the value in the lower V2010

V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT A D D C A A G ENT
0 3 3 2 0 0 6
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

Add Double (ADDD)

DS Used Add Double is a 32-bit instruction that adds the BCD value ADDD
HPP Used in the accumulator with a BCD value (Aaaa), which is either A aaa
two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8–digit (max.)
BCD constant. The result resides in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL06Range

A aaa
Constant K 0–99999999

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is added
with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double instruction. The value in the
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT V2001 V2000
X1 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
LDD
V2000

6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6 (Accumulator)
ADDD
+ 2 0 0 0 4 0 4 6 (V2006 and V2007)
V2006
Acc. 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2
Add the value in the
in V2006 and V2007
OUTD
V2010 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2

V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT A D D D C A A G ENT
0 3 3 3 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT D SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT 3 AND 2 0 1 0

Add Real (ADDR)

DS Used The Add Real instruction adds a real number in the accumulator with
HPP Used either a real constant or a real number occupying two consecutive ADDR
V-memory locations. The result resides in the accumulator. Both A aaa
numbers must be Real data type (IEEE floating point format).

A aaa
Constant R -3.402823E+ 38 to + -3.402823E+ 38

SP71 On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.
SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is an invalid floating point number.
SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.
SP74 On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error.
NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE
format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 5
X1 LDR
R7.0
Load the real number 7.0

ADDR
R15.0
Add the real number 15.0 to

the accumulator contents,
which is in real number
format.
OUTD
V1400
Copy the result in the accumulator

to V1400 and V1401.

Subtract (SUB)
DS Used Subtract is a 16-bit instruction that subtracts the BCD value SUB
HPP Used (Aaaa) in a V-memory location from the BCD value in the A aaa
lower 16 bits of the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL06Range
A aaa

SP64 On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator
using the Subtract instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out
instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
2 4 7 5
X1 LD
V2000

accumulator 0 0 0 0 2 4 7 5
SUB _
1 5 9 2
V2006
Acc. 0 8 8 3
Subtract the value in V2006
from the value in the lower
OUT 0 8 8 3
V2010
V2010
V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT S U B SHFT V C A A G ENT

RST ISG 1 AND 2 0 0 6
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

Subtract Double (SUBD)

DS Used Subtract Double is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts the BCD value SUBD
HPP Used (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an A aaa
8-digit (max.) constant, from the BCD value in the accumulator.

A aaa
Constant K 0–99999999

SP64 On when the 16- bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V2006 and V2007 is
subtracted from the value in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010
and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
0 1 0 6 3 2 7 4
X1 LDD
V2000

0 1 0 6 3 2 7 4
_ 6 7 2 3 7 5
SUBD
V2006 ACC. 0 0 3 9 0 8 9 9
The in V2006 and V2007 is

subtracted from the value in
the accumulator
OUTD 0 0 3 9 0 8 9 9
V2010
V2011 V2010
V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT S SHFT U B D C A A G ENT

RST ISG 1 3 2 0 0 6
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

Subtract Real (SUBR)

DS Used The Subtract Real is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts a real
HPP N/A number, which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or S UBR
a 32-bit constant, from a real number in the accumulator. The A aaa
result is a 32-bit real number that resides in the accumulator.
Both numbers must be Real data type (IEEE floating point
format).
A aaa
Constant R -3.402823E + 38 to+-3.402823E + 38

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 4 1 B 0 0 0 0 0
LDR
R22.0

into the accumulator.
2 2 (decimal) 4 1 B 0 0 0 0 0 (Accumulator)
- 1 5 + 4 1 7 0 0 0 0 0 (SUBR)
7 Acc. 4 0 E 0 0 0 0 0
SUBR
R15.0 V1401 V1400
Subtract the real number 4 0 E 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex number)
15.0 from the accululator
contents, which is in real
number format.
Real Value
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
OUTD
Acc. 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V1400

to V1400 and V1401. Sign Bit Exponent (8 bits) Mantissa (23 bits) ndard RLL
s tructions
128 + 1 = 129 1.11 x 2 (exp 2) = 111. binary= 7 decimal
129 - 127 = 2
Implies 2 (exp 2)
format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature

Multiply (MUL)
DS Used Multiply is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies the BCD value
HPP Used (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a 4–digit MUL
(max.) constant, by the BCD value in the lower 16 bits of the A aaa
accumulator The result can be up to 8 digits and resides in the
accumulator.
A aaa
Constant K 0–9999

using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is multiplied by the value in the accumulator.
The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
X1 1 0 0 0
LD
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into bits are set to zero
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Accumulator)
(V2006)
X 2 5
MUL
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0
The value in V2006 is

multiplied by the value in the
accumulator
0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0
OUTD
V2011 V2010
V2010

V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT M U L C A A G ENT
ORST ISG ANDST 2 0 0 6
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

Multiply Double (MULD)

DS Used Multiply Double is a 32-bit instruction that multiplies the 8-digit
HPP Used BCD value in the accumulator by the 8-digit BCD value in the MULD
two consecutive V-memory locations specified in the instruction. A aaa
The lower 8 digits of the results reside in the accumulator. Upper
digits of the result reside in the accumulator stack.

A aaa

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant Kbc614e hex will be loaded into the
accumulator. When converted to BCD the number is ”12345678”. That number is stored in
V1400 and V1401. After loading the constant K2 into the accumulator, we multiply it times
12345678, which gives us 24691356.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (Accumulator)
X1 LDD Load the hex equivalent
of 12345678 decimal into
Kbc614e the accumulator.
Convert the value to V1401 V1400

BCD
BCD format. It will 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
occupy eight BCD digits
(32 bits).
OUTD Output the number to X 2 (Accumulator)
V1400 and V1401 using
V1400 the OUTD instruction. Acc. 2 4 6 9 1 3 5 6
LD Load the constant K2

K2
2 4 6 9 1 3 5 6
MULD Multiply the accumulator
contents (2) by the
V1400 V1403 V1402
8-digit number in V1400
and V1401.
OUTD Move the result in the

V1402 and V1403 using the
OUTD instruction.
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D PREV SHFT B C SHFT G B E SHFT E ENT

ANDST 3 3 1 2 6 1 4 4
SHFT B C D ENT
1 2 3
GX SHFT D B E A A ENT
OUT 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT L D PREV C ENT

ANDST 3 2
SHFT M U L D B E A A ENT
ORST ISG ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
GX SHFT D B E A C ENT
OUT 3 1 4 0 2

Multiply Real (MULR)

DS Used The Multiply Real instruction multiplies a real number in MULR
HPP Used the accumulator with either a real constant or a real number A aaa
occupying two consecutive V-memory locations. The result
resides in the accumulator. Both numbers must be Real data type
(IEEE floating point format).

A aaa
Real Constant R -3.402823E +38 to + -3.402823E +38

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display
X1 4 0 E 0 0 0 0 0
LDR
R 7.0

7 (decimal) 4 0 E 0 0 0 0 0 (Accumulator)
x 1 5 X 4 1 7 0 0 0 0 0 (MULR)
1 0 5 Acc. 4 2 D 2 0 0 0 0
MULR
R 15.0 V1401 V1400
Multiply the accumulator 4 2 D 2 0 0 0 0 (Hex number)
contents by the real number
15.0
Real Value
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
OUTD
Acc. 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V1400

to V1400 and V1401. Sign Bit Exponent (8 bits) Mantissa (23 bits)
128 + 4 + 1 = 133 1.101001 x 2 (exp 6) = 1101001. binary= 105 decimal

133 - 127 = 6
Implies 2 (exp 6)

Divide (DIV)
DS Used Divide is a 16-bit instruction that divides the BCD value in
HPP Used the accumulator by a BCD value (Aaaa), which is either a DIV
V-memory location or a 4-digit (max.) constant. The first part A aaa
of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder
resides in the first stack location.

A aaa
Constant K 0–9999

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.
using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator will be divided by the value in V2006
using the Divide instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out
instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
5 0 0 0
X1 LD
V2000

accumulator
0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 (Accumulater)
DIV ÷ V2006
4 9
V2006
Acc. 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
The value in the
accumulator is divided by First stak location contains
the value in V2006 the remainder
OUT 1 0 2
V2010 V2010

V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT D I V C A A G ENT
3 8 AND 2 0 0 6
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

Divide Double (DIVD)

DS Used
Divide Double is a 32-bit instruction that divides the BCD
HPP Used
value in the accumulator by a BCD value (Aaaa), which must
DIVD
be obtained from two consecutive V-memory locations. (You
A aaa
cannot use a constant as the parameter in the box.) The first part
of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder
resides in the first stack location.
A aaa

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is divided
by the value in V1420 and V1421 using the Divide Double instruction. The first part of the
quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location. The
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
V1401 V1400
DirectSOFT
X1 LDD 0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0
V1400
Load the value in V1400 and The unused accumulator

V1401 into the accumulator bits are set to zero
0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0 (Accumulator)
DIVD ? 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 (V1421 and V1420)

V1420
Acc. 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The value in the accumulator First stack location contains
is divided by the value in the remainder
V1420 and V1421
OUTD
V1500 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0

and V1501
POP
$ B ENT
STR 1
Retrieve the remainder L D D B E A A
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
OUTD D I V B E C A
SHFT ENT
V1502 3 8 AND 1 4 2 0
Copy the value into
OUT 3 1 5 0 0
V1502 and V1503

Divide Real (DIVR)

DS Used The Divide Real instruction divides a real number in the
HPP N/A accumulator by either a real constant or a real number DIVR
occupying two consecutive V-memory locations. The result A aaa
resides in the accumulator. Both numbers must be Real data
type (IEEE floating point format).

A aaa
Real Constant R -3.402823E + 38 to + -3.402823E + 38

DirectSOFT
X1 4 1 7 0 0 0 0 0
LDR
R15.0

1 5 (decimal) 4 1 7 0 0 0 0 0 (Accumulator)
¸ 1 0 ¸ 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 (DIVR )
1 . 5 Acc. 3 F C 0 0 0 0 0
DIVR
R10.0 V1401 V1400
Divide the accumulator contents 3 F C 0 0 0 0 0 (Hex number)
by the real number 10.0.
Real Value
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
OUTD
Acc. 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V1400

to V1400 and V1401. Sign Bit Exponent (8 bits) Mantissa (23 bits) ndard RLL
64 + 32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 127 1.1 x 2 (exp 0) = 1.1 binary= 1.5 decimal

127 - 127 = 0
Implies 2 (exp 0)

Increment (INC)
The Increment instruction increments a BCD value in a INC
DS Used
A aaa
HPP Used specified V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction
is executed.
Decrement (DEC)
DEC
DS Used The Decrement instruction decrements a BCD value in a
A aaa
HPP Used specified V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction
is executed.
A aaa

In the following increment example, when C5 makes an Off-to-On transition the value in
V1400 increases by one.
DirectSOFT V1400
C5 8 9 3 5
INC
V1400
Increment the value in

V1400 by “1”. V1400
8 9 3 6
$ NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT F ENT

STR 5
SHFT I N C B E A A ENT
8 TMR 2 1 4 0 0
In the following decrement example, when C5 makes an Off-to-On transition the value in
V1400 is decreased by one.
DirectSOFT V1400
C5 8 9 3 5
DEC
V1400
Decrement the value in

V1400 by “1”.
V1400
8 9 3 4
$ NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT F ENT

STR 5
SHFT D E C B E A A ENT
3 4 2 1 4 0 0

Add Binary (ADDB)

DS Used Add Binary is a 16-bit instruction that adds the binary value in ADDB
HPP Used the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a binary value (Aaaa), A aaa
which is either a V-memory location or a 16-bit constant. The
result can be up to 32 bits and resides in the accumulator.

A aaa
Constant K 0-FFFF, h=65636

using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator will be added to the binary
value in V1420 using the Add Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
Use either OR Constant
DirectSOFT V-memory
V1400
X1 0 A 0 5
LD LD
V1400 K2565
Load the value in V1400

into the lower 16 bits of BIN The unused accumulator
the accumulator bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0 0 A 0 5 (Accumulator)
ADDB + 1 2 C 4 (V1420)
V1420 Acc. 1 C C 9
The binary value in the
accumulator is added to the
binary value in V1420
OUTD 1 C C 9
V1500
V1500
16bits of the accumulator to
V1500 and V1501
STR X(IN) 1 ENT
SHFT L D V 1 4 0 0 ENT
SHFT A D D B V 1 4 2 0 ENT
OU T SHFT D V 1 5 0 0 ENT

Add Binary Double (ADDBD)

DS Used Add Binary Double is a 32-bit instruction that adds the binary ADDBD
HPP Used value in the accumulator with the value (Aaaa), which is either A aaa
two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8-digit (max.) binary
constant. The result resides in the accumulator.
A aaa
Constant K 0-FFFF FFFF

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is added
with the binary value in V1420 and V1421 using the Add Binary Double instruction. The
DirectSOFT V-memory
V1401 V1400
X1 0 0 0 0 0 A 0 1
LDD LDD
V1400 K2561

and V1401 into the BIN
accumulator 0 0 0 0 0 A 0 1 (Accumulator)
+ 1 0 0 0 C 0 1 0 (V1421 and V1420)
ADDBD Acc. 1 0 0 0 C A 1 1
V1420
The binary value in the

accumulator is added with the
value in V1420 and V1421
1 0 0 0 C A 1 1
OUTD
V1500 V1501 V1500

and V1501
H andheld Programmer Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Keys trokes
$ B ENT
STR X(IN) 1
STR 1
LD S HF T D S HF T 3
ANDST V3 1 1 4 4 00 0 0
ADD S HF T B
SHFT A DD SDH F T B V D 1 B 4 E 2 C A
0 ENT
0 3 3 1 3 1 4 2 0
OU T S HF T GX D SHFT
S H FDT V B 1 F 5A A 0 ENT 0
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Subtract Binary (SUBB)

DS Used Subtract Binary is a 16-bit instruction that subtracts the S UBB
HPP Used binary value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or A aaa
a 4-digit (max.) binary constant, from the binary value in the
accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
A aaa
Constant K 0-FFFF, h=65636

SP64 On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.
using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is subtracted from the binary value in
the accumulator using the Subtract Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied
to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT Use either OR Constant

V-memory
X1 LD
LD
V1400 K1024
V1400
into the lower 16 bits of BIN 1 0 2 4
the accumulator
SUBB The unused accumulator

V1420 bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0 1 0 2 4 (Accumulator)
The binary value in V1420 is
subtracted from the value in
the accumulator
- 0 A 0 B (V1420)
Acc. 0 6 1 9
OUT
V1500
Copy the value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator to V1500
0 6 1 9
V1500
STR X(IN) 1 ENT
SHFT S SHFT U B B
V 1 4 2 0 ENT
OUT SHFT D V 1 5 0 0 ENT

Subtract Binary Double (SUBBD)

DS Used Subtract Binary Double is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts the
S UBBD
HPP Used binary value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory
A aaa
locations or an 8-digit (max.) binary constant, from the binary
value in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.

A aaa
Constant K 0-FFFF FFFF

into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in V1420 and
V1421 is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract Binary
Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the
Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT V-memory
X1 LDD LDD V1401 V1400

V1400 K393471 0 0 0 6 0 0 F F

and V1401 into the BIN
accumulator
0 0 0 6 0 0 F F (Accumulator)
SUBBD - 0 0 0 0 1 A 0 1 (V1421 and V1420)

V1420
Acc. 0 0 0 5 E 6 F E
The binary value in V1420 and
V1421 is subtracted from the
binary value in the accumulator
OUTD
0 0 0 5 E 6 F E
V1500
V1501 V1500
and V1501
Handheld Programmer
Handheld Keystrokes
Programmer Keystrokes
STR
$ BX(IN) 1 ENT
ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3
SHFT 3 U 1 4 0 0
SHFT S B B
S U B B D B E C A
VSHFT 1
RST
SHFT
4 ISG 2 1 0 1 ENT 3 1 4 2 0
ENT
GX
OUT SHFT D D B VF A1 A 5 ENT 0 0 ENT
SHFT
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Multiply Binary (MULB)

DS Used Multiply Binary is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies the
HPP Used binary value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or MULB
a 4-digit (max.) binary constant, by the binary value in the A aaa
accumulator. The result can be up to 32 bits and resides in the
accumulator.
A aaa
Constant K 0-FFFF

using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by the binary value in the
accumulator using the Multiply Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT Use either OR Constant

DirectSOFT32 Display V-memory
X1 V1400
LD
LD 0 A 0 1
V1400 K2561
into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator BIN
0 0 0 0 0 A 0 1 (Accumulator)
MULB
x 0 0 2 E (V1420)
V1420
Acc. 0 0 0 1 C C 2 E
The binary value in V1420 is
multiplied by the binary
value in the accumulator
OUTD
V1500 0 0 0 1 C C 2 E
Copy the value of the accumulator V1501 V1500

to V1500 and V1501
STR X 1 ENT
SHFT M U L B V 1 4 2 0 ENT

Divide Binary (DIVB)

Divide Binary is a 16-bit instruction that divides the binary value in
DS Used
the accumulator by a binary value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory DIVB
HPP Used location or a 16-bit (max.) binary constant. The first part of the A aaa
quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the
first stack location.

A aaa
Constant K 0-FFFF

using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value
in V1420 using the Divide Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT Display
DirectSOFT32 V-memory
X1 V1400
LD LDD
F A 0 1
V1400 K64001

into the lower 16 bits of BIN
the accumulator The unused accumulator
0 0 0 0 F A 0 1 (Accumulator)
DIVB
_.. 0 0 5 0 (V1420)
V1420
The binary value in th Acc. 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

accumulator is divided by
the binary value in V1420 First stack location contains
the remainder
OUT
V1500 0 3 2 0
Copy the value in the lower 16 V1500

bits of the accumulator to V1500

STR X 1 ENT
SHFT D I V B V 1 4 2 0 ENT

Increment Binary (INCB)

DS Used The Increment Binary instruction increments a binary value INCB
HPP Used in a specified V-memory location by “1” each time the A aaa
instruction is executed.
A aaa

In the following example when C5 is on, the binary value in V2000 is increased by 1.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
C5 4 A 3 C
INCB $ SHFT C F ENT
STR 2 5
V2000
SHFT I N C B C A A A ENT
Increment the binary value 8 TMR 2 1 2 0 0 0
in V2000 by“1” V2000
4 A 3 D
Decrement Binary (DECB)

DS Used The Decrement Binary instruction decrements a binary value in DECB
HPP Used a specified V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction A aaa
is executed.

A aaa

In the following example when C5 is on, the value in V2000 is decreased by 1.
DirectSOFT V2000
4 A ?
3 C
C5 DECB $ C F
SHFT ENT
STR 2 5
V2000
SHFT D E C B C A A A ENT
Decrement the binary value 3 4 2 1 2 0 0 0
in V2000 by“1” V2000
4 A ?
3 B

Add Formatted (ADDF)

DS Used Add Formatted is a 32-bit instruction that adds the BCD value
ADDF A aaa
HPP Used in the accumulator with the BCD value (Aaaa) which is a range
K bbb
of discrete bits. The specified range (Kbbb) can be 1 to 32
consecutive bits. The result resides in the accumulator.
A aaa bbb
Special Relays SP 0-137 320-717 ––
Global I/O GX 0-3777 ––

SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the BCD value formed by discrete locations
X0–X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the LDF instruction. The BCD value formed
by discrete locations C0–C3 is added to the value in the accumulator using the ADDF
instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–Y13 using
the OUTF instruction.
DirectSOFT
X3 X2 X1 X0
X6 Load the BCD value represented ON OFF OFF OFF
LDF X0
by discrete locations X0–X3
K4 into the accumulator
Add the BCD value in the 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 (Accumulator) C3 C2 C1 C0
ADDF C0
K4 represented by discrete + 3 (C0-C3) OFF OFF ON ON
location C0–C3
Acc. 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
OUTF Y10 Copy the lower 4 bits of the

accumulator to discrete
K4 locations Y10–Y13

$ G Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10
ENT
STR 6 OFF OFF OFF ON
SHFT L D F A E ENT
ANDST 3 5 0 4
SHFT A D D F NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT A E ENT

0 3 3 5 0 4
GX SHFT F B A E ENT
OUT 5 1 0 4

Subtract Formatted (SUBF)

Subtract Formatted is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts the
DS Used S UBF A aaa
BCD value (Aaaa), which is a range of discrete bits, from the
HPP Used K bbb
BCD value in the accumulator. The specified range (Kbbb) can
be 1 to 32 consecutive bits. The result resides in the accumulator.
A aaa bbb

SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
SP70 On any time the value in the accumulator is negative.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the BCD value formed by discrete locations X0–
X3 is loaded into the accumulator using the LDF instruction. The BCD value formed by
discrete location C0–C3 is subtracted from the BCD value in the accumulator using the SUBF
instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–Y13 using
the OUTF instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display X3 X2 X1 X0
X6 Load the BCD value represented ON OFF OFF ON
LDF X0
by discrete locations X0-X3 into
K4 the accumulator
Subtract the BCD value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 (Accumulator) C3 C2 C1 C0

SUBF C0
represented by C0-C3 from
K4 y 8 (C0-- C3) ON OFF OFF OFF
the value in the accumulator
ACC. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
OUTF Y10 Copy the lower 4 bits of the

K4 locations Y10-- Y13

Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10
$ G ENT OFF OFF OFF ON
STR 6
SHFT L D F A E ENT
ANDST 3 5 0 4
SHFT S U B F NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT A E ENT

SHFT
RST ISG 1 5 0 4
GX SHFT F B A E ENT
OUT 5 1 0 4

Multiply Formatted (MULF)

Multiply Formatted is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies the
DS Used
BCD value in the accumulator by the BCD value (Aaaa) which MULF A aaa
HPP Used
is a range of discrete bits. The specified range (Kbbb) can be 1 to K bbb
16 consecutive bits. The result resides in the accumulator.

A aaa bbb

In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value formed by
discrete locations C0–C3 is multiplied by the value in the accumulator using the Multiply
Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–
Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
X3 X2 X1 X0
X6 Load the value represented OFF OFF ON ON
LDF X0
by discrete locations X0-- X3
Multiply the value in the 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 (Accumulator) C3 C2 C1 C0
MULF C0
K4 represented by discrete X 2 (C0-- C3) OFF OFF ON OFF
locations C0-- C3
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6
OUTF Y10

$ G Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10
ENT
STR 6 OFF ON ON OFF
SHFT L D F A E ENT
ANDST 3 5 0 4
SHFT M U L F NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT A E ENT

ORST ISG ANDST 5 0 4
GX SHFT F B A E ENT
OUT 5 1 0 4

Divide Formatted (DIVF)

Divide Formatted is a 16-bit instruction that divides the BCD
DS Used
value in the accumulator by the BCD value (Aaaa), a range of DIVF A aaa
HPP Used discrete bits. The specified range (Kbbb) can be 1 to 16 consecutive K bbb
bits. The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and
the remainder resides in the first stack location..

A aaa bbb
Special Relays P 0-137 320-717 ––
Global I/O X 0-3777 ––

In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3
is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value in the
accumulator is divided by the value formed by discrete location C0–C3 using the Divide
Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–
Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display X3 X2 X1 X0
X6 Load the value represented ON OFF OFF OFF
LDF X0 by discrete locations X0-- X3
Divide the value in the 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 (Accumulator) C3 C2 C1 C0
DIVF C0 accumulator with the value _.. OFF OFF ON OFF
K4 represented by discrete 2 (C0-- C3)
location C0-- C3
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Copy the lower 4 bits of the First stack location contains

OUTF Y10 accumulator to discrete the remainder
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10
$ G OFF ON OFF OFF

ENT
STR 6
SHFT L D F A E ENT
ANDST 3 5 0 4
SHFT D I V F NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT A E ENT

3 8 AND 5 0 4
GX SHFT F B A E ENT
OUT 5 1 0 4

Add Top of Stack (ADDS)

DS Used Add Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that adds the BCD value
HPP Used in the accumulator with the BCD value in the first level of the ADDS
accumulator stack. The result resides in the accumulator. The
value in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed and all
stack values are moved up one level.

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded
in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is added with the value in the accumulator using the Add Stack instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectS OF T 32 Dis play V1401 V1400
X1 Load the value in V1400 and 0 0 3 9 5 0 2 6 Accumulator s tack

LDD after 1s t LDD
V1400
Acc. 0 0 3 9 5 0 2 6 Level 2 X X X X X X X X
V1421 V1420 Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Load the value in V1420 and 0 0 1 7 2 0 5 6 Level 5 X X X X X X X X

LDD
V1421 into the accumulator Level 6 X X X X X X X X
V1420
Acc. 0 0 1 7 2 0 5 6
ADDS Add the value in the

in the firs t level of the Acc. 0 0 5 6 7 0 8 2
accumulator s tack
Accumulator s tack
after 2nd LDD
C opy the value in the Level 1 0 0 3 9 5 0 2 6

OU T D
accumulator to V1500 Level 2 X X X X X X X X
V1500 and V1501
0 0 5 6 7 0 8 2 Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level 4 X X X X X X X X

V1501 V1500
$ B ENT
L D D B E A A Level 7 X X X X X X X X
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0 X X X X X X X X
Level 8
SHFT L D D B E C A ENT
ANDST 3 3 1 4 2 0
SHFT A D D S ENT
0 3 3 RST
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Subtract Top of Stack (SUBS)

DS Used Subtract Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts
HPP Used the BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack from S UBS
the BCD value in the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. The value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is removed and all stack values are moved up one level.

SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow.
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded
into the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The BCD value in the first level of the
accumulator stack is subtracted from the BCD value in the accumulator using the Subtract
Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out
Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display V1401 V1400
X1 Load the value in V1400 and 0 0 1 7 2 0 5 6 Accumulator stack
LDD after 1st LDD
V1400
LDD Load the value in V1420 and V1421 V1420 Level 4 X X X X X X X X

V1420 0 0 3 9 5 0 2 6 Level 5 X X X X X X X X
Acc. 0 0 3 9 5 0 2 6
Subtract the value in the first Level 8 X X X X X X X X
SUBS
level of the accumulator
stack from the value in the
accumulator
Acc. 0 0 2 2 2 9 7 0
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
OUTD Copy the value in the
Level 1 0 0 1 7 2 0 5 6
V1500 and V1501 Level 2 X X X X X X X X
Sta
0 0 2 2 2 9 7 0 Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Level 5 X X X X X X X X
$ B Level 6 X X X X X X X X
ENT
SHFT L D D B E A A ENT Level 8 X X X X X X X X
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
ANDST 3 3 1 4 2 0
SHFT S SHFT U B S ENT

RST ISG 1 RST
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Multiply Top of Stack (MULS)

DS Used Multiply Top of Stack is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies a
HPP Used 4-digit BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack by MULS
a 4-digit BCD value in the accumulator. The result resides in
the accumulator. The value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is removed and all stack values are moved up one level.
using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load
instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator
stack. The BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack is multiplied by the BCD
value in the accumulator using the Multiply Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display V1400
X1 Load the value in V1400 into 5 0 0 0 Accumulator stack
LD The unused accumulator after 1st LDD
the accumulator
LD Load the value in V1420 into 0 2 0 0 Level 5 X X X X X X X X

Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0
Multiply the value in the

MULS
in the first level of the
accumulator stack Acc. 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
OUTD Copy the value in the Level 1 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0

V1500 and V1501 Level 2 X X X X X X X X
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
V1501 V1500 Level 4 X X X X X X X X Standard RLL
$ B ENT
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT L D B E C A
ENT
ANDST 3 1 4 2 0
SHFT M U L S ENT
ORST ISG ANDST RST
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Divide by Top of Stack (DIVS)

DS Used Divide Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that divides the
HPP Used 8-digit BCD value in the accumulator by a 4-digit BCD value DIVS
in the first level of the accumulator stack. The result resides in
the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first level of the
accumulator stack.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load instruction loads the value in V1400 into
the accumulator. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double
instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator
stack. The BCD value in the accumulator is divided by the BCD value in the first level of the
accumulator stack using the Divide Stack instruction. The Out Double instruction copies the
value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501.
DirectSOFTDisplay
DirectSOFT32 V1400 Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
X1 Load the value in V1400 into 0 0 2 0
LD The unused accumulator X X X X X X X X
the accumulator Level 1
Load the value in V1420 and 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 Level 6 X X X X X X X X

LDD
V1420
Acc. 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
DIVS Divide the value in the
accumulator by the value in Level 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0
Acc. 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0
the first level of the Level 2 X X X X X X X X
accumulator stack
OUTD Level 5 X X X X X X X X
V1500 and V1501 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0 Level 6 X X X X X X X X

The remainder resides in the
$ B first stack location
ENT
STR 1
Level 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SHFT L D B E A A ENT X X X X X X X X
Level 2
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
ANDST 3 3 1 4 2 0 Level 4 X X X X X X X X
D I V S Level 5 X X X X X X X X
SHFT ENT
3 8 AND RST Level 6 X X X X X X X X
GX SHFT D B F A A ENT Level 7 X X X X X X X X
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Add Binary Top of Stack (ADDBS)

DS Used Add Binary Top of Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction that
HPP Used adds the binary value in the accumulator with the binary value in ADDBS
the first level of the accumulator stack. The result resides in the
accumulator. The value in the first level of the accumulator stack is
removed and all stack values are moved.
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the
accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The binary value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is added with the binary value in the accumulator using the Add Stack instruction. The
DirectSOFT
DirectS OF T 32 Dis play V1401 V1400
X1 Load the value in V1400 and 0 0 3 A 5 0 C 6 Accumulator s tack

LDD after 1s t LDD
V1400
Acc. 0 0 3 A 5 0 C 6 Level 2 X X X X X X X X
0 0 1 7 B 0 5 F Level 5 X X X X X X X X
LDD
V1420
Acc. 0 0 1 7 B 0 5 F
ADDBS Add the binary value in the

accumulator with the binary
Acc. 0 0 5 2 0 1 2 5
value in the firs t level of the
accumulator s tack Accumulator s tack
after 2nd LDD
Level 1 0 0 3 A 5 0 C 6
OU T D C opy the value in the
V1500 and V1501 0 0 5 2 0 1 2 5
S tandard R LL
$ B Level 6 X X X X X X X X
ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D D B E A A ENT Level 8 X X X X X X X X
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
ANDST 3 3 1 4 2 0
SHFT A D D B S ENT
0 3 3 1 RST
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Subtract Binary Top of Stack (SUBBS)

DS Used Subtract Binary Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts
HPP Used the binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack from S UBBS
the binary value in the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. The value in the first level of the accumulator stack
is removed and all stack locations are moved up one level

into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously
loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The binary value in the first level of the
accumulator stack is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract
Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out
Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display V1401 V1400
X1 0 0 1 A 2 0 5 B Accumulator stack
LDD Load the value in V1400 and
after 1st LDD
V1400
Acc. 0 0 1 A 2 0 5 B Level 2 X X X X X X X X
Load the value in V1420 and 0 0 3 A 5 0 C 6 Level 5 X X X X X X X X

LDD
V1420
Acc. 0 0 3 A 5 0 C 6
SUBBS Subtract the binary value in

the first level of the
accumulator stack from the 0 0 2 0 3 0 6 B
Acc.
binary value in the
accumulator Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
Copy the value in the Level 1 0 0 1 A 2 0 5 B

OUTD
V1500 and V1501
0 0 2 0 3 0 6 B Level 3 X X X X X X X X
V1501 V1500 X X X X X X X X
Level 4
$ B ENT Level 6 X X X X X X X X
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 1 4 2 0
SHFT S U B B S ENT
SHFT
RST ISG 1 1 RST
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Multiply Binary Top of Stack (MULBS)

DS Used Multiply Binary Top of Stack is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies
HPP Used the 16-bit binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack
MULBS
by the 16-bit binary value in the accumulator. The result resides
in the accumulator and can be 32 bits (8 digits max.). The value
in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed and all stack
locations are moved up one level

In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load instruction moves the value in V1400
into the accumulator. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load
instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the stack. The binary
value in the accumulator stack’s first level is multiplied by the binary value in the accumulator
using the Multiply Binary Stack instruction. The Out Double instruction copies the value in
the accumulator to V1500 and V1501.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 Accumulator stack
C 3 5 0 after 1st LDD
X1 LD Load the value in V1400 into
Acc. 0 0 0 0 C 3 5 0
LD Load the value in V1420 into The unused accumulator
the accumulator bits are set to zero Level 7 X X X X X X X X
V1420
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4
MULBS Multiply the binary value in

the accumulator with the
binary value in the first level Acc. 0 0 0 F 4 2 4 0 Accumulator stack
of the accumulator stack after 2nd LDD
Level 1 0 0 0 0 C 3 5 0
V1500 0 0 0 F 4 2 4 0
and V1501 Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Standard RLL
Instructions
$ B ENT
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT L D B E C A
ENT
ANDST 3 1 4 2 0
SHFT M U L B S ENT
ORST ISG ANDST 1 RST
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Divide Binary by Top OF Stack (DIVBS)

DS Used Divide Binary Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that divides
HPP Used the 32-bit binary value in the accumulator by the 16-bit binary DIVBS
value in the first level of the accumulator stack. The result resides
in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first level of
the accumulator stack.

using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load Double instruction also, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator
onto the accumulator stack. The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value
in the first level of the accumulator stack using the Divide Binary Stack instruction. The value
in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display V1400 Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
X1 Load the value in V1400 into 0 0 1 4
LD The unused accumulator
the accumulator Level 1 X X X X X X X X
0 0 0 0 C 3 5 0 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
LDD Load the value in V1420 and
V1420
Acc. 0 0 0 0 C 3 5 0
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
DIVBS Divide the binary value in
Level 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 4
the accumulator by the
binary value in the first level Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 9 C 4
of the accumulator stack
V1500 and V1501 0 0 0 0 0 9 C 4
V1501 V1500
The remainder resides in the
$ B ENT first stack location
STR 1
Level 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0 Level 2 X X X X X X X X
L D D B E C A Level 3 X X X X X X X X
SHFT ENT
SHFT D I V B S ENT Level 5 X X X X X X X X

3 8 AND 1 RST
OUT 3 1 5 0 0 Level 7 X X X X X X X X

Transcendental Functions
The DL06 CPU features special numerical functions to complement its real number capability.
The transcendental functions include the trigonometric sine, cosine, and tangent, and also their
inverses (arc sine, arc cosine, and arc tangent). The square root function is also grouped with
these other functions.
The transcendental math instructions operate on a real number in the accumulator (it cannot be
BCD or binary). The real number result resides in the accumulator. The square root function
operates on the full range of positive real numbers. The sine, cosine and tangent functions
require numbers expressed in radians. You can work with angles expressed in degrees by first
converting them to radians with the Radian (RADR) instruction, then performing the trig
function. All transcendental functions utilize the following flag bits.
SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is an invalid floating point number
SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number encountered.
Sine Real (SINR)

DS Used The Sine Real instruction takes the sine of the real number stored
HPP N/A in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator. Both S INR
the original number and the result must be Real data type (IEEE
floating point format).
Cosine Real (COSR)
DS Used The Cosine Real instruction takes the cosine of the real number
COSR
HPP N/A stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Both the original number and the result must be Real data type
(IEEE floating point format)..
Tangent Real (TANR)
DS Used The Tangent Real instruction takes the tangent of the real number
stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator. TANR
HPP N/A
Both the original number and the result must be Real data type
(IEEE floating point format).
Arc Sine Real (ASINR)
DS Used The Arc Sine Real instruction takes the inverse sine of the real
AS INR
HPP N/A number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and the result must be
Real data type (IEEE floating point format).

Arc Cosine Real (ACOSR)

DS Used The Arc Cosine Real instruction takes the inverse cosine of the ACOSR
HPP N/A real number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and the result must be Real
data type (IEEE floating point format).
Arc Tangent Real (ATANR)
DS Used The Arc Tangent Real instruction takes the inverse tangent of the ATANR
Square Root Real (SQRTR)
DS Used The Square Root Real instruction takes the square root of the SQR TR
NOTE: The square root function can be useful in several situations. However, if you are trying to do the
square-root extract function for an orifice flow meter measurement, as the PV to a PID loop, note that the
PID loop already has the square-root extract function built in.
The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees. Since these transcendental functions
operate only on real numbers, we do an LDR (load real) 45. The trig functions operate only
in radians, so we must convert the degrees to radians by using the RADR command. After
using the SINR (Sine Real) instruction, we use an OUTD (Out Double) instruction to move
the result from the accumulator to V-memory. The result is 32-bits wide, requiring the Out
Double to move it.
Accumulator contents
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT 5 (viewed as real number)
X1 LDR Load the real number 45 into
R45
the accumulator. 45.000000
Convert the degrees into radians,

RADR
leaving the result in the 0.7358981
accumulator.
SINR Take the sine of the number in

the accumulator, which is in 0.7071067
radians.

V2000
and V2001.
0.7071067
format. You must use DirectSOFT for entering real numbers, using the LDR (Load Real) instruction.

Bit Operation Instructions

Sum (SUM)
DS Used The Sum instruction counts number of bits that are set to “1” in the SUM
HPP Used accumulator. The HEX result resides in the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X10–X17 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The number of bits in the
accumulator set to “1” is counted using the Sum instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Display
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
X1 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
LDF X10
K8 The unused accumulator
Load the value represented by
discrete locations X10–X17
into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5
SUM
Sum the number of bits in

the accumulator set to “1”
OUT 0 0 0 5
V1500
V1500
to V1500
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D F B A I ENT
ANDST 3 5 1 0 8
SHFT S SHFT U M ENT

RST ISG ORST
GX PREV PREV PREV B F A A ENT
OUT 1 5 0 0

Shift Left (SHFL)

DS Used Shift Left is a 32-bit instruction that shifts the bits in the SHFL
HPP Used accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the left.
A aaa
The vacant positions are filled with zeros and the bits shifted
out of the accumulator are discarded.

A aaa
Constant K 1-32

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is
shifted 2 bits to the left using the Shift Left instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied
to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
V2001 V2000
X1 LDD 6 7 0 5 33 31 10 01
V2000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SHFL Acc. 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
K2
The bit pattern in the

accumulator is shifted 2 bit
positions to the left Shifted out of the
. . . .
accumulator
OUTD
V2010
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Copy the value in the Acc. 0
1 0 0 0
1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
V2011
9 C 1 4 C 4 0 4
V2011 V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT S SHFT H F L C ENT

RST 7 5 ANDST 2
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

Shift Right (SHFR)

DS Used Shift Right is a 32-bit instruction that shifts the bits in the SHFR
HPP Used accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the right. A aaa
The vacant positions are filled with zeros and the bits shifted
out of the accumulator are lost.
A aaa
Constant K 1-32

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is
shifted 2 bits to the right using the Shift Right instruction. The value in the accumulator is
DirectSOFT
X1 Constant 6 7 0 5 33 11 00 11
LDD
V2000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SHFR Acc. 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
K2
... .
accumulator is shifted 2 bit
positions to the right Shifted out of the
accumulator
OUTD
V2010 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Copy the value in the Acc. 0 0 0 0

1 0
1 1
0 0 0
1 0
1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
V2011
1 9 C 1 4 C 4 0
V2011 V2010
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT S SHFT H F R C ENT

RST 7 5 ORN 2
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

Rotate Left (ROTL)

DS Used Rotate Left is a 32-bit instruction that rotates the bits in the R OTL
HPP Used accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the left. A aaa

A aaa
Constant K 1-32

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated
2 bit positions to the left using the Rotate Left instruction. The value in the accumulator is
DirectSOFT
V1401 V1400
X1
LDD 6 7 0 5 3 1 0 1
V1400

ROTL 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K2 Acc. 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

accumulator is rotated 2
bit positions to the left
OUTD
V1500
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
accumulator to V1500 Acc. 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
and V1501
9 C 1 4 C 4 0 5
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT R O T L C ENT
ORN INST# MLR ANDST 2
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Rotate Right (ROTR)

DS Used Rotate Right is a 32-bit instruction that rotates the bits in the R OTR
HPP Used accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the right. A aaa

A aaa
Constant K 1-32

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated
2 bit positions to the right using the Rotate Right instruction. The value in the accumulator is
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT Display
V1401 V1400
X1 LDD 6 7 0 5 3 1 0 1
V1400

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ROTR
Acc. 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
K2

accumulator is rotated 2
bit positions to the right
OUTD
V1500
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Copy the value in the 0 0
1 0 0
1 0
1 1
0 0 0
1 0
1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Acc.
and V1501
5 9 C 1 4 C 4 0
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT R O T R C ENT
ORN INST# MLR ORN 2
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Encode (ENCO)
DS Used The Encode instruction encodes the bit position in the
HPP Used accumulator having a value of 1, and returns the appropriate
binary representation. If the most significant bit is set to 1 (Bit 31),
the Encode instruction would place the value HEX 1F (decimal ENCO
31) in the accumulator. If the value to be encoded is 0000 or
0001, the instruction will place a zero in the accumulator. If the
value to be encoded has more than one bit position set to a “1”,
the least significant “1” will be encoded and SP53 will be set on.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, The value in V2000 is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The bit position set to a “1” in the accumulator is encoded to the
corresponding 5 bit binary value using the Encode instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
1 0 0 0
X1 LD
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit postion 12 is
converted
to binary
ENCO
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Encode the bit position set
to “1” in the accumulator to a Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 bit binary value
OUT
V2010
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits 0 0 0 C

of the accumulator to V2010
V2010 Binary value
for 12.
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT E N C O ENT
4 TMR 2 INST#
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

Decode (DECO)
DS Used The Decode instruction decodes a 5-bit binary value of 0–31
HPP Used (0–1Fh) in the accumulator by setting the appropriate bit
position to a 1. If the accumulator contains the value Fh (HEX), DECO
bit 15 will be set in the accumulator. If the value to be decoded
is greater than 31, the number is divided by 32 until the value is
less than 32 and then the value is decoded.
In the following example when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X10–X14 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The 5- bit binary pattern in
the accumulator is decoded by setting the corresponding bit position to a “1” using the Decode
instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
X1 LDF X10 OFF ON OFF ON ON
K5
Load the value in

represented by discrete
locations X10–X14 into the
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
The binary vlaue

is converted to
bit position 11.
DECO
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Decode the five bit binary Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
pattern in the accumulator
and set the corresponding
bit position to a “1”
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D F B A F ENT
ANDST 3 5 1 0 5
SHFT D E C O ENT
3 4 2 INST#

Number Conversion Instructions

(Accumulator)
Binary (BIN)
DS Used The Binary instruction converts a BCD value in the accumulator BIN
HPP Used to the equivalent binary, or decimal, value. The result resides in
the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BCD value in the accumulator is
converted to the binary (HEX) equivalent using the BIN instruction. The binary value in the
accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction. (The handheld
programmer will display the binary value in V2010 and V2011 as a HEX value.)
DirectSOFT
DirectS OF T 32 V2001 V2000
X1 0 0 0 2 8 5 2 9
LDD
V2000

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
BCD Value
28529 = 16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1
BIN Binary Equivalent Value
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Convert the BCD value in Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
the accumulator to the
binary equivalent value 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1
1 0 3 6 3 7 3 6 3 1 0 0 2 6 3 5 2 6 1 0 0 0 1 5 2 4 2 6
4 7 6 8 4 1 5 7 8 9 9 4 4 2 1 5 7 3 9 9 4 2 2 6 8
7 3 8 4 2 0 5 7 8 4 7 8 2 1 0 3 6 8 2 6 8 4
4 7 7 3 1 8 4 7 6 3 1 5 8 4 7 6 8 4
4 4 0 5 7 8 4 2 0 0 5 7 8 4 2
8 1 9 4 7 6 3 1 8 4 2 6
3 8 1 5 2 4 2 6
6 2 2 6 8
4 4
8
OU T D
V2010 The Binary (HEX)
0 0 0 0 6 F 7 1 value copied to
Copy the binary data in the
V2010
S tandard R LL
Ins tructions
Handheld Programmer Keys trokes
$ B
E NT
STR 1
L D D C A A A
S HF T E NT
ANDS T 3 3 2 0 0 0
S HF T B I N E NT
1 8 T MR
GX D C A B A
S HF T E NT
OU T 3 2 0 1 0

Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)

DS Used The Binary Coded Decimal instruction converts a binary, BCD
HPP Used or decimal, value in the accumulator to the equivalent BCD
value. The result resides in the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary, or decimal, value in V2000 and V2001 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator
is converted to the BCD equivalent value using the BCD instruction. The BCD value in the
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 5 V2001 V2000
X1 0 0 0 0 6 F 7 1
LDD
V2000 Binary Value

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1
1 0 3 6 3 7 3 6 3 1 0 0 2 6 3 5 2 6 1 0 0 0 1 5 2 4 2 6
4 7 6 8 4 1 5 7 8 9 9 4 4 2 1 5 7 3 9 9 4 2 2 6 8
7 3 8 4 2 0 5 7 8 4 7 8 2 1 0 3 6 8 2 6 8 4
4 7 7 3 1 8 4 7 6 3 1 5 8 4 7 6 8 4
4 4 0 5 7 8 4 2 0 0 5 7 8 4 2
8 1 9 4 7 6 3 1 8 4 2 6
3 8 1 5 2 4 2 6
6 2 2 6 8
4 4
8
BCD
16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1 = 28529
Convert the binary, or decimal, BCD Equivalent Value

value in the accumulator to the
BCD equivalent value 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
OUTD
V2010
Copy the BCD value in the 0 0 0 2 8 5 2 9 The BCD value

accumulator to V2010 and V2011 copied to
V2011 V2010 V2010 and V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
L D D C A A A
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT B C D ENT
1 2 3
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

Invert (INV)
DS Used The Invert instruction inverts or takes the one’s complement INV
HPP Used of the 32-bit value in the accumulator. The result resides in
the accumulator.
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is inverted
using the Invert instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011
using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1 0 4 0 5 00 22 55 00
LDD
V2000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
INV
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
Invert the binary bit pattern
in the accumulator
OUTD F B F A F D A F
V2010 V2011 V2010
V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT I N V ENT
8 TMR AND
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

Ten’s Complement (BCDCPL)

DS Used The Ten’s Complement instruction takes the 10’s complement BC DC P L
HPP Used (BCD) of the 8 digit accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. The calculation for this instruction is:
100000000
s accumulator
10’s complement value
In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into the
accumulator. The 10’s complement is taken for the 8 digit accumulator using the Ten’s
Complement instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using
the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectS OF T 32 V2001 V2000
0 0 0 0 0 0 8 7
X1
LDD
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 7

BC DC PL 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 3
Acc.
Takes a 10’s complement of

the value in the accumulator
OU T D 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 3
V2010
V2011 V2010
C opy the value in the
V2011
H andheld Programmer Keys trokes
$ B E NT
STR 1
S HF T L D D C A A A E NT
ANDS T 3 3 2 0 0 0
S HF T B C D C P L E NT
1 2 3 2 CV ANDS T
GX D C A B A
S HF T E NT
OU T 3 2 0 1 0

Binary to Real Conversion (BTOR)

DS Used The Binary-to-Real instruction converts a binary, or decimal,
HPP Used value in the accumulator to its equivalent real number BT O R
(floating point) format. The result resides in the accumulator.
Both the binary and the real number may use all 32 bits of the
accumulator.
NOTE: This instruction only works with unsigned binary, or decimal, values. It will not work with signed
decimal values.

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BTOR instruction converts the binary,
or decimal, value in the accumulator to the equivalent real number format. The binary weight
of the MSB is converted to the real number exponent by adding it to 127 (decimal). Then the
remaining bits are copied to the mantissa as shown. The value in the accumulator is copied
to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction. The handheld programmer would
display the binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value.
DirectSOFT V1401 V1400
X1 0 0 0 5 7 2 4 1
LDD
V1400

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
Binary Value
2 (exp 18)
127 + 18 = 145
145 = 128 + 16 + 1
BTOR
Convert the binary, or decimal,

value in the accumulator to the
real number equivalent format Acc. 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Sign Bit Exponent (8 bits) Mantissa (23 bits)
Real Number Format
OUTD
V1500
4 8 A E 4 8 2 0 The real number (HEX) value
Copy the real value in the copied to V1500
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT B T O R ENT
1 MLR INST# ORN
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Real to Binary Conversion (RTOB)

DS Used The Real-to-Binary instruction converts the real number in
R TOB
HPP Used the accumulator to a binary value. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the binary and the real number may use all
32 bits of the accumulator.
NOTE1: The decimal portion of the result will be rounded down (14.1 to 14; -14.1 to -15).
NOTE2: if the real number is negative, it becomes a signed decimal value.

SP75 On when a number cannot be converted to binary.
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The RTOB instruction converts the real
value in the accumulator the equivalent binary number format. The value in the accumulator
is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction. The handheld programmer
would display the binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 4 8 A E 4 8 2 0 Real Number Format

LDD
V1400 V1401 V1400

Sign Bit Exponent (8 bits) Mantissa (23 bits)
Acc. 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
RTOB
Convert the real number in

the accumulator to binary 128 + 16 + 1 = 145
format. 127 + 18 = 145
Binary Value
2 (exp 18)
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
OUTD
V1500
Copy the real value in the

The binary number copied to
0 0 0 5 7 2 4 1 V1500.
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 1 4 0 0
SHFT R T O B ENT
ORN MLR INST# 1
OUT 3 1 5 0 0

Radian Real Conversion (RADR)

DS Used The Radian Real Conversion instruction converts the real degree R ADR
HPP N/A value stored in the accumulator to the equivalent real number in
radians. The result resides in the accumulator.
Degree Real Conversion (DEGR)
DS32 Used The Degree Real instruction converts the degree real radian DE G R
HPP N/A value stored in the accumulator to the equivalent real number
in degrees. The result resides in the accumulator.
SP75 On when a number cannot be converted to binary.
The two instructions described above convert real numbers into the accumulator from degree
format to radian format, and vice-versa. In degree format, a circle contains 360 degrees. In
radian format, a circle contains 2f (about 6.28) radians. These convert between both positive
and negative real numbers, and for angles greater than a full circle. These functions are very
useful when combined with the transcendental trigonometric functions (see the section on
math instructions).
format. You must use DirectSOFT for entering real numbers, using the LDR (Load Real) instruction.
The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees. Since transcendental functions operate only
on real numbers, we do an LDR (load real) 45. The trig functions operate only in radians, so we
must convert the degrees to radians by using the RADR command. After using the SINR (Sine
Real) instruction, we use an OUTD (Out Double) instruction to move the result from the
accumulator to V-memory. The result is 32-bits wide, requiring the Out Double to move it.
Accumulator contents
DirectSOFT32 (viewed as real number)
X1 Load the real number 45 into
LDR
DirectSOFT R45
the accumulator. 45.000000
RADR Convert the degrees into radians,

leaving the result in the 0.7853982
accumulator.
SINR Take the sine of the number in

the accumulator, which is in 0.7071067
radians.

V2000
and V2001.
0.7071067

ASCII to HEX (ATH)

DS Used The ASCII TO HEX instruction converts a table of ASCII values
HPP N/A to a specified table of HEX values. ASCII values are two digits and
their HEX equivalents are one digit. This means an ASCII table
of four V-memory locations would only require two V-memory
locations for the equivalent HEX table. The function parameters ATH
are loaded into the accumulator stack and the accumulator by V aaa
two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary
to program an ASCII to HEX table function. The example on
the following page shows a program for the ASCII to HEX table
function.
Step 1: Load the number of V-memory locations for the ASCII table into the first level of the
accumulator stack.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the ASCII table into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Specify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the HEX table in the ATH
instruction.
Helpful Hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations,
the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load

aaa

In the example on the following page, when X1 is ON the constant (K4) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction and will be placed in the first level of the accumulator
stack when the next Load instruction is executed. The starting location for the ASCII table
(V1400) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The starting
location for the HEX table (V1600) is specified in the ASCII to HEX instruction. The table
below lists valid ASCII values for ATH conversion.
ASCII Values Valid for ATH Conversion
ASCII Value Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value
30 0 38 8
31 1 39 9
32 2 41 A
33 3 42 B
34 4 43 C
35 5 44 D
36 6 45 E
37 7 46 F

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Hexadecimal
ASCII T ABLE Equivalents
X1 LD Load the constant value
into the lower 16 bits of the
K4 accumulator. This value
defines the number of V
memory location in the
ASCII table
V1400 33 34
LDA Convert octal 1400 to HEX
O 1400
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
1234 V1600
V1401 31 32
ATH V1600 is the starting
location for the HEX table
V1600
$
STR
B
1
ENT V1402 37 38
SHFT L
ANDST
D
3
PREV E
4
ENT 5678 V1601
L D A B E A A
SHFT
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0 0
ENT
V1403 35 36
SHFT A T H B G A A ENT
0 MLR 7 1 6 0 0
HEX to ASCII (HTA)

DS Used The HEX to ASCII instruction converts a table of HEX values to HTA
HPP N/A a specified table of ASCII values. HEX values are one digit and V aaa
their ASCII equivalents are two digits.
This means a HEX table of two V-memory locations would require four V-memory locations
for the equivalent ASCII table. The function parameters are loaded into the accumulator stack
and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to
program a HEX to ASCII table function. The example on the following page shows a program
for the HEX to ASCII table function.
Step 1: Load the number of V-memory locations in the HEX table into the first level of
the accumulator stack.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the HEX table into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3:Specify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the ASCII table in the HTA
instruction.


aaa

In the following example, when X1 is ON, the constant (K2) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The starting location for the HEX table (V1500) is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The starting location for the ASCII table
(V1400) is specified in the HEX to ASCII instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
Hexadecimal
X1 LD Equivalents ASCII T ABLE
K2
Load the constant value into

the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator. This value
defines the number of V 33 34 V1400
locations in the HEX table.
V1500 1234
LDA
O 1500
31 32 V1401
Convert octal 1500 to HEX

the accumulator
HTA 37 38 V1402
V1400
V1400 is the starting

V1501 5678
location for the ASCII table.
The conversion is executed
by this instruction.
35 36 V1403
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D SHFT K E ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 4
SHFT L D A B F A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 1 5 0 0
SHFT H T A B E A A ENT
7 MLR 0 1 4 0 0
The table below lists valid ASCII values for HTA conversion.
ASCII Values Valid for HTA Conversion
Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value ASCII Value
0 30 8 38
1 31 9 39
2 32 A 41
3 33 B 42
4 34 C 43
5 35 D 44
6 36 E 45
7 37 F 46

Segment (SEG)
DS Used The BCD / Segment instruction converts a four digit HEX value in SEG
HPP Used the accumulator to seven segment display format. The result resides
in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 is loaded into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The HEX value in the accumulator is converted
to seven segment format using the Segment instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is
copied to Y20–Y57 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display V1400
X1 6 F 7 1
LD
V1400
Load the value in V1400 nto the

lower 16 bits of the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
SEG
Convert the binary (HEX)

value in the accumulator to
seven segment display
format
OUTF Y20
K32
Copy the value in the 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

accumulator to Y20-- Y57
Acc. 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
- g f e d c b a - g f e d c b a - g f e d c b a - g f e d c b a Segment
Labels
a
f b
Segment Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
Labels g
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
e c
$ B ENT
STR 1
L D B E A A ENT
ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
S E G ENT
SHFT SHFT
RST 4 6
GX F C A D C
SHFT ENT
OUT 5 2 0 3 2

Gray Code (GRAY)

DS Used The Gray code instruction converts a 16-bit gray code value GRAY
HPP Used to a BCD value. The BCD conversion requires 10 bits of the
accumulator. The upper 22 bits are set to “0”
This instruction is designed for use with devices (typically encoders) that use the gray code
numbering scheme. The Gray Code instruction will directly convert a gray code number to a
BCD number for devices having a resolution of 512 or 1024 counts per revolution. If a device
having a resolution of 360 counts per revolution is to be used, you must subtract a BCD value
of 76 from the converted value to obtain the proper result. For a device having a resolution of
720 counts per revolution, you must subtract a BCD value of 152.
In the following example, when X1 is ON, the binary value represented by X10–X27 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The gray code value in the
accumulator is converted to BCD using the Gray Code instruction. The value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator is copied to V2010.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X27 X26 X25 X12 X11 X10
X1 LDF K16 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
X10
Load the value represented

by X10–X27 into the lower
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
GRAY
Convert the 16 bit grey code

value in the accumulator to a
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BCD value
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
OUT
V2010

16 bits of the accumulator to Gray Code BCD
V2010
0000000000 0000 0 0 0 6
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 0000000001 0001 V2010

0000000011 0002
$ B ENT
STR 1 0000000010 0003
L D F B A B G 0000000110 0004
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 5 1 0 1 6
0000000111 0005
SHFT G R A Y ENT
6 ORN 0 MLS 0000000101 0006
GX V C A B A 0000000100 0007
SHFT ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
1000000001 1022
1000000000 1023

Shuffle Digits (SFLDGT)

DS Used The Shuffle Digits instruction shuffles a maximum of 8 digits,
HPP Used rearranging them in a specified order. This function requires
parameters to be loaded into the first level of the accumulator SFLDGT
stack and the accumulator with two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to use the shuffle digit
function. The example on the following page shows a program
for the Shuffle Digits function.
Step 1: Load the value (digits) to be shuffled into the first level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: Load the order that the digits will be shuffled to into the accumulator.
Step 3: Insert the SFLDGT instruction.
NOTE: If the number used to specify the order contains a 0 or 9–F, the corresponding position
will be set to 0.
Shuffle Digits Block Diagram

There are a maximum of 8 digits that can be shuffled. The bit positions in the first level of the
accumulator stack define the digits to be shuffled. They correspond to the bit positions in the
accumulator that define the order the digits will be shuffled. The digits are shuffled and the
result resides in the accumulator.
Digits to be
shuffled (first stack location)
9 A B C D E F 0
1 2 8 7 3 6 5 4
Specified order (accumulator)
Bit Positions 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
B C E F 0 D A 9
Result (accumulator)

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in the first level of the accumulator stack
will be reorganized in the order specified by the value in the accumulator.
Example A shows how the shuffle digits works when 0 or 9–F is not used when specifying the
order the digits are to be shuffled. Also, there are no duplicate numbers in the specified order.
Example B shows how the Shuffle Digits works when a 0 or 9–F is used when specifying the
order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits instruction is executed, the
bit positions in the first stack location that had a corresponding 0 or 9–F in the accumulator
(order specified) are set to “0”.
Example C shows how the Shuffle Digits works when duplicate numbers are used specifying
the order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits instruction is executed,
the most significant duplicate number in the order specified is used in the result.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
A B C
X1 LDD V2001 V2000 V2001 V2000 V2001 V2000
V2000 9 A B C D E F 0 0 F E D C B A 9 9 A B C D E F 0

Original 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
bit
Positions 9 A B C D E F 0 Acc. 0 F E D C B A 9 Acc. 9 A B C D E F 0 Acc.
V2007 V2006 V2007 V2006 V2007 V2006

LDD
V2006 1 2 8 7 3 6 5 4 0 0 4 3 0 0 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

V2007 into the accumulator Specified 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
order
1 2 8 7 3 6 5 4 Acc. 0 0 4 3 0 0 2 1 Acc. 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 Acc.
New bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SFLDGT Positions
B C E F 0 D A 9 Acc. 0 0 0 0 E D A 9 Acc. 0 0 0 0 9 A B C Acc.
Shuf fle the digits in the first

level of the accumulator
stack based on the pattern
in the accumulator. The
result is in the accumulator .
OUTD
B C E F 0 D A 9 0 0 0 0 E D A 9 0 0 0 0 9 A B C
V2010
V2011 V2010 V2011 V2010 V2011 V2010
V2011
$ B ENT
STR 1
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT L D D C A A G ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 6
SHFT S SHFT F L D G T ENT

RST 5 ANDST 3 6 MLR
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

Table Instructions
Move (MOV)
DS Used The Move instruction moves the values from a V-memory table to
HPP Used another V-memory table the same length (a table being a consecutive
group of V-memory locations). The function parameters are loaded MOV
into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator V aaa
by two additional instructions. The MOV instruction can be used
to write data to non-volatile V-memory (see Appendix F). Listed
below are the steps necessary to program the MOV function.
• Step 1 Load the number of V-memory locations to be moved into the first level of the accumulator
stack. This parameter is a HEX value (KFFF max, 7777 octal, 4096 decimal).
• Step 2 Load the starting V-memory location for the locations to be moved into the accumulator.
This parameter is a HEX value.
• Step 3 Insert the MOV instruction which specifies starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the
destination table.
aaa
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first
stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 2000 (V2000),
the starting location for the source table, is loaded into the accumulator. The destination table
location (V2030) is specified in the Move instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 Load the constant value 6

LD (HEX) into the lower 16 bits X X X X V2026
K6 of the accumulator
X X X X V2027
Convert octal 2000 to HEX 0 1 2 3 V2000 0 1 2 3 V2030
LDA 400 and load the value into
O 2000 the accumulator 0 5 0 0 V2001 0 5 0 0 V2031
9 9 9 9 V2002 9 9 9 9 V2032
Copy the specified table
MOV locations to a table 3 0 7 4 V2003 3 0 7 4 V2033
V2030 beginning at location V2030
8 9 8 9 V2004 8 9 8 9 V2034
1 0 1 0 V2005 1 0 1 0 V2035
X X X X V2006 X X X X V2036
$ B ENT
STR 1 X X X X V2007 X X X X V2037
SHFT L D SHFT K G ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 6
SHFT L D A C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 2 0 0 0
SHFT M O V C A D A ENT
ORST INST# AND 2 0 3 0

Move Memory Cartridge (MOVMC)

Load Label (LDLBL)
DS Used The Move Memory Cartridge instruction is used to copy data
HPP Used between V-memory and program ladder memory. The Load Label MOVMC
instruction is only used with the MOVMC instruction when V aaa
copying data from program ladder memory to V-memory.
To copy data between V-memory and program ladder memory,
the function parameters are loaded into the first two levels of LDLBL
the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional K aaa
instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the
MOVMC and LDLBL functions.
• Step 1: L oad the number of words to be copied into the second level of the accumulator stack.
• Step 2: Load the offset for the data label area in ladder memory and the beginning of the V-memory
block into the first level of the stack.
• Step 3: Load the source data label (LDLBL Kaaa) into the accumulator when copying data from
ladder memory to V-memory. Load the source address into the accumulator when copying
data from V-memory to ladder memory. This is where the value will be copied from. If the
source address is a V-memory location, the value must be entered in HEX.
• Step 4:Insert the MOVMC instruction which specifies destination in V-memory (Vaaa). This is
the copy destination.
A aaa
NOTE: Refer to page 5-188 for an example.
WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0, but may be any number that does not
result in data outside of the source data area being copied into the destination table. When an offset
is outside of the source information boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into the
destination table.

Copy Data From a Data Label Area to V-memory

In the example below, data is copied from a Data Label Area to V-memory. When X1 is on,
the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load (LD) instruction. This
value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the second stack location after the next
Load and Load Label (LDLBL) instructions are executed. The constant value (K0) is loaded
into the accumulator, specifying the offset for the source and destination data. It is placed in the
first stack location after the LDLBL instruction is executed. The source address where data is
being copied from is loaded into the accumulator using the LDLBL instruction. The MOVMC
instruction specifies the destination starting location and executes the copying of data from the
Data Label Area to V-memory.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Data label area .
X1 LD
programmed after
the END instruction
.
K4 X X X X V1777
Load the value 4 into the DLBL K1

accumulator specifying the N C O N 1 2 3 4 V2000
number of locations to be
copied. K 1 2 3 4
N C O N 4 5 3 2 V2001
LD
K 4 5 3 2
K0
N C O N 6 1 5 1 V2002
K 6 1 5 1
accumulator specifying the
offset for source and N C O N 8 8 4 5 V2003
destination locations
K 8 8 4 5
LDLBL X X X X V2004
K1 .
Load the value 1 into the .
accumulator specifying the
Data Label Area K1 as the
starting address of the data
to be copied.
MOVMC
V2000
V2000 is the destination

starting address for the data
to be copied.
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D SHFT K E ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 4
SHFT L D SHFT K A ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 0
SHFT L D L B L B ENT
ANDST 3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1
SHFT M O V M C C A A A ENT
ORST INST# AND ORST 2 2 0 0 0

SETBIT
DS Used The Set Bit instruction sets a single bit to one within a SETBIT
HPP Used range of V-memory locations. A aaa
RSTBIT
RSTBIT
DS Used The Reset Bit instruction resets a single bit to zero A aaa
HPP Used within a range of V-memory locations.
The following description applies to both the Set Bit and Reset Bit table instructions.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter
must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to
hex.
Step 3: Insert the Set Bit or Reset Bit instruction. This specifies the reference for the bit number
of the bit you want to set or reset. The bit number is in octal, and the first bit in the
table is number “0”.
Helpful hint: — Remember that each V-memory location contains 16 bits. So, the bits of the
first word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal. For example, if the table length is six
words, then 6 words = (6 x 16) bits, = 96 bits (decimal), or 140 octal. The permissible range of
bit reference numbers would be 0 to 137 octal. SP 53 will be set if the bit specified is outside
the range of the table.
aaa

SP53 On when the specified bit is outside the range of the table.
NOTE: Status flags are only valid until the end of the scan or until another instruction that uses the same
flag is executed.
V3000
For example, suppose we have a table MSB LSB
starting at V3000 that is two words long,
as shown to the right. Each word in the
table contains 16 bits, or 0 to 17 in octal. 16 bits
To set bit 12 in the second word, we
use its octal reference (bit 14). Then we V3001
compute the bit’s octal address from the MSB LSB
start of the table, so 17 + 14 = 34 octal.
The following program shows how to set
the bit as shown to a “1”. 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 32 1 0

In this ladder example, we will use input X0 to trigger the Set Bit operation. First, we will
load the table length (2 words) into the accumulator stack. Next, we load the starting address
into the accumulator. Since V3000 is an octal number, we have to convert it to hex by using
the LDA command. Finally, we use the Set Bit (or Reset Bit) instruction and specify the octal
address of the bit (bit 34), referenced from the table.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT Display32

LD
(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
K2 of the accumulator.

LDA
and load the value into the
O 3000 accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
SETBIT Set bit 34 (octal) in the table

to a ”1”.
O 34
$ A ENT
STR 0
L D C ENT
SHFT PREV
ANDST 3 2
SHFT L D A D A A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 3 0 0 0
X B I T D E
SHFT NEXT ENT
SET 1 8 MLR 3 4

Fill (FILL)
DS Used The Fill instruction fills a table of up to 255 V-memory locations
HPP Used
with a value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a
F ILL
4-digit constant. The function parameters are loaded into the
A aaa
first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two
additional instructions
Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Fill function.
Step 1: Load the number of V-memory locations to be filled into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0–FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter
must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the Fill instruction which specifies the value to fill the table with.
A aaa
Constant K 0–FF

SP53 On if the V-memory address is out of range.
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed on the first
level of the accumulator stack when the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address
1600 (V1600) is the starting location for the table and is loaded into the accumulator using
the Load Address instruction. The value to fill the table with (V1400) is specified in the Fill
instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct S OF T32
X1 Load the cons tant value 4

LD ( HE X) into the lower 16 bits S
K4 of the accumulator S
X X X X V1576
Convert the octal addres s X X X X V1577

LDA
1600 to HE X 380 and load the 2 5 0 0 V1600
O 1600 value into the accumulator V1400
2 5 0 0 V1601
2 5 0 0
2 5 0 0 V1602
F ill the table with the value
F ILL in V1400 2 5 0 0 V1603
V1400 X X X X V1604
X X X X V1605
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes S
$ B
S
ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D PREV E ENT

ANDST 3 4
SHFT L D A B G A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 1 6 0 0
SHFT F I L L B E A A ENT
5 8 ANDST ANDST 1 4 0 0

Find (FIND)
DS Used The Find instruction is used to search for a specified value
HPP Used
in a V-memory table of up to 255 locations. The function F IND
parameters are loaded into the first and second levels of the A aaa
accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional
instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Find function.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the second level of
the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0–FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the first level of the accumulator
stack. This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Load the offset from the starting location to begin the search. This parameter must be
a HEX value.
Step 4: Insert the Find instruction which specifies the first value to be found in the table.
Results:— The offset from the starting address to the first V-memory location which contains
the search value (in HEX) is returned to the accumulator. SP53 will be set On if an address
outside the table is specified in the offset or the value is not found. If the value is not found 0
will be returned in the accumulator.

A aaa
Constant K 0–FF

SP53 On if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value.
NOTE: Status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. The pointer
for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is
placed in the second stack location when the following Load Address and Load instruction is
executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location for the table and is loaded
into the accumulator. This value is placed in the first level of the accumulator stack when the
following Load instruction is executed. The offset (K2) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value to be found in the table is specified in the
Find instruction. If a value is found equal to the search value, the offset (from the starting
location of the table) where the value is located will reside in the accumulator.

DirectSOFT
DirectS OF T 32 Dis play S
S
X1
LD Table length
0 1 2 3 V1400 0
K6 Offs et
0 5 0 0 V1401 1
Load the cons tant value 6
Begin here 9 9 9 9 V1402 2
(HE X) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator 3 0 7 4 V1403 3 Accumulator
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4
LDA 8 9 8 9 V1404 4
1 0 1 0 V1405 V1404 contains the location
O 1400 5
where the match was found.
X X X X V1406 The value 8989 was the 4th
C onvert octal 1400 to HE X location after the s tart of the
300 and load the value into X X X X V1407 s pecified table.
the accumulator.
S
S
LD
K2
Load the cons tant value
$ B ENT
2 into the lower 16 bits STR 1
of the accumulator
SHFT L D PREV G ENT
ANDST 3 6
F IND SHFT L D A B E A
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0
K8989
L D C ENT
SHFT PREV
F ind the location in the table ANDST 3 2
where the value 8989 res ides
SHFT F I N D I J I J ENT
NEXT
5 8 TMR 3 8 9 8 9
Find Greater Than (FDGT)

The Find Greater Than instruction is used to search for the first
occurrence of a value in a V-memory table that is greater than the
specified value (Aaaa), which can be either a V-memory location F DG T
or a 4-digit constant. The function parameters are loaded into the A aaa
first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two
additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to
program the Find Greater Than function.
Step 1: L oad the length of the table (up to 255 locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0–FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This
Step 3: Insert the FDGT instruction which specifies the greater than search value.
Results:— The offset from the starting address to the first V-memory location
which contains the greater than search value (in HEX) which is returned to
the accumulator. SP53 will be set On if the value is not found and 0 will be
returned in the accumulator.
Helpful Hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory
locations, the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent
and load the value into the accumulator.
NOTE: This instruction does not have an offset, such as the one required for the FIND instruction.


A aaa
Constant K 0–FF

SP53 On if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value.
NOTE: Status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. The
pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator.
stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400)
is the starting location for the table and is loaded into the accumulator. The Greater Than
search value is specified in the Find Greater Than instruction. If a value is found greater than
the search value, the offset (from the starting location of the table) where the value is located
will reside in the accumulator. If there is no value in the table that is greater than the search
value, a zero is stored in the accumulator and SP53 will come ON.
DirectSOFT
DirectS OF T 32 Dis play
X1
LD
K6
Load the cons tant value 6 S

(HE X) into the lower 16 bits S
of the accumulator Table length
Begin here 0 1 2 3 V1400 0
LDA 0 5 0 0 V1401 1 Accumulator
O 1400 9 9 9 9 V1402 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
C onvert octal 1400 to HE X 3 0 7 4 V1403 3 V1402 contains the location

300 and load the value into 8 9 8 9 V1404 where the firs t value greater
the accumulator. 4
than the s earch value was
1 0 1 0 V1405 5 found. 9999 was the 2nd
location after the s tart of the
X X X X V1406 s pecified table.
F DG T
X X X X V1407
K8989
S
F ind the value in the table
S
greater than the s pecified value

$ B ENT
STR 1
STR X(IN) 1
SHFT L D PREV G ENT
LD ANDST K(C ON)3 6 6
SHFTLD L S HFDT AA OC T B 1 E 4 A 0A 0
ENT
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0 0
S HF TF FD GD T G T S HF IT K(CJON) 8 9 8 9
SHFT NEXT I J ENT
5 3 6 MLR 8 9 8 9

Table to Destination (TTD)

DS Used The Table To Destination instruction moves a value from a
HPP Used V-memory table to a V-memory location and increments the
table pointer by 1. The first V-memory location in the table
contains the table pointer which indicates the next location in the TTD
table to be moved. The instruction will be executed once per scan Aaaa
provided the input remains on. The table pointer will reset to 1
when the value equals the last location in the table. The function
parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack
and the accumulator by two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Table To Destination function.
Step 1: L oad the length of the data table (number of V-memory locations) into the first
level of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator.
(Remember, the starting location of the table is used as the table pointer.) This
Step 3: Insert the TTD instruction which specifies destination V-memory location
(Vaaa).
Helpful Hint: — The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do
not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one-shot (PD) should be used in
the input logic.
Helpful Hint: — The pointer location should be set to the value where the table operation will
begin. The special relay SP0 or a one-shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in
one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.
A aaa

SP56 On when the table pointer equals the table length.
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed,
or the end of the scan. The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets when the table length
is reached. At first glance it may appear that the pointer should reset to 0. However, it resets to 1,
not 0.

accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and
is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The
octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into
the accumulator. Remember, V1400 is used as the pointer location, and is not actually
part of the table data source. The destination location (V1500) is specified in the Table to
Destination instruction. The table pointer (V1400 in this case) will be increased by “1” after
each execution of the TTD instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 LD Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits

LDA
0 1400 the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location
Copy the specified value from

TTD
the table to the specified
V1500 destination (V1500)
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D PREV G ENT

ANDST 3 6
SHFT L D A B E A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0 0
SHFT T T D B F A A ENT
MLR MLR 3 1 5 0 0
It is important to understand how the table locations Table Table Pointer

0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 V1400
are numbered. If you examine the example table, V1401
V1402 9 9 9 9 1
you’ll notice that the first data location, V1401, will V1403 3 0 7 4 2
Des tination
be used when the pointer is equal to zero, and again V1404 8 9 8 9 3

X X X X V1500
when the pointer is equal to six. Why? Because the V1405 1 0 1 0 4
pointer is only equal to zero before the very first V1406 2 0 4 6 5
execution. From then on, it increments from one to V1407 X X X X

S
six, and then resets to one. S
Also, our example uses a normal input contact (X1) to DirectSOFT

DirectSOFT32 (optional latch example using SP56)
control the execution. Since the CPU scan is extremely X1 C0
fast, and the pointer increments automatically, the PD
table would cycle through the locations very quickly. C1

LD
K6
If this is a problem, you have an option of using SP56
Load the constant value 6
in conjunction with a one-shot (PD) and a latch (C1 (HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
for example) to allow the table to cycle through all C0 C1
locations one time and then stop. The logic shown SET
here is not required, it’s just an optional method. SP56 C1

RST
Since Special Relays are

reset at the end of the scan,
this latch must follow the TTD
instruction in the program

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example
program. Notice how the pointer automatically cycles from 0 – 6, and then starts over at 1
instead of 0. Also, notice how SP56 is only on until the end of the scan.
Scan N Before TTD Execution After TTD Execution
Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)

V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 1 V1400
V1402 9 9 9 9 1 V1402 9 9 9 9 1
Destination Destination
V1403 3 0 7 4 2 V1403 3 0 7 4 2
X X X X V1500 0 5 0 0 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 3 V1404 8 9 8 9 3
V1405 1 0 1 0 4 V1405 1 0 1 0 4
SP56 SP56
V1406 2 0 4 6 5 V1406 2 0 4 6 5
SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .
Scan N+1 Before TTD Execution After TTD Execution

V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 1 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 2 V1400
V1402 9 9 9 9 1 V1402 9 9 9 9 1
V1403 3 0 7 4 2 V1403 3 0 7 4 2
0 5 0 0 V1500 9 9 9 9 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 3 V1404 8 9 8 9 3
V1405 1 0 1 0 4 V1405 1 0 1 0 4
V1406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .
.
.
.
V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 5 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 V1400

V1402 9 9 9 9 1 V1402 9 9 9 9 1
V1403 3 0 7 4 2 V1403 3 0 7 4 2
1 0 1 0 V1500 2 0 4 6 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 3 V1404 8 9 8 9 3
V1405 1 0 1 0 4 V1405 1 0 1 0 4
V1406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56
X X X X SP56 = OFF X X X X SP56 = ON
V1407 V1407
until end of scan
. . or next instruction
. . that uses SP56
Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer (Resets to 1, not 0)
V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 1 V1400

V1402 9 9 9 9 1 V1402 9 9 9 9 1
V1403 3 0 7 4 2 V1403 3 0 7 4 2
2 0 4 6 V1500 0 5 0 0 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 3 V1404 8 9 8 9 3
V1405 1 0 1 0 4 V1405 1 0 1 0 4
V1406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56
V1407 X X X X SP56 = OFF V1407 X X X X SP56 = OFF
. .
. .

Remove from Bottom (RFB)

DS Used The Remove From Bottom instruction moves a value from
HPP Used the bottom of a V-memory table to a V-memory location and
decrements a table pointer by 1. The first V-memory location
in the table contains the table pointer which indicates the
next location in the table to be moved. The instruction will RFB
be executed once per scan provided the input remains on. Aaaa
The instruction will stop operation when the pointer equals
0. The function parameters are loaded into the first level of
the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the
Remove From Bottom function.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember,
the starting location of the table blank is used as the table pointer.) This parameter must be
a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the RFB instruction which specifies destination V-memory location (Vaaa).
Helpful Hint: — The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you
do not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one-shot (PD) should be
used in the input logic.
Helpful Hint: — The pointer location should be set to the value where the table operation
will begin. The special relay SP0 or a one-shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be
set in one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.

A aaa

SP56 On when the table pointer equals zero..
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed or
the end of the scan The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set
automatically. You must load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.

is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator. Remember,
V1400 is used as the pointer location, and is not actually part of the table data source. The
destination location (V1500) is specified in the Remove From Bottom. The table pointer
(V1400 in this case) will be decremented by “1” after each execution of the RFB instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 LD
K6

of the accumulator
LDA
0 1400

the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location
RFB
V1500
Copy the specified value from
the table to the specified
destination (V1500)
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D PREV G ENT

ANDST 3 6
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0 0
SHFT R F B B F A A ENT
ORN 5 1 1 5 0 0
It is important to understand how the table locations Table Table Pointer
are numbered. If you examine the example table, V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 V1400

V1402 9 9 9 9 2
you’ll notice that the first data location, V1401, will V1403 3 0 7 4 3
Des tination
be used when the pointer is equal to one. The second V1404 8 9 8 9 4

X X X X V1500
data location, V1402, will be used when the pointer V1405 1 0 1 0 5

is equal to two, etc. V1406 2 0 4 6 6
V1407 X X X X
S
S
DirectSOFT (optional
DirectSOFT32 Display one-shot
(optional method)
one-shot method)
Also, our example uses a normal input contact X1 C0
(X1) to control the execution. Since the CPU PD
scan is extremely fast, and the pointer decrements C0 LD
automatically, the table would cycle through the K6
locations very quickly. If this is a problem for Load the constant value 6
your application, you have an option of using a of the accumulator
one-shot (PD) to remove one value each time the LDA
input contact transitions from low to high. O 1400

table pointer location.

program. Notice how the pointer automatically decrements from 6 to 0. Also, notice how
SP56 is only on until the end of the scan.
Example of Execution
Scan N Before RFB Execution After RFB Execution
Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented)

V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 6 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 5 V1400
V1402 9 9 9 9 2 V1402 9 9 9 9 2
V1403 3 0 7 4 3 V1403 3 0 7 4 3
X X X X V1500 2 0 4 6 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 4 V1404 8 9 8 9 4
V1405 1 0 1 0 5 V1405 1 0 1 0 5
SP56 SP56
V1406 2 0 4 6 6 V1406 2 0 4 6 6
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .
Scan N+1 Before RFB Execution After RFB Execution

V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 5 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 4 V1400
V1402 9 9 9 9 2 V1402 9 9 9 9 2
V1403 3 0 7 4 3 V1403 3 0 7 4 3
2 0 4 6 V1500 1 0 1 0 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 4 V1404 8 9 8 9 4
V1405 1 0 1 0 5 V1405 1 0 1 0 5
V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .
.
.
.

V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 V1400
V1402 9 9 9 9 2 V1402 9 9 9 9 2
V1403 3 0 7 4 3 V1403 3 0 7 4 3
3 0 7 4 V1500 9 9 9 9 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 4 V1404 8 9 8 9 4
V1405 1 0 1 0 5 V1405 1 0 1 0 5
V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56
X X X X SP56 = OFF X X X X
SP56 = OFF
V1407 V1407
. .
. .
Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer
V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 V1400
V1402 9 9 9 9 2 V1402 9 9 9 9 2
V1403 3 0 7 4 3 V1403 3 0 7 4 3
9 9 9 9 V1500 0 5 0 0 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 4 V1404 8 9 8 9 4
V1405 1 0 1 0 5 V1405 1 0 1 0 5
V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56
SP56 = OFF SP56 = ON
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. . until end of scan
that uses SP56

Source to Table (STT)

DS Used The Source To Table instruction moves a value from a V-memory
HPP Used location into a V-memory table and increments a table pointer by
1. When the table pointer reaches the end of the table, it resets
to 1. The first V-memory location in the table contains the table STT
pointer which indicates the next location in the table to store a V aaa
value. The instruction will be executed once per scan, provided
the input remains on. The function parameters are loaded into
the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator with
two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Source To Table function.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level
of the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
(Remember, the starting location of the table is used as the table pointer.) This
Step 3: Insert the STT instruction which specifies the source V-memory location
(Vaaa). This is where the value will be moved from.
Helpful Hint:— The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do
the input logic.
Helpful Hint: — The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the
operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table. For example, if
the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be in the pointer should
be between 0 and 6. If the value is outside of this range, the data will not be moved. Also, a
one-shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the
instruction operation.
A aaa

SP56 On when the table pointer equals the table length.
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or the
end of the scan. The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets to 1 automatically when the table length
is reached.

accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is
placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal
address 1400 (V1400), which is the starting location for the destination table and table
pointer, is loaded into the accumulator. The data source location (V1500) is specified in the
Source to Table instruction. The table pointer will be increased by “1” after each time the
instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
DirectS OF T 32
X1 LD
K6

(HEX) into the the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
0 1400

the accumulator
STT
V1500
Copy the specified value

from the source location
(V1500) to the table
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D PREV G ENT

ANDST 3 6
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0 0
SHFT S T T B F A A
SHFT ENT
RST MLR MLR 1 5 0 0
Table Table Pointer

It is important to understand how the table locations V1401 X X X X 0 6 0 0 0 0 V1400
are numbered. If you examine the example table, V1402 X X X X 1
you’ll notice that the first data storage location, V1403 X X X X 2
Data S ource
V1401, will be used when the pointer is equal to V1404 X X X X 3

0 5 0 0 V1500
zero, and again when the pointer is equal to six. V1405 X X X X 4

Why? Because the pointer is only equal to zero V1406 X X X X 5
before the very first execution. From then on, it V1407 X X X X
increments from one to six, and then resets to one. S

S
Also, our example uses a normal input contact DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 (optional one-shot method)
(X1) to control the execution. Since the CPU X1 C0

PD
scan is extremely fast, and the pointer increments C0

LD
automatically, the source data would be moved K6

into all the table locations very quickly. If this is a (HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
problem for your application, you have an option LDA
of using a one-shot (PD) to move one value each O 1400
time the input contact transitions from low to high. Convert octal 1400 to HEX
starting table location.

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example program.
Notice how the pointer automatically cycles from 0 to 6, and then starts over at 1 instead of 0.
Also, notice how SP56 is affected by the execution. Although our example does not show it, we
are assuming that there is another part of the program that changes the value in V1500 (data
source) prior to the execution of the STT instruction. This is not required, but it makes it easier
to see how the data source is copied into the table.
Scan N Before STT Execution After STT Execution

V1401 X X X X 0 6 0 0 0 0 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 1 V1400
V1402 X X X X 1 V1402 X X X X 1
Source Source
V1403 X X X X 2 V1403 X X X X 2
0 5 0 0 V1500 0 5 0 0 V1500
V1404 X X X X 3 V1404 X X X X 3
V1405 X X X X 4 V1405 X X X X 4
SP56 SP56
V1406 X X X X 5 V1406 X X X X 5
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .
Scan N+1 Before STT Execution After STT Execution
V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 1 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 2 V1400
V1402 X X X X 1 V1402 9 9 9 9 1
Source Source
V1403 X X X X 2 V1403 X X X X 2
9 9 9 9 V1500 9 9 9 9 V1500
V1404 X X X X 3 V1404 X X X X 3
V1405 X X X X 4 V1405 X X X X 4
V1406 X X X X 5 SP56 X X X X 5 SP56
V1406
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .
.
.
.

V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 5 V1400 V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 V1400
V1402 9 9 9 9 1 V1402 9 9 9 9 1
Source Source
V1403 3 0 7 4 2 V1403 3 0 7 4 2
2 0 4 6 V1500 2 0 4 6 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 3 V1404 8 9 8 9 3
V1405 1 0 1 0 4 V1405 1 0 1 0 4
V1406 X X X X 5 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56
SP56 = ON
V1407 V1407 until end of scan
. . that uses SP56
Table Table Pointer Table Table Pointer (Resets to 1, not 0)

V1401 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 6 V1400 V1401 1 2 3 4 0 6 0 0 0 1 V1400
V1402 9 9 9 9 1 V1402 9 9 9 9 1
Source Source
V1403 3 0 7 4 2 V1403 3 0 7 4 2
1 2 3 4 V1500 1 2 3 4 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 3 V1404 8 9 8 9 3
V1405 1 0 1 0 4 V1405 1 0 1 0 4
V1406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 5 SP56

V1407 SP56 = OFF SP56 = OFF
X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .

Remove from Table (RFT)

DS Used The Remove From Table instruction pops a value off a table
HPP Used and stores it in a V-memory location. When a value is removed
from the table all other values are shifted up 1 location. The first RFT
V-memory location in the table contains the table length counter. V aaa
The table counter decrements by 1 each time the instruction is
executed. If the length counter is zero or greater than the maximum
table length (specified in the first level of the accumulator stack) the
instruction will not execute and SP56 will be On.
The instruction will be executed once per scan, provided the input remains on. The function
parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two
additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Remove From
Table function.
(Remember, the starting location of the table is used as the table length
counter.) This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the RFT instructions which specifies destination V-memory location
(Vaaa). This is where the value will be moved to.
not want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one-shot (PD) should be used
in the input logic.
the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be in the table counter
should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside of this range or zero, the data will not be
moved from the table. Also, a one-shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in one
scan and will not affect the instruction operation.

A aaa

SP56 On when the table pointer equals zero.
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
the end of the scan The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set

is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator. The destination
location (V1500) is specified in the Remove from Table instruction. The table counter will be
decreased by “1” after the instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT

LD
LDA Convert octal 1400 to HEX

O 1400 the accumulator
RFT Copy the specified value

from the table to the
V1500 specified location (V1500)
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D PREV G ENT

ANDST 3 6
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0 0
SHFT R F T B F A A ENT
ORN 5 MLR 1 5 0 0
Table Table C ounter

Since the table counter specifies the range of V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 6 V1400
data that will be removed from the table, it is V1402 9 9 9 9 2
important to understand how the table locations V1403 3 0 7 4 3
Des tination
are numbered. If you examine the example table, V1404 8 9 8 9 4
X X X X V1500
you’ll notice that the data locations are numbered V1405 1 0 1 0 5
from the top of the table. For example, if the table V1406 2 0 4 6 6
counter started at 6, then all six of the locations V1407 X X X X
would be affected during the instruction execution. S
S
DirectSOFT32 Display (optional one-shot method)
Also, our example uses a normal input contact X1 C0

PD
(X1) to control the execution. Since the CPU
C0
scan is extremely fast, and the pointer decrements LD
K6
automatically, the data would be removed from Load the constant value 6
the table very quickly. If this is a problem for your of the accumulator
application, you have an option of using a one- LDA

shot (PD) to remove one value each time the input O 1400
contact transitions from low to high. Convert octal 1400 to HEX

table pointer location.

program. In our example, we show the table counter set to 4, initially. (Remember, you can
set the table counter to any value that is within the range of the table.) The table counter
automatically decrements from 4 to 0 as the instruction is executed. Notice how the last two
table positions, 5 and 6, are not moved up through the table. Also, notice that SP56, which
comes on when the table counter is zero, is only on until the end of the scan.
Scan N
Before RFT Execution After RFT Execution
Table Counter
Table Table Counter Table (Automatically d ecremented)
Table Counter V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 4 V1400 V1401 9 9 9 9 1 0 0 0 0 3 V1400

indicates that 5
V1402 9 9 9 9 2 V1402 4 0 7 9 2 0
these 4 Destination 0
Destination
positions will V1403 3 0 7 4 3 V1403 8 9 8 9 3
be X X X X V1500 0 5 0 0 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 4 Start here V1404 8 9 8 9 4
used
V1405 1 0 1 0 5 V1405 1 0 1 0 5
SP56 SP56
V1406 2 0 4 6 6 V1406 2 0 4 6 6
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .
Scan N+1 Before RFT Execution After RFT Execution
Table Counter
Table Table Counter Table (Automatically decremented)
V1401 9 9 9 9 1 0 0 0 3 V1400 V1401 4 0 7 9 1 9 0 0 0 2 V1400
9
V1402 4 0 7 9 2 V1402 8 9 8 9 2 9
Destination 9 Destination
V1403 8 9 8 9 3 Start here V1403 8 9 8 9 3
0 5 0 0 V1500 9 9 9 9 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 4 V1404 8 9 8 9 4
V1405 1 0 1 0 5 V1405 1 0 1 0 5
V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56

V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .

Table Counter
Table Counter
Table Table (Automatically decremented)
V1401 4 0 7 9 1 0 0 0 2 V1400 V1401 8 9 8 9 1 4 0 0 0 1 V1400
0
V1402 8 9 8 9 2 Start here V1402 8 9 8 9 2 7
Destination 9
8 9 8 9 3 8 9 8 9 3 Destination
V1403 V1403
9 9 9 9 V1500 4 0 7 9 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 4 V1404 8 9 8 9 4
V1405 1 0 1 0 5 V1405 1 0 1 0 5
V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. .
Table Counter
Table Counter (Automatically decremented)
Table Table
V1401 8 9 8 9 1 0 0 0 1 V1400 Start here V1401 8 9 8 9 1 8 0 0 0 0 V1400
9
V1402 8 9 8 9 2 V1402 8 9 8 9 2 8
Destinatio 9
V1403 8 9 8 9 3 V1403 8 9 8 9 3 Destination
4 0 7 9 V1500 8 9 8 9 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 4 V1404 8 9 8 9 4
V1405 1 0 1 0 5 V1405 1 0 1 0 5
V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56 V1406 2 0 4 6 6 SP56
X X X X SP56 = OFF X X X X SP56 = ON
V1407 V1407
. . until end of scan
that uses SP56

Add to Top (ATT)

DS Used The Add To Top instruction pushes a value on to a V-memory AT T
HPP Used table from a V-memory location. When the value is added to the V aaa
table all other values are pushed down 1 location.
The instruction will be executed once per scan, provided the input remains on. The function
parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by
two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Add To Top
function.
(Remember, the starting location of the table is used as the table length counter.)
Step 3: Insert the ATT instructions which specifies source V-memory location (Vaaa).
This is where the value will be moved from.
the input logic.
the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be in the table counter
should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside of this range or zero, the data will not be
moved into the table. Also, a one-shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in one
scan and will not affect the instruction operation.

A aaa

SP56 On when the table pointer equal to the table size.
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed or
the end of the scan. The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set

stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400),
which is the starting location for the destination table and table counter, is loaded into the
accumulator. The source location (V1500) is specified in the Add to Top instruction. The table
counter will be increased by “1” after the instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
X1 LD
K6

of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400

the accumulator
ATT
V1500
Copy the specified value

from V1500 to the table
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D PREV G ENT

ANDST 3 6
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0 0
SHFT A T T B F A A ENT
0 MLR MLR 1 5 0 0
Table Table Counter

For the ATT instruction, the table counter V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 V1400
determines the number of additions that can be V1402 9 9 9 9 2
made before the instruction will stop executing. V1403 3 0 7 4 3
Data Source
So, it is helpful to understand how the system V1404 8 9 8 9 4
X X X X V1500
uses this counter to control the execution. V1405 1 0 1 0 5
For example, if the table counter was set to 2, and V1406 2 0 4 6 6
the table length was 6 words, then there could V1407 X X X X
only be 4 additions of data before the execution
was stopped. This can easily be calculated by: ( e .g .: 6 - 2 = 4 )
DirectSOFT32 (optional
DirectSOFT one-shot
Display (optional method)
one-shot method)
Table length – table counter = number of executions
X1 C0
Also, our example uses a normal input contact PD
(X1) to control the execution. Since the CPU C0 LD
scan is extremely fast, and the table counter K6

increments automatically, the data would be (HEX) into the lower 16 bits
moved into the table very quickly. If this is a of the accumulator
problem for your application, you have an LDA
option of using a one-shot (PD) to add one O 1400
value each time the input contact transitions Convert octal 1400 to HEX
from low to high. the accumulator. This is the
starting table location.

program. The table counter is set to 2 initially, and it will automatically increment from 2 to 6
as the instruction is executed. Notice how SP56 comes on when the table counter is 6, which
is equal to the table length. Plus, although our example does not show it, we are assuming that
there is another part of the program that changes the value in V1500 (data source) prior to the
execution of the ATT instruction.
Example of Execution
Scan N Before ATT Execution After ATT Execution
Table counter
Table Table counter Table (Automatically Incremented)
V1401 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 V1400 V1401 1 2 3 4 1 1 0 0 0 3 V1400

2
V1402 9 9 9 9 2 V1402 0 5 0 0 2 3
Data Source 4 Data Source
V1403 3 0 7 4 3 V1403 9 9 9 9 3
1 2 3 4 V1500 1 2 3 4 V1500
V1404 8 9 8 9 4 V1404 3 0 7 4 4
V1405 1 0 1 0 5 V1405 8 9 8 9 5
SP56 SP56
V1406 2 0 4 6 6 V1406 1 0 1 0 6
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. . 2046
Discard Bucket
Scan N+1 Before ATT Execution After ATT Execution

Table counter
V1401 1 2 3 4 1 0 0 0 3 V1400 V1401 5 6 7 8 1 5 0 0 0 4 V1400
6
V1402 0 5 0 0 2 V1402 1 2 3 4 2 7
Data Source 8 Data Source
V1403 9 9 9 9 3 V1403 0 5 0 0 3
5 6 7 8 V1500 5 6 7 8 V1500
V1404 3 0 7 4 4 V1404 9 9 9 9 4
V1405 8 9 8 9 5 V1405 3 0 7 4 5
1 0 1 0 6 SP56 8 9 8 9
SP56
V1406 V1406 6
V1407 X X X X V1407 X X X X
. .
. . 1010
Discard Bucket
Scan N+2 Before ATT Execution After ATT Execution Table counter
Table counter Table (Automatically Incremented)
Table
V1401 5 6 7 8 1 0 0 0 4 V1400 V1401 4 3 4 3 1 4 0 0 0 5 V1400
3
V1402 1 2 3 4 2 V1402 5 6 7 8 2 4
3 Data Source
Data Source
V1403 0 5 0 0 3 V1403 1 2 3 4 3
4 3 3 4 V1500 4 3 4 3 V1500
V1404 9 9 9 9 4 V1404 0 5 0 0 4
V1405 3 0 7 4 5 V1405 9 9 9 9 5
V1406 8 9 8 9 6 SP56 V1406 3 0 7 4 6 SP56
SP56 = OFF
V1407 V1407
. .
. . 8989
Discard Bucket
Scan N+3 Before ATT Execution After ATT Execution Table counter
V1401 4 3 4 3 1 0 0 0 5 V1400 V1401 7 7 7 7 1 7 0 0 0 6 V1400

7
V1402 5 6 7 8 2 V1402 4 3 4 3 2 7
Data Source 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 Data Source
V1403 3 V1403
7 7 7 7 V1500 7 7 7 7 V1500
V1404 0 5 0 0 4 V1404 1 2 3 4 4
V1405 9 9 9 9 5 V1405 0 5 0 0 5
V1406 3 0 7 4 6 SP56 V1406 9 9 9 9 6 SP56
V1407 X X X X SP56 = OFF X X X X SP56 = ON
V1407 until end of scan
. .
. . 3074
Discard Bucket or next instruction
that uses SP56

Table Shift Left (TSHFL)

DS Used The Table Shift Left instruction shifts all the bits in a V-memory T S HF L
HPP Used table to the left, the specified number of bit positions. A aaa
Table Shift Right (TSHFR)

DS Used The Table Shift Right instruction shifts all the bits in a TSHFR
HPP Used V-memory table to the right, a specified number of bit positions. A aaa
The following description applies to both the Table Shift Left and Table Shift Right
instructions. A table is just a range of V-memory locations. The Table Shift Left and Table
Shift Right instructions shift bits serially throughout the entire table. Bits are shifted out the
end of one word and into the opposite end of an adjacent word. At the ends of the table, bits
are either discarded, or zeros are shifted into the table. The example tables below are arbitrarily
four words long.
Table Shift Left
Table Shift Right
Shift in zeros Discard Bits
V - xxxx
V - xxxx + 1
V - xxxx + 2
Discard Bits Shift in zeros
parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert
an octal address to hex.
Step 3: Insert the Table Shift Left or Table shift Right instruction. This specifies the
number of bit positions you wish to shift the entire table. The number of bit
positions must be in octal.
Helpful hint: — Remember that each V-memory location contains 16 bits. So, the bits of the
first word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal. If you want to shift the entire table by
20 bits, that is 24 octal. SP 53 will be set if the number of bits to be shifted is larger than the
total bits contained within the table. Flag 67 will be set if the last bit shifted (just before it is
discarded) is a “1”.
A aaa


SP53 On when the number of bits to be shifted is larger than the total bits contained within the table
SP67 On when the last bit shifted (just before it is discarded) is a 1
NOTE: Status flags are only valid until the end of the scan or another instruction that uses the same flag is
executed.
V 3000 V 3000
The example table to the right contains
BCD data as shown (for demonstration 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 1
purposes). Suppose we want to do a table
shift right by 3 BCD digits (12 bits).
5 6 7 8 1 2 2 5
Converting to octal, 12 bits is 14 octal.
Using the Table Shift Right instruction
and specifying a shift by octal 14, we have 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 1
the resulting table shown at the far right.
Notice that the 2–3–4 sequence has been 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 3
discarded, and the 0–0–0 sequence has
been shifted in at the bottom.
5 5 6 6 0 0 0 5
The following ladder example assumes the data at V3000 to V3004 already exists as shown
above. We will use input X0 to trigger the Table Shift Right operation. First, we will load the
table length (5 words) into the accumulator stack. Next, we load the starting address into the
accumulator. Since V3000 is an octal number, we have to convert it to hex by using the LDA
command. Finally, we use the Table Shift Right instruction and specify the number of bits to
be shifted (12 decimal), which is 14 octal.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 32

LD (Hex.) into the lower 16 bits

LDA and load the value into the
0 3000 accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
Do a table shift right by 12

TSHFR
bits, which is 14 octal.
0 14
$ A ENT
STR 0
SHFT L D PREV F ENT

ANDST 3 5
ANDST 3 0 3 0 0 0
SHFT T S H F R B E
SHFT NEXT ENT
MLR RST 7 5 ORN 1 4

AND Move (ANDMOV)

DS Used The AND Move instruction copies data from a table to the ANDMO V
HPP Used specified memory location, ANDing each word with the A aaa
accumulator data as it is written.
OR Move (ORMOV)
DS Used The OR Move instruction copies data from a table to the
ORMOV
HPP Used specified memory location, ORing each word with the A aaa
accumulator contents as it is written
Exclusive OR Move (XORMOV)
DS Used The Exclusive OR Move instruction copies data from a table XO R MO V
HPP Used to the specified memory location, XORing each word with the A aaa
accumulator value as it is written.
The following description applies to the AND Move, OR Move, and Exclusive OR Move
instructions. A table is just a range of V-memory locations. These instructions copy the data
of a table to another specified location, preforming a logical operation on each word with the
accumulator contents as the new table is written.
parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert
an octal address to hex.
Step 3: Load the BCD/hex bit pattern into the accumulator which will be logically
combined with the table contents as they are copied.
Step 4: Insert the AND Move, OR Move, or XOR Move instruction. This specifies
the starting location of the copy of the original table. This new table will
automatically be the same length as the original table.
A aaa
The example table to the right contains BCD

data as shown (for demonstration purposes). V 3000 V 3100
Suppose we want to move a table of two 3 3 3 3 ANDMOV 2 2 2 2
words at V3000 and AND it with K6666. K 6666
The copy of the table at V3100 shows the F F F F 6 6 6 6
result of the AND operation for each word.
The program on the next page performs the ANDMOV operation example above. It assumes
that the data in the table at V3000 – V3001 already exists. First we load the table length (two
words) into the accumulator. Next we load the starting address of the source table, using the
LDA instruction. Then we load the data into the accumulator to be ANDed with the table. In
the ANDMOV command, we specify the table destination, V3100.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 5
X0 LD
K2
$ A ENT
STR 0 Load the constant value 2
(Hex.) into the lower 16
SHFT L D PREV C ENT
ANDST 3 2 bits of the accumulator.
SHFT L D A D A A A ENT LDA

ANDST 3 0 3 0 0 0
0 3000
SHFT L D PREV G G G G ENT
ANDST 3 6 6 6 6 Convert otal 3000 to HEX
V SHFT M O V D B A A ENT
AND ORST INST# AND 3 1 0 0 accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
LD
The example on top the right shows a table of two words K6666
at V3000 and logically ORs it with K8888. The copy of Load the constant value
the table at V3100 shows the result of the OR operation 6666 (Hex.) into the lower
for each word.
ANDMOV
The program to the right performs the ORMOV 0 3100
example above. It assumes that the data in the table at Copy the table to V3100,
ANDing its contents with the
V3000 – V3001 already exists. First we load the table accumulator as it is written.
length (two words) into the accumulator. Next we load V 3000 V 3100
the starting address of the source table, using the LDA 1 1 1 1 OR MOV 9 9 9 9
K 8888
instruction. Then we load the data into the accumulator
to be OR’d with the table. In the ORMOV command, 1 1 1 1 9 9 9 9
we specify the table destination, V3100.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 32
X0 LD
$ A ENT
STR 0
K2
SHFT L D PREV C ENT
ANDST 3 2 Load the constant value 2
L D A D A A A (Hex) into the lower 16 bits
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 0 3 0 0 0 of the accumulator.
SHFT L D PREV I I I I ENT

ANDST 3 8 8 8 8 LDA
Q M O V D B A A 0 3000
SHFT ENT
OR ORST INST# AND 3 1 0 0
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
The example to the right shows a table of two words at
LD
V3000 and logically XORs it with K3333. The copy of K8888
the table at V3100 shows the result of the XOR operation
Load the constant value
for each word. 8888 (Hex.) into the lower
The ladder program example for the XORMOV is
ORMOV
similar to the one above for the ORMOV. Just use the 0 3100
XORMOV instruction. On the handheld programmer,
Copy the table to V3100,
you must use the SHFT key and spell “XORMOV” ORing its contents with the
explicitly. accumulator as it is written.
V 3000 V 3100
1 1 1 1 X OR MOV 2 2 2 2
K 3333
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

Find Block (FINDB)

DS Used The Find Block instruction searches for an occurrence of a
HPP N/A specified block of values in a V-memory table. The function
parameters are loaded into the first and second levels of the FINDB
accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional A aaa
instructions. If the block is found, its starting address will be
stored in the accumulator. If the block is not found, flag SP53
will be set.
A aaa
V-memory P See memory map

SP56 On when the specified block is not found.
The steps listed below are the steps necessary to program the Find Block function.
Step 1: Load the number of bytes in the block to be located. This parameter must
be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the length of a table (number of words) to be searched. The Find Block
will search multiple tables that are adjacent in V-memory. This parameter
must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 3: Load the ending location for all the tables into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to
convert an octal address to hex.
Step 4: Load the table starting location for all the tables into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to
convert an octal address to hex.
Step 5: Insert the Find Block instruction. This specifies the starting location of the
block of data you are trying to locate.
Start Addr.
Number
Table 1
of words
Table 2 Start Addr.
Table 3
Number
Block
of bytes
Table n
End Addr.

Swap (SWAP)
DS Used The Swap instruction exchanges the data in two tables of equal S WAP
A aaa
HPP Used length.
Step 1: Load the length of the tables (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of
the accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF. Remember that
the tables must be of equal length.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the first table into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal
address to hex.
Step 3: Insert the Swap instruction. This specifies the starting address of the second table.
This parameter must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an
octal address to hex.
Helpful hint: — The data swap occurs within a single scan. If the instruction executes on
multiple consecutive scans, it will be difficult to know the actual contents of either table at any
particular time. So, remember to swap just on a single scan.
aaa
The example to the right shows a table V 3000 V 3100

of two words at V3000. We will swap its
contents with another table of two words 1 2 3 4 S WAP A B C D
at 3100 by using the Swap instruction. The
required ladder program is given below. 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0
The example program below uses a PD contact (triggers for one scan for off-to-on transition).
First, we load the length of the tables (two words) into the accumulator. Then we load the
address of the first table (V3000) into the accumulator using the LDA instruction, converting
the octal address to hex. Note that it does not matter which table we declare “first”, because
the swap results will be the same.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 32
LD (Hex.) into the lower 16 bits

LDA and load the value into the
0 3000 accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
SWAP Swap the contents of the
$ P D A
STR
SHFT
CV 3 0
ENT table in the previous
0 3100 instruction with the one
L D C
SHFT
ANDST 3
PREV
2
ENT at V3100.
ANDST 3 0 3 0 0 0
SHFT S W A P D B A A
SHFT ENT
RST ANDN 0 CV 3 1 0 0

Clock/Calendar Instructions
Date (DATE)
DS Used
The Date instruction can be used to set the date in the CPU. The
HPP Used
instruction requires two consecutive V-memory locations (Vaaa)
to set the date. If the values in the specified locations are not valid, DAT E
the date will not be set. The current date can be read from 4 V aaa
consecutive V-memory locations (V7771–V7774).
In the following example, when C0 is on, the constant value (K94010301) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction (C0 should be a contact from a one-shot
(PD) instruction). The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using the Out Double
instruction. The Date instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the date in the CPU.
V-memory Location (BCD)
Date Range (READ Only)
Year 0-99 V7774
Month 1-12 V7773
Day 1-31 V7772
Day of Week 0-06 V7771
The values entered for the day of week are:
0=Sunday, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday, 5=Friday, 6=Saturday

aaa
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 32 Constant (K)
9 4 0 1 0 3 0 1
C0 LDD In this example, the Date
K94010301 instruction uses the value set in
Load the constant Acc. 9 4 0 1 0 3 0 1 V2000 and V2001 to set the date
value (K94010301) in the appropriate V memory
locations (V7771-V7774).
OUTD Acc. 9 4 0 1 0 3 0 1
V2000
Copy the value in 9 4 0 1 0 3 0 1

the accumulator to
V2000 and V2001 V2001 V2000
Format
DATE
V2001 V2000
V2000
Set the date in the CPU
9 4 0 1 0 3 0 1
using the value in V2000
and 2001
$ A Year Month Day Day of Week

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT ENT
STR 0
SHFT L D D PREV J E A B ENT

ANDST 3 3 9 4 0 1
A D A B ENT
0 3 0 1
GX SHFT D C A A A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT D A T E C A A A ENT
3 0 MLR 4 2 0 0 0

Time (TIME)
DS Used The Time instruction can be used to set the time (24 hour clock) T IME
HPP Used in the CPU. The instruction requires two consecutive V-memory
V aaa
locations (Vaaa) which are used to set the time. If the values in
the specified locations are not valid, the time will not be set. The
current time can be read from memory locations V7747 and
V7766–V7770.
VMemory Location (BCD)
Date Range (READ Only)
1/100 seconds (10ms) 0-99 V7747
Seconds 0-59 V7766
Minutes 0-59 V7767
Hour 0-23 V7770

aaa
In the following example, when C0 is on, the constant value (K73000) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction (C0 should be a contact from a one-shot
(PD) instruction). The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using the Out Double
instruction. The Time instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the time in the CPU.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 32 Constant (K)
C0
0 0 0 7 3 0 0 0 The TIME instruction uses the
LDD
value set in V2000 and V2001 to
K73000
set the time in the appropriate
Acc. 0 0 0 7 3 0 0 0
V-memory locations (V7766-V7770)
0 0 0 7 3 0 0 0
OUTD Acc.
V2000
0 0 0 7 3 0 0 0
V2001 V2000 Format

V2001 V2000
TIME
0 0 0 7 3 0 0 0
V2000
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Not Hour Minutes Seconds

$ A Used
NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT ENT
STR 0
SHFT L D D PREV H D A A A ENT

ANDST 3 3 7 3 0 0 0
A D A B ENT
0 3 0 1
GX SHFT D C A A A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 0 0
SHFT T SHFT I M E C A A A ENT

MLR 8 ORST 4 2 0 0 0

CPU Control Instructions

No Operation (NOP)
DS Used The No Operation is an empty (not programmed) memory location. NOP
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
SHFT N O P ENT
NOP TMR INST# CV
End (END)
DS Used The End instruction marks the termination point of the normal program
HPP Used scan. An End instruction is required at the end of the main program
body. If the End instruction is omitted, an error will occur and the CPU END
will not enter the Run Mode. Data labels, subroutines and interrupt
routines are placed after the End instruction. The End instruction is not
conditional; therefore, no input contact is allowed.
DirectSOFT
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
END
Stop (STOP)
DS Used The Stop instruction changes the operational mode of the CPU from
HPP Used Run to Program (Stop) mode. This instruction is typically used to stop STOP
PLC operation in an error condition.
In the following example, when C0 turns on, the CPU will stop operation and switch to the
program mode.
DirectSOFT
C0 $ SHFT C A ENT
STR 2 0
STOP S T O P
SHFT SHFT ENT
RST MLR INST# CV

SP16 On when the DL06 goes into the TERM_PRG mode.
SP53 On when the DL06 goes into the PRG mode.

Reset Watch Dog Timer (RSTWT)

DS Used The Reset Watch Dog Timer instruction resets the CPU scan timer. The
HPP Used default setting for the watch dog timer is 200ms. Scan times very seldom
exceed 200ms, but it is possible. For/next loops, subroutines, interrupt RSTWT
routines, and table instructions can be programmed such that the scan
becomes longer than 200ms. When instructions are used in a manner
that could exceed the watch dog timer setting, this instruction can be
used to reset the timer.
A software timeout error (E003) will occur and the CPU will enter the program mode if the
scan time exceeds the watch dog timer setting. Placement of the RSTWT instruction in the
program is very important. The instruction has to be executed before the scan time exceeds the
watch dog timer’s setting.
If the scan time is consistently longer than the watch dog timer’s setting, the timeout value
may be permanently increased from the default value of 200ms by AUX 55 on the HPP or the
appropriate auxiliary function in your programming package. This eliminates the need for the
RSTWT instruction.
In the following example, the CPU scan timer will be reset to 0 when the RSTWT instruction
is executed. See the For/Next instruction for a detailed example.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT 32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
SHFT R S T W T ENT
ORN RST MLR ANDN MLR
RSTWT

Program Control Instructions

Goto Label (GOTO) (LBL)
DS Used The Goto / Label skips all instructions between the Goto and the K aaa
HPP Used corresponding LBL instruction. The operand value for the Goto and GOTO
the corresponding LBL instruction are the same. The logic between
Goto and LBL instruction is not executed when the Goto instruction LBL K aaa
is enabled. Up to 256 Goto instructions and 256 LBL instructions
can be used in the program.

aaa
Constant K 1-FFFF
In the following example, when C7 is on, all the program logic between the GOTO and the
corresponding LBL instruction (designated with the same constant Kaaa value) will be skipped.
The instructions being skipped will not be executed by the CPU.
DirectSOFT
DirectS OF T32 Handheld Programmer Keys trokes
$ C H
C7 K5 S HF T E NT
S TR 2 7
GOTO G O T O F
S HF T E NT
6 INS T# MLR INS T# 5
$ B E NT
S TR 1
X1 C2 GX C C
S HF T E NT
OUT 2 2
OUT
L B L F
S HF T E NT
ANDS T 1 ANDS T 5
LBL K5 $ F E NT
S TR 5
GX C E NT
OUT 2
X5 Y2
OUT

For / Next (FOR) (NEXT)

DS Used The For and Next instructions are used to execute a section of ladder
HPP Used logic between the For and Next instruction a specified numbers of times. A aaa
When the For instruction is enabled, the program will loop the specified FOR
number of times. If the For instruction is not energized, the section of
ladder logic between the For and Next instructions is not executed.
For / Next instructions cannot be nested. The normal I/O update and
CPU housekeeping are suspended while executing the For / Next loop.
The program scan can increase significantly, depending on the amount of
times the logic between the For and Next instruction is executed. With
the exception of immediate I/O instructions, I/O will not be updated NEXT
until the program execution is completed for that scan. Depending on
the length of time required to complete the program execution, it may be
necessary to reset the watch dog timer inside of the For / Next loop using
the RSTWT instruction.

aaa
Constant K 1-9999

In the following example, when X1 is on, the application program inside the For / Next loop
will be executed three times. If X1 is off, the program inside the loop will not be executed. The
immediate instructions may or may not be necessary, depending on your application. Also,
The RSTWT instruction is not necessary if the For / Next loop does not extend the scan time
beyond the Watch Dog Timer setting. For more information on the Watch Dog Timer, refer
to the RSTWT instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 1 2 3
K3
FOR
RSTWT
X20 Y5
OUT
NEXT
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT F O R D ENT
5 INST# ORN 3
SHFT R S T W T ENT
ORN RST MLR ANDN MLR
$ SHFT I C A ENT
STR 8 2 0
GX F ENT
OUT 5
SHFT N E X T ENT
TMR 4 SET MLR

Goto Subroutine (GTS) (SBR)

DS Used The Goto Subroutine instruction allows a section of ladder logic
HPP Used to be placed outside the main body of the program, to execute K aaa
only when needed. There can be a maximum of 256 GTS GTS
instructions and 256 SBR instructions used in a program. The
GTS instructions can be nested up to 8 levels. An error E412 will
occur if the maximum limits are exceeded. Typically this will be
used in an application where a block of program logic may be
slow to execute and is not required to execute every scan. The
subroutine label and all associated logic is placed after the End
statement in the program. When the subroutine is called from SBR K aaa
the main program, the CPU will execute the subroutine (SBR)
with the same constant number (K) as the GTS instruction which
called the subroutine.
By placing code in a subroutine it is only scanned and executed when needed, since it resides
after the End instruction. Code which is not scanned does not impact the overall scan time of
the program.

aaa
Constant K 1-FFFF
Subroutine Return (RT)

DS Used When a Subroutine Return is executed in the subroutine the CPU
HPP Used will return to the point in the main body of the program from
which it was called. The Subroutine Return is used as termination RT
of the subroutine. It must be the last instruction in the subroutine
and is a stand alone instruction (no input contact on the rung).
Subroutine Return Conditional (RTC)
DS Used The Subroutine Return Conditional instruction is an optional
HPP Used instruction used with an input contact to implement a conditional RTC
return from the subroutine. The Subroutine Return (RT) is still
required for termination of the Subroutine.

In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will jump to
the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. If X35 is on,
the CPU will return to the main program at the RTC instruction. If X35 is not on, Y0–Y17
will be reset to off and the CPU will return to the main body of the program.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Display X1 K3
GTS
C0
LD
K10
END
SBR K3
X20 Y5
OUTI
X21 Y10
OUTI
X35
RT C
X35 Y0 Y17
RSTI
RT
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT G T S D ENT
6 MLR RST 3
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT S SHFT B R D ENT

RST 1 ORN 3
$ SHFT I C A ENT
STR 8 2 0
GX SHFT I F ENT
OUT 8 5
$ SHFT I C B ENT
STR 8 2 1
GX SHFT I B A ENT
OUT 8 1 0
$ SHFT I D F ENT
STR 8 3 5
SHFT R T C ENT
ORN MLR 2
SP SHFT I D F ENT
STRN 8 3 5
S SHFT I A B H ENT
RST 8 0 1 7
SHFT R T ENT
ORN MLR

In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will jump to
the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. The CPU will
return to the main body of the program after the RT instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 K3
GTS
END
SBR K3
X20 Y5
OUT
X21 Y10
OUT
RT
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT G T S D ENT
6 MLR RST 3
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT S SHFT B R D ENT

RST 1 ORN 3
$ SHFT I C A ENT
STR 8 2 0
GX F ENT
OUT 5
$ SHFT I C B ENT
STR 8 2 1
GX B A ENT
OUT 1 0
SHFT R T ENT
ORN MLR

Master Line Set (MLS)

DS Used The Master Line Set instruction allows the program to control sections
HPP Used of ladder logic by forming a new power rail controlled by the main left K aaa
power rail. The main left rail is always master line 0. When an MLS K1 MLS
instruction is used, a new power rail is created at level 1. Master Line Sets
and Master Line Resets can be used to nest power rails up to seven levels
deep.
aaa
Constant K 1-FFFF
Master Line Reset (MLR) K aaa

DS Used The Master Line Reset instruction marks the end of control for the MLR
HPP Used corresponding MLS instruction. The MLR reference is one less than the
corresponding MLS.

aaa
Constant K 1-FFFF
Understanding Master Control Relays

The Master Line Set (MLS) and Master Line Reset (MLR) instructions allow you to quickly
enable (or disable) sections of the RLL program. This provides program control flexibility. The
following example shows how the MLS and MLR instructions operate by creating a sub power
rail for control logic.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X0 K1
When contact X0 is ON, logic under the first MLS
MLS will be executed.
X1 Y7
OUT
X2 K2
When contact X0 and X2 are ON, logic under the
MLS
second MLS will be executed.
X3 Y10
OUT
K1
MLR
The MLR instructions note the end of the Master
K0 Control area.
MLR
X10 Y11
OUT

MLS/MLR Example
In the following MLS/MLR example logic between the first MLS K1 (A) and MLR K0 (B)
will function only if input X0 is on. The logic between the MLS K2 (C) and MLR K1 (D) will
function only if input X10 and X0 is on. The last rung is not controlled by either of the MLS
coils.
DirectSOFT
X0 K1
A $ A ENT
MLS STR 0
Y B ENT
X1 C0 MLS 1
OUT $ B ENT
STR 1
X2 C1 GX SHFT C A ENT
OUT 2 0
OUT
$ C ENT
STR 2
X3 Y0
GX SHFT C B ENT
OUT OUT 2 1
$ D ENT
X10 K2 STR 3
C
GX A ENT
MLS
OUT 0
X5 $ B A ENT
Y1
STR 1 0
OUT Y C ENT
MLS 2
X4 Y2 $ F ENT
STR 5
OUT
GX B ENT
OUT 1
K1
D $ E
MLR ENT
STR 4
GX C ENT
X5 C2 OUT 2
OUT T B ENT
MLR 1
X6 Y3 $ F ENT
STR 5
OUT
GX SHFT C C ENT
OUT 2 2
K0
B
$ G ENT
MLR STR 6
GX D ENT
X7 Y4 OUT 3
OUT T A ENT
MLR 0
$ H ENT
STR 7
GX E C ENT
OUT 4 2

Interrupt Instructions
Interrupt (INT)
DS Used The Interrupt instruction allows a section of ladder logic to be placed
HPP Used below the main body of the program and executed only when needed. INT O aaa
High-Speed I/O Modes 10, 20, and 40 can generate an interrupt.
With Mode 40, you may select an external interrupt (input X0), or a
time-based interrupt (3–999 ms).
Typically, interrupts are used in an application when a fast response to an input is needed
or a program section must execute faster than the normal CPU scan. The interrupt label
and all associated logic must be placed after the End statement in the program. When an
interrupt occurs, the CPU will complete execution of the current instruction it is processing
in ladder logic, then execute the interrupt routine. After interrupt routine execution, the
ladder program resumes from the point at which it was interrupted.
See Chapter 3, the section on Mode 40 (Interrupt) Operation for more details on interrupt
configuration. In the DL06, only one software interrupt is available. The software interrupt
uses interrupt #00 (INT 0), which means the hardware interrupt #0 and the software
interrupt cannot be used together. Hardware interrupts are labeled in octal to correspond
with the hardware input signal (e.g. X1 will initiate INT 1).

aaa
Constant O 1-FFFF
Interrupt Return (IRT)

DS Used An Interrupt Return is normally executed as the last instruction in the
HPP Used interrupt routine. It returns the CPU to the point in the main program IRT
from which it was called. The Interrupt Return is a stand-alone instruction
(no input contact on the rung).
Interrupt Return Conditional (IRTC)
DS Used The Interrupt Return Conditional instruction is a optional instruction
HPP Used used with an input contact to implement a conditional return from the IRTC
interrupt routine. The Interrupt Return is required to terminate the
interrupt routine.
Enable Interrupts (ENI)
DS Used The Enable Interrupt instruction is placed in the main ladder program
HPP Used (before the End instruction), enabling the interrupt. The interrupt remains ENI
enabled until the program executes a Disable Interrupt instruction.

Disable Interrupts (DISI)

DS Used A Disable Interrupt instruction in the main body of the application
HPP Used program (before the End instruction) will disable the interrupt (either DISI
external or timed). The interrupt remains disabled until the program
executes an Enable Interrupt instruction.
External Interrupt Program Example

In the following example, we do some initialization on the first scan, using the first-scan contact
SP0. The interrupt feature is the HSIO Mode 40. Then, we configure X0 as the external
interrupt by writing to its configuration register, V7634. See Appendix E, Mode 40 Operation
for more details.
During program execution, when X2 is on, the interrupt is enabled. When X2 is off, the
interrupt will be disabled. When an interrupt signal (X0) occurs, the CPU will jump to the
interrupt label INT O 0. The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed.
The CPU will return to the main body of the program after the IRT instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
SP0 LD Load the constant value
(K40) into the lower 16 bits $ SHFT SP A ENT
K40
of the accumulator STR STRN 0
SHFT L D SHFT K E A ENT

OUT Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to ANDST 3 JMP 4 0
V7633
V7633 GX V H G D D
SHFT ENT
OUT AND 7 6 3 3
LD Load the constant value (K4)
K4 into the lower 16 bits of the L D K E
SHFT SHFT ENT
accumulator ANDST 3 JMP 4
Copy the value in the lower GX SHFT V H G D E ENT

OUT OUT AND 7 6 3 4
V7634 16 bits of the accumulator to
V7634 $ C ENT
STR 2
X2
ENI SHFT E N I ENT
4 TMR 8
X2 SP C ENT
DISI STRN 2
SHFT D I S I ENT
3 8 RST 8
SHFT E N D ENT
END 4 TMR 3
SHFT I N T A ENT
8 TMR MLR 0
INT O0
$ SHFT I B ENT
STR 8 1
X1 Y5
X SHFT I F ENT
SETI SET 8 5
$ SHFT I D ENT
X3 Y7 STR 8 3
SETI
X SHFT I H ENT
SET 8 7
IRT SHFT I R T ENT

8 ORN MLR

Timed Interrupt Program Example

In the following example, we do some initialization on the first scan, using the first-scan contact
SP0. The interrupt feature is the HSIO Mode 40. Then we configure the HSIO timer as a 10
mS interrupt by writing K104 to the configuration register for X0 (V7634). See Appendix E,
Mode 40 Operation for more details.
When X4 turns on, the interrupt will be enabled. When X4 turns off, the interrupt will be
disabled. Every 10 mS the CPU will jump to the interrupt label INT O 0. The application
ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed. If X3 is not on, Y0–Y7 will be reset to
off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the program.
DirectSOFT
SP0 Load the constant value
LD $ B
(K40) into the lower 16 bits ENT
K40 STR 1
of the accumulator
SHFT L D SHFT K E A ENT
ANDST 3 JMP 4 0
OUT Copy the value in the lower GX V H G D D

16 bits of the accumulator to SHFT ENT
OUT AND 7 6 3 3
V7633 V7633
SHFT L D SHFT K B A E ENT
ANDST 3 JMP 1 0 4
LD Load the constant value GX V H G D E

SHFT ENT
(K10) into the lower 16 bits OUT AND 7 6 3 4
$ E ENT
STR 4
OUT Copy the value in the lower SHFT E N I ENT

16 bits of the accumulator to 4 TMR 8
V7634 V7634
SP E ENT
STRN 4
X4
SHFT D I S I ENT
ENI 3 8 RST 8
X4
DISI
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT I N T A ENT
8 TMR MLR 0
END
$ SHFT I C ENT
STR 8 2
INT O0
X SHFT I F ENT
SET 8 5
SP SHFT I D ENT
X2 Y5 STRN 8 3
SETI X SHFT I A H ENT
SET 8 0 7
SHFT I R T ENT
X3 Y0 Y7 8 ORN MLR
RSTI
IRT

Message Instructions
Fault (FAULT)
DS Used The Fault instruction is used to display a message on the handheld
HPP Used programmer, the optional LCD display or in the DirectSOFT FAULT
status bar. The message has a maximum of 23 characters and can A aaa
be either V-memory data, numerical constant data or ASCII text.
To display the value in a V-memory location, specify the V-memory location in the instruction.
To display the data in ACON (ASCII constant) or NCON (Numerical constant) instructions,
specify the constant (K) value for the corresponding data label area.
See Appendix G for the ASCII conversion table.
aaa
Constant K 1-FFFF

SP50 On when the FAULT instruction is executed
Fault Example
In the following example when X1 is on, the message SW 146 will display on the handheld
programmer. The NCONs use the HEX ASCII equivalent of
the text to be displayed. (The HEX ASCII for a blank is 20,
a 1 is 31, 4 is 34 ...)
FAULT :
*SW 146
DirectSOFT
X1 FAULT $ B ENT
K1 STR 1
SHFT F A U L T B ENT
5 0 ISG ANDST MLR 1
END
DLBL E N D
K1 SHFT ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT D L B L B ENT
ACON
3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1
A SW
SHFT A C O N S W ENT
0 2 INST# TMR RST ANDN
SHFT N C O N C A D B ENT
NCON TMR 2 INST# TMR 2 0 3 1
K 2031
SHFT N C O N D E D G ENT
NCON
K 3436

Data Label (DLBL)

DS Used The Data Label instruction marks the beginning of an ASCII/
DLBL
HPP Used numeric data area. DLBLs are programmed after the End statement.
K aaa
A maximum of 64 DLBL instructions can be used in a program.
Multiple NCONs and ACONs can be used in a DLBL area.

aaa
Constant K 1-FFFF
DS Used
ACON
HPP Used ASCII Constant (ACON) A aaa
The ASCII Constant instruction is used with the DLBL instruction
to store ASCII text for use with other instructions. Two ASCII
characters can be stored in an ACON instruction. If only one
character is stored in a ACON a leading space will be inserted.
aaa
ASCII A 0-9 A-Z
DS Used Numerical Constant (NCON) NCON

HPP Used
The Numerical Constant instruction is used with the DLBL K aaa
instruction to store the HEX ASCII equivalent of numerical data for
use with other instructions. Two digits can be stored in an NCON
instruction.
aaa
Constant K 1-FFFF

Data Label Example

In the following example, an ACON and two NCON instructions are used within a DLBL
instruction to build a text message. See the FAULT instruction for information on displaying
messages. The DV-1000 Manual also has information on displaying messages.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
END
DLBL
K1
ACON
A SW
NCON
K 2031
NCON
K 3436
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
SHFT D L B L B ENT
3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1
SHFT A C O N S W ENT
0 2 INST# TMR RST ANDN
SHFT N C O N C A D B ENT
SHFT N C O N D E D G ENT

Move Block Instruction (MOVBLK)

DS Used The Move Block instruction copies a specified number of words MOVBLK
HPP Used from a Data Label Area of program memory (ACON, NCON) to V aaa
the specified V-memory location.
Below are the steps for using the Move Block function:
• Step 1: Load the number of words (octal) to be copied into the 1st level of the accumulator stack.
• Step 2: Load the source data label (LDLBL Kaaa) into the accumulator. This is where the data will
be copied from.
• Step 3: Insert the MOVBLK instruction that specifies the V-memory destination. This is where the
data will be copied to.
Copy Data From a Data Label Area to V-memory

In the example below, data is copied from a Data Label Area to V-memory. When X1 is on,
the octal value (O4) is copied to the first level of the accumulator stack using the Load Address
(LDA) instruction. This value specifies the number of words to be copied. Load Label (LDLBL)
instruction will load the source data address (K1) into the accumulator. This is where the data
will be copied from. The MOVBLK instruction specifies the destination starting location and
executes the copying of data from the Data Label Area to V-memory.
DirectSOFT
Data label area
.
X1 LDA to be copied .
O4 X X X X V1777
Load the value 4 into the DLBL K1

accumulator specifying the N C O N 1 2 3 4 V2000
number of words to be copied.
K 1 2 3 4
N C O N 4 5 3 2 V2001
LDLBL
K1 K 4 5 3 2
N C O N 6 1 5 1 V2002
accumulator specifying the K 6 1 5 1
Data Label Area K1 as the
N C O N 8 8 4 5 V2003
starting address of the data
to be copied. K 8 8 4 5
X X X X V2004
MOVBLK
V2000 .
.
V2000 is the destination
starting address for the data
to be copied.
$ B ENT
STR 1
SHFT L D A E ENT
ANDST 3 0 4
SHFT L D L B L B ENT
ANDST 3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1
M O V B L K C A A A
SHFT ENT
ORST INST# AND 1 ANDST JMP 2 0 0 0

Print Message (PRINT)

The Print Message instruction prints the embedded
DS Used
text or text/data variable message (maximum 128 PRINT A aaa
HPP N/A
characters) to the specified communications port
“Hello, this is a PLC message”
(Port 2 on the DL06 CPU), which must have the
communications port configured.

aaa
Constant K 2
You may recall, from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3, that the DL06’s ports are capable
of several protocols. Port 1 cannot be configured for the non-sequence protocol. To configure
port 2 using the Handheld Programmer, use AUX 56 and follow the prompts, making the same
choices as indicated below on this page. To configure a port in DirectSOFT, choose the PLC
menu, then Setup, then Setup Secondary Comm Port.
• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose Port 2.
• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of Non-sequence, and then you’ll see the dialog box shown
below.
• Baud Rate: Choose the baud rate that matches your printer.
• Stop Bits, Parity: Choose number of stop bits and parity setting to match your printer.
• Memory Address: Choose a V-memory address for DirectSOFT to use to store the port setup
information. You will need to reserve 66 contiguous words in V-memory for this purpose.
Before ending the setup, click the button indicated to send Port 2
configuration to the CPU, and click Close. See Chapter 3 for port
wiring information, in order to connect your printer to the DL06.

Port 2 on the DL06 has standard RS232 levels, and should work with most printer serial input
connections.
Text element – this is used for printing character strings. The character strings are defined as
the character (more than 0) ranged by the double quotation marks. Two hex numbers preceded
by the dollar sign means an 8-bit ASCII character code. Also, two characters preceded by the
dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table:
# Character code Description
1 $$ Dollar sign ($)
2 $” Double quotation (”)
3 $L or $l Line feed (LF)
4 $N or $n Carriage return line feed (CRLF)
5 $P or $p Form feed
6 $R or $r Carriage return (CR)
7 $T or $t Tab
The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the
printer.
Example:
” ” Length 0 without character
”A” Length 1 with character A
” ” Length 1 with blank
” $” ” Length 1 with double quotation mark
” $ R $ L ” Length 2 with one CR and one LF
” $ 0 D $ 0 A ” Length 2 with one CR and one LF
” $ $ ” Length 1 with one $ mark
In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks before
and after the text string. Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print instruction
contains invalid text or no quotations. It is important to test your PRINT instruction data
during the application development.
The following example prints the message to port 2. We use a PD contact, which causes the
message instruction to be active for just one scan. Note the $N at the end of the message, which
produces a carriage return / line feed on the printer. This prepares the printer to print the next
line, starting from the left margin.
X1 PRINT K2 Print the message to Port 2 when

“Hello, this is a PLC message.$N” X1 makes an off-to-on transition.

V-memory element - this is used for printing V-memory contents in the integer format or real
format. Use V-memory number or V-memory number with “:” and data type. The data types
are shown in the table below. The Character code must be capital letters.
NOTE: There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to separate it from the text
string. Failure to do this will result in an error code 499.

1 none 16-bit binary (decimal number)
2 :B 4 digit BCD
3 :D 32-bit binary (decimal number)
4 :DB 8 digit BCD
5 :R Floating point number (real number)
6 :E Floating point number (real number with exponent)
Example:
V2000 Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number
V2000 : B Print BCD data in V2000
V2000 : D Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number
V2000 : D B Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001
V2000 : R Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number
V2000 : E Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number with exponent
X1 PRINT K2 Print the message to Port 2

“Reactor temperature = ” V2000 “deg. $N” when X1 makes an off-to-on
⊥ ⊥ transition.
⊥ represents a space
Message will read:
Reactor temperature = 0156 deg.
Example: The following example prints a message containing text and a variable. The “reactor
temperature” labels the data, which is at V2000. You can use the : B qualifier after the V2000
if the data is in BCD format, for example. The final string adds the units of degrees to the line
of text, and the $N adds a carriage return / line feed.
V-memory text element - This is used for printing text stored in V-memory. Use the %
followed by the number of characters after V-memory number for representing the text. If you
assign “0” as the number of characters, the print function will read the character count from the
first location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location and read that number of ASCII
codes for the text from memory.
Example:
V2000 % 16 16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed.
V2000 % 0 The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number in V2000) will
be printed.

Bit element
This is used for printing the state of the designated bit in V-memory or a relay bit. The
bit element can be assigned by the designating point (.) and bit number preceded by the
V-memory number or relay number. The output type is described as shown in the table below.
# Data Format Description

1 none Print 1 for an ON state, and 0 for an
OFF state
2 :BOOL Print “TRUE” for an ON state, and
“FALSE” for an OFF state
3 :ONOFF Print “ON” for an ON state, and
“OFF” for an OFF state
Example:
V2000 . 15 Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000, in 1/0 format
C100 Prints the status of C100 in 1/0 format
C100 : BOOL Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format
C100 : ON/OFF Prints the status of C100 in ON/OFF format
V2000.15 : BOOL Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format
The maximum numbers of characters you can print is 128. The number of characters for each
element is listed in the table below:
Element Type Maximum Characters

Text, 1 character 1
16 bit binary 6
32 bit binary 11
4 digit BCD 4
8 digit BCD 8
Floating point (real number) 12
Floating point (real with exponent) 12
V-memory/text 2
Bit (1/0 format) 1
Bit (TRUE/FALSE format) 5
Bit (ON/OFF format) 3
The handheld programmer’s mnemonic is “PRINT” followed by the DEF field.

Special relay flags SP116 and SP117 indicate the status of the DL06 CPU ports (busy, or
communications error). See the appendix on special relays for a description.
NOTE: You must use the appropriate special relay in conjunction with the PRINT command to ensure
the ladder program does not try to PRINT to a port that is still busy from a previous PRINT or WX or RX
instruction.

Intelligent I/O Instructions

Read from Intelligent Module (RD)
DS32 Used The Read from Intelligent Module instruction reads a block of
HPP Used data (1-128 bytes maximum) from an intelligent I/O module into RD
the CPU’s V-memory. It loads the function parameters into the V aaa
first and second level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator
by three additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps to program the Read from Intelligent module function.
Step 1: Load the base number (0-3) into the first byte and the slot number (0-7) into the
second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack
(maximum of 128 bytes).
Step 3: Load the address from which the data will be read into the accumulator. This parameter
must be a HEX value.
Step 4: Insert the RD instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) where
the data will be read into.
Helpful Hint: S Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent
and load it into the accumulator when the HEX format is required.
aaa

SP54 On when RX, WX RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.
In the following example, when X1 is ON, the RD instruction will read six bytes of data from
a intelligent module in base 1, slot 2, starting at address 0 in the intelligent module, and copy
the information into V-memory locations V1400-V1402.
DirectSOFT CPU Intelligent Module
Direct SOFT 5
Data
}
{
X1 The constant value K0102
LD specifies the base number V1400 3 4 1 2 12 Address 0
K0102 (01) and the base slot V1401 7 8 5 6 34 Address 1
number (02).
V1402 0 1 9 0 56 Address 2
LD The constant value K6 V1403 X X X X 78 Address 3

specifies the number of
K6 bytes to be read. V1404 X X X X 90 Address 4
01 Address 5
LD The constant value K0

specifies the starting address
K0
in the intelligent module. $ B ENT
STR 1
V1400 is the starting location L D A B A C
RD SHFT PREV ENT
in the CPU where the specified ANDST 3 0 1 0 2
V1400 data will be stored.
SHFT L D PREV G
ENT
ANDST 3 6
L D A
SHFT PREV ENT
ANDST 3 0
R D B E A A
SHFT ENT
ORN 3 1 4 0 0

Write to Intelligent Module (WT)

DS32 Used The Write to Intelligent Module instruction writes a block of data
HPP Used (1-128 bytes maximum) to an intelligent I/O module from a block WT
of V-memory in the CPU. The function parameters are loaded V aaa
into the first and second level of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator by three additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps to program the Read from Intelligent module function.
Step 1: Load the base number (0-3) into the first byte and the slot number (0-7) into the
second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack
(maximum of 128 bytes).
Step 3: Load the intelligent module address which will receive the data into the accumulator.
Step 4: Insert the WT instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) where
the data will be written from in the CPU.
Helpful Hint: S Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent
and load it into the accumulator when the HEX format is required.
aaa

SP54 On when RX, WX RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the WT instruction will write six bytes of data to an
intelligent module in base 1, slot 2,starting at address 0 in the intelligent module, and copy the
data from V-memory locations V1400-V1402.
CPU Intelligent Module
DirectSOFT Data
{
Direct SOFT 5 12
V1377 X X X X Address 0
}
X1 The constant value K0102 34 Address 1
LD specifies the base number V1400 3 4 1 2
K0102 (01) and the base slot 56 Address 2
V1401 7 8 5 6
number (02). 78
0 1 9 0 Address 3
V1402
The constant value K6 90 Address 4
LD V1403 X X X X
specifies the number of 01 Address 5
K6 bytes to be written. V1404 X X X X
LD The constant value K0

specifies the starting address
K0
in the intelligent module. $ B ENT
STR 1
V1400 is the starting location L D A B A C
WT SHFT PREV ENT
in the CPU where the specified ANDST 3 0 1 0 2
V1400 data will be written from.
SHFT L D PREV G
ENT
ANDST 3 6
L D A
SHFT PREV ENT
ANDST 3 0
W T B E A A
SHFT ENT
ANDN MLR 1 4 0 0

Network Instructions
Read from Network (RX)
DS32 Used
The Read from Network instruction is used by the master device on
HPP Used
a network to read a block of data from a slave device on the same RX
network. The function parameters are loaded into the first and second A aaa
level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional
instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Read from Network function.
• Step 1: Load the slave address (0-- 90 BCD) into the first byte and the PLC internal port (KF2) or
slot number of the master DCM or ECOM (0-- 7) into the second byte of the second level
of the accumulator stack.
• Step 2: L oad the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack.
• Step 3: Load the address of the data to be read into the accumulator. This parameter requires a
HEX value.
• Step 4: Insert the RX instruction which specifies the starting Vmemory location (Aaaa) where the
data will be read from in the slave.
Helpful Hint: — For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be used
to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
Stage S 0–1777
Timer T 0–377
Counter CT 0–177
Program Memory $ 0–7680 (2K program mem.)

In the following example, when X1 is on and the port busy relay SP116 (see special relays)
is not on, the RX instruction will access port 2 operating as a master. Ten consecutive bytes
of data (V2000 – V2004) will be read from a CPU at station address 5 and copied into
V-memory locations V2300–V2304 in the CPU with the master port.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 SP116 LD
KF205
The constant value KF205

Master Slave
specifies the port number (2) CPU CPU
and the slave address (5)
LD
K10
V2277 X X X X X X X X V1777
The constant value K10 V2300 3 4 5 7 3 4 5 7 V2000
bytes to be read V2301 8 5 3 4 8 5 3 4 V2001
V2302 1 9 3 6 1 9 3 6 V2002
LDA
V2303 9 5 7 1 9 5 7 1 V2003
O 2300
V2304 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 V2004
Octal address 2300 is
converted to 4C0 HEX and V2305 X X X X X X X X V2005
loaded into the accumulator.
location for the Master CPU
where the specified data will
be read into
RX
V2000

location in the for the Slave
CPU where the specified
data will be read from
$ B ENT
STR 1
W SHFT SP B B G ENT
ANDN STRN 1 1 6
SHFT L D SHFT K SHFT F SHFT C A F ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 5 2 0 5
SHFT L D SHFT K B A ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 1 0
SHFT L D A C D A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 2 3 0 0
SHFT R X C A A A ENT
ORN SET 2 0 0 0

Write to Network (WX)

DS Used The Write to Network instruction is used to write a block
HPP Used of data from the master device to a slave device on the WX
same network. The function parameters are loaded into the A aaa
accumulator and the first and second levels of the stack.
Listed below are the program steps necessary to execute the Write to Network function.
Step 1: Load the slave address (0–90 BCD) into the low byte and “F2” into the high
byte of the accumulator (the next two instructions push this word down to the
second layer of the stack).
Step 2: Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the accumulator (the next
instruction pushes this word onto the top of the stack).
Step 3: Load the starting Master CPU address into the accumulator. This is the memory
location where the data will be written from. This parameter requires a HEX
value.
Step 4: Insert the WX instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location
(Aaaa) where the data will be written to in the slave.
Helpful Hint: — For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be used
to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.

A aaa
Inputs X 0–777
Outputs Y 0–777
Stage S 0–1777
Timer T 0–377
Counter CT 0–177
Program Memory $ 0–7680 (2K program mem.)

In the following example, when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP116 (see special relays)
is not on, the WX instruction will access port 2 operating as a master. Ten consecutive bytes of
data are read from the Master CPU and copied to V-memory locations V2000–V2004 in the
slave CPU at station address 5.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 SP116 LD
KF205
The constant value KF205

Master Slave
specifies the port number (2) CPU CPU
and the slave address (5)
LD
K10
V2277 X X X X X X X X V1777
The constant value K10 V2300 3 4 5 7 3 4 5 7 V2000
bytes to be written V2301 8 5 3 4 8 5 3 4 V2001
V2302 1 9 3 6 1 9 3 6 V2002
LDA
V2303 9 5 7 1 9 5 7 1 V2003
O 2300
V2304 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 V2004
Octal address 2300 is
converted to 4C0 HEX and V2305 X X X X X X X X V2005
loaded into the accumulator.
location for the Master CPU
where the specified data will
be read from.
WX
V2000

location in the for the Slave
CPU where the specified
data will be written to
$ B ENT
STR 1
W SHFT SP B C E ENT
ANDN STRN 1 1 6
SHFT L D SHFT K F C A F ENT

SHFT SHFT
ANDST 3 JMP 5 2 0 5
SHFT L D SHFT K B A ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 1 0
SHFT L D A C D A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 2 3 0 0
SHFT W X C A A A ENT
ANDN SET 2 0 0 0

LCD
DS Used When enabled, the LCD instruction causes a user-defined text
HPP N/A message to be displayed on the LCD Display Panel. The display LCD
is 16 characters wide by 2 rows high so a total of 32 characters Line Number: Kn
can be displayed. Each row is addressed separately; the maximum "text message"
number of characters the instruction will accept is 16.
The text message can be entered directly into the message field of the instruction set-up dialog,
or it can be located anywhere in user V-memory. If the text is located in V-memory, the LCD
instruction is used to point to the memory location where the desired text originates. The
length of the text string is also required.
From the DirectSOFT project folder, use the Instruction Browser to locate the LCD
instruction. When you select the LCD instruction and click OK, the LCD dialog will appear,
as shown in the examples. The LCD instruction is inserted into the ladder program via this
set-up dialog box.
Display text strings can include embedded variables. Date and time settings and V-memory
values can be embedded in the displayed text. Examples of each are shown.
Direct Text Entry

The two dialogs to the right show the
selections necessary to create the two ladder
instructions below. Double quotation marks
are required to delineate the text string. In
the first dialog, the text “Sludge Pit Alarm“
uses sixteen character spaces and will appear
on line 1 when the instruction is enabled.
Note, the line number is K1. Clicking the
“check” button causes the instruction to be
inserted into the ladder program.
LCD
Line Number: K1
"Sludge Pit Alarm"
LCD
Line Number: K2
"Effluent Overflo"
By identifying the second Line Number

as K2, the text string “Effluent Overflow”
will appear on the second line of the display
when the second instruction is enabled.
S l u d g e P i t A l a r m
E f f l u e n t O v e r f l o

Embedding date and/or time variables

The date and/or time can be embedded in
the displayed text by using the variables
listed in the table below. These variables
can be included in the LCD message field
of the LCD dialog. In the example, the time
variable (12 hour format) is embedded by
adding _time:12. This time format uses a
maximum of seven character spaces. The
second dialog creates an instruction that
prints the date on the second line of the
display, when enabled.
Date and Time Variables and Formats

_date:us US format MM/DD/YY
_date:e European format DD/MM/YY
_date:a Asian format YY/MM/DD
_time:12 12 hour format HH:MMAM/PM
_time:24 24 hour format HH:MM:SS
LCD
Line Number: K1
"Alarm 1 " _time:12
LCD
Line Number: K2
_date:us
A l a r m 1 1 1 : 2 1 P M
0 5 - 0 8 - 0 2
Embedding V-memory data

Any V-memory data can be displayed in
any one of six available data formats. An
example appears to the right. A list of data
formats and modifiers is on the next page.
Note that different data formats require
differing numbers of character positions
on the display.
LCD
Line Number: K1
"Count = " V2500:B
C o u n t = 0 4 1 2

Data Format Suffixes for Embedded V-memory Data

Several data formats are available for displaying V-memory data on the LCD. The choices are
shown in the table below. A colon is used to separate the embedded V-memory location from
the data format suffix and modifier. An example appears on the previous page.
Data Format Modifier Example Displayed Characters

V2000 = 0000 0000 0001 0010 1 2 3 4
V2000 1 8
none
[:S] V2000:S 1 8
(16-bit format)
[:C0] V2000:C0 0 0 1 8
[:0] V2000:0 1 8
V2000 = 0000 0000 0001 0010 1 2 3 4
[:B] V2000:B 0 0 1 2
:B
[:BS] V2000:BS 1 2
(4 digit BCD)
[:BC0] V2000:BC0 0 0 1 2
[:B0] V2000:B0 1 2
V2000 = 0000 0000 0000 0000 Double Word
V2001 = 0000 0000 0000 0001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
:D [:D] V2000:D 6 5 5 3 6
(32-bit decimal) [:DS] V2000:DS 6 5 5 3 6
[:DC0] V2000:DC0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 5 5 3 6
[:D0] V2000:D0 6 5 5 3 6
V2000 = 0000 0000 0000 0000 Double Word
V2001 = 0000 0000 0000 0011 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
:DB [:DB] V2000:DB 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0
(8 digit BCD) [:DBS] V2000:DBS 3 0 0 0 0
[:DBC0] V2000:DBC0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0
[:DB0] V2000:DB0 3 0 0 0 0
V2001/V2000 = 222.11111 Double Word
(real number) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
:R
(DWord floating [:R] V2000:R f 2 2 2 . 1 1 1 1 1
point number) [:RS] V2000:RS f 2 2 2 . 1 1 1 1 1
[:RC0] V2000:RC0 f 0 0 0 2 2 2 . 1 1 1 1 1
[:R0] V2000:R0 f 2 2 2 . 1 1 1 1 1
V2001/V2000 = 222.1 Double Word
:E (real number) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
(DWord floating [:E] V2000:E f 2 . 2 2 1 0 0 E + 0 2
point number [:ES] V2000:ES f 2 . 2 2 1 0 0 E + 0 2
with exponent) [:EC0] V2000:EC0 f 2 . 2 2 1 0 0 E + 0 2
[:E0] V2000:E0 f 2 . 2 2 1 0 0 E + 0 2
f = plus/minus flag (plus = no symbol, minus = - )
The S, C0, and 0 modifiers alter the presentation of leading zeros and spaces. S removes
leading spaces and left justifies the result. C0 replaces leading spaces with leading zeros.
0 is a modification of C0. 0 eliminates any leading zeros in the C0 format version and converts
them to spaces.

Text Entry from V-memory

Alternatively, text that resides in V-memory can be displayed on the LCD following the
example on this page. The LCD dialog is used twice, once for each line on the display. The
dialog requires the address of the first character to be displayed and the number of characters
to be displayed.
For example, the two dialogs shown on this page would create the two LCD instructions
below. When enabled, these instructions would cause the ASCII characters in V10000 to
V10017 to be displayed. The ASCII characters and their corresponding memory locations are
shown in the table below.
V10000 d A
V10001 i m
LCD V10002 n
Line Number: K1 V10003 f O
Starting V Memory Address: V10000 V10004 i f
Number of Characters: K16 V10005 e c
V10006
LCD V10007
Line Number: K2 V10010 i H
Starting V Memory Address: V10010 V10011 h g
Number of Characters: K16 V10012 T
V10013 m e
V10014 p
V10015 l A
V10016 r a
A d m i n O f f i c e
V10017 m
H i g h T e m p A l a r m

MODBUS RTU Instructions

MODBUS Read from Network (MRX)
DS Used The MODBUS Read from Network (MRX) instruction is used by the DL06 network master
HPP N/A to read a block of data from a connected slave device and to write the data into V–memory
addresses within the master. The instruction allows the user to specify the MODBUS Function
Code, slave station address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements to
transfer, MODBUS data format and the Exception Response Buffer.
CPU/DCM: select either CPU or DCM module for
communications
Slot Number: select PLC option slot number if
using a DCM module.
Port Number: must be DL06 Port 2 (K2)
Slave Address: specify a slave station address (0–247)
Function Code: The following MODBUS function
codes are supported by the MRX instruction:
01 – Read a group of coils
02 – Read a group of inputs
03 – Read holding registers
04 – Read input registers
07 – Read Exception status
tart Slave Memory Address: specifies the starting slave memory address of the data to be read.
S
See the table on the following page.
Start Master Memory Address: specifies the starting memory address in the master where the
data will be placed. See the table on the following page.
Number of Elements: specifies how many coils, inputs, holding registers or input register will
be read. See the table on the following page.
MODBUS Data Format: specifies MODBUS 584/984 or 484 data format to be used
Exception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response will
be placed (6-bytes in length). See the table on the following page. The exception response buffer uses 3
words. These bytes are swapped in the MRX/MWX exception response buffer V-memory so:
• V-Memory 1 Hi Byte = Function Code Byte (Most Significant Bit Set)
• V-Memory 1 Lo Byte = Address Byte
• V-Memory 2 Hi Byte = One of the CRC Bytes
• V-Memory 2 Lo Byte = Exception Code
• V-Memory 3 Hi Byte = 0
• V-Memory 3 Lo Byte = Other CRC Byte

MRX Slave Address Ranges
Function Code MODBUS Data Format Slave Address Range(s)

01 – Read Coil 484 Mode 1–999
01 – Read Coil 584/984 Mode 1–65535
02 – Read Input Status 484 Mode 1001–1999
02 – Read Input Status 584/984 Mode 10001–19999 (5 digit) or 100001–
165535 (6 digit)
03 – Read Holding Register 484 Mode 4001–4999
03 – Read Holding Register 584/984 Mode 40001–49999 (5 digit) or 4000001–
465535 (6 digit)
04 – Read Input Register 484 Mode 3001–3999
04 – Read Input Register 584/984 Mode 30001–39999 (5 digit) or 3000001–
365535 (6 digit)
07 – Read Exception Status 484 and 584/984 Mode N/A
MRX Master Memory Address Ranges

Inputs X 0–1777
Outputs Y 0–1777
Stage Bits S 0–1777
Timer Bits T 0–377
Counter Bits CT 0–377
Special Relays SP 0–777
V–memory V all
Global Inputs GX 0–3777
Global Outputs GY 0–3777
Number of Elements
V–memory V all
Constant K Bits: 1–2000 Registers: 1–125
Exception Response Buffer

V–memory V all

MRX Example
DL06 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see Appendix D for comm
port special relays). One indicates “Port busy”(SP116), and the other indicates ”Port
Communication Error”(SP117). The “Port Busy” bit is on while the PLC communicates with
the slave. When the bit is off, the program can initiate the next network request. The “Port
Communication Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error. Use of this bit is
optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes, since the error bit
is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction is executed. Typically, network communications
will last longer than 1 CPU scan. The program must wait for the communications to finish
before starting the next transaction.
NOTE: See Chapter 4, page 4-21, for an RLL example using multiple Read and Write interlocks with MRX/
MWX instructions.

MODBUS Write to Network (MWX)

DS Used The MODBUS Write to Network (MWX) instruction is used to write a block of data from
HPP N/A the network masters’s (DL06) memory to MODBUS memory addresses within a slave device
on the network. The instruction allows the user to specify the MODBUS Function Code, slave
station address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements to transfer,
MODBUS data format and the Exception Response Buffer.
CPU/DCM: select either CPU or DCM module

for communications
Slot Number: select PLC option slot number if
using a DCM module
Port Number: must be DL06 Port 2 (K2)
Slave Address: specify a slave station address
(0–247)
Function Code: MODBUS function codes
supported by the MWX instruction:
05 – Force Single coil
06 – Preset Single Register
15 – Force Multiple Coils
16 – Preset Multiple Registers
tart Slave Memory Address: specifies the starting slave memory address where the data will
S
be written
Start Master Memory Address: specifies the starting address of the data in the master that is
to be written to the slave
Number of Elements: specifies how many consecutive coils or registers will be written to. This
field is only active when either function code 15 or 16 is selected.
MODBUS Data Format: specifies MODBUS 584/984 or 484 data format to be used
Exception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response will be
placed (6-bytes in length). See the table on the following page.The exception response buffer uses 3 words.
These bytes are swapped in the MRX/MWX exception response buffer V-memory so:
• V-Memory 1 Hi Byte = Function Code Byte (Most Significant Bit Set)
• V-Memory 1 Lo Byte = Address Byte
• V-Memory 2 Hi Byte = One of the CRC Bytes
• V-Memory 2 Lo Byte = Exception Code
• V-Memory 3 Hi Byte = 0
• V-Memory 3 Lo Byte = Other CRC Byte

MWX Slave Address Ranges

MWX Slave Address Ranges
Function Code MODBUS Data Format Slave Address Range(s)
05 – Force Single Coil 484 Mode 1–999
05 – Force Single Coil 584/984 Mode 1–65535
06 – Preset Single Register 484 Mode 4001–4999
06 – Preset Single Register 584/984 Mode 40001–49999 (5 digit) or 400001–
465535 (6 digit)
15 – Force Multiple Coils 484 Mode 1–999
15 – Force Multiple Coils 585/984 Mode 1–65535
16 – Preset Multiple Registers 484 Mode 4001–4999
16 – Preset Multiple Registers 584/984 Mode 40001–49999 (5 digit) or 4000001–
465535 (6 digit)
MWX Master Memory Address Ranges

MWX Master Memory Address Ranges
Inputs X 0–1777
Outputs Y 0–1777
Stage Bits S 0–1777
Timer Bits T 0–377
Counter Bits CT 0–377
Special Relays SP 0–777
V–memory V all
Global Inputs GX 0–3777
Global Outputs GY 0–3777
MWX Number of Elements

Number of Elements
V–memory V all
Constant K Bits: 1–2000 Registers: 1–125
MWX Exception Response Buffer

Number of Elements
V–memory V all

MWX Example
DL06 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see Appendix D for comm port
special relays). One indicates “Port busy”(SP116), and the other indicates ”Port Communication
Error”(SP117). The “Port Busy” bit is on while the PLC communicates with the slave. When
the bit is off, the program can initiate the next network request. The “Port Communication
Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error. Use of this bit is optional. When used,
it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit is reset when an MRX
or MWX instruction is executed.
Typically, network communications will last longer than 1 CPU scan. The program must wait
for the communications to finish before starting the next transaction.
This rung does a MODBUS write to the first holding register 40001 of slave address
number six. It will write the values over that reside in V2000. This particular function
code only writes to 1 register. Use Function Code 16 to write to multiple registers.
Only one Network instruction (WX, RX, MWX, MRX) can be enabled in one scan.
That is the reason for the interlock bits.
X1 C100
2 SET
Port 2 busy bit Instruction Interlock bit

SP116 C100
MWX
3 Port Number: K2
Slave Address: K6
Function Code: 06-Preset Single Register
Start Slave Memory Address: 40001
Start Master Memory Address: V2000
Number of Elements: n/a
Modbus Data type: 584/984 Mode
Exception Response Buffer: V400
Instruction Interlock bit

C100
RST
NOTE: See Chapter 4, page 4-21, for an RLL example using multiple Read and Write interlocks with MRX/
MWX instructions.

ASCII Instructions
The DL06 CPU supports several instructions and methods that allow ASCII strings to be read
into and written from the PLC communications ports. Specifically, port 2 on the DL06 can be
used for either reading or writing raw ASCII strings, but cannot be used for both at the same
time. The DL06 can also decipher ASCII embedded within a supported protocol (K–Sequence,
DirectNet, Modbus) via the CPU port.
Reading ASCII Input Strings

There are several methods that the DL06 can use to read ASCII input strings.
1) ASCII IN (AIN) – This instruction configures port 2 for raw ASCII input strings with
parameters such as fixed and variable length ASCII strings, termination characters, byte
swapping options, and instruction control bits. Use barcode scanners, weight scales, etc. to
write raw ASCII input strings into port 2 based on the (AIN) instruction’s parameters.
2) Write embedded ASCII strings directly to V–memory from an external HMI or similar
master device via a supported communications protocol using the CPU ports. The AIN
instruction is not used in this case. 3) If a DL06 PLC is a master on a network, the Network
Read instruction (RX) can be used to read embedded ASCII data from a slave device via
a supported communications protocol using port 2. The RX instruction places the data
directly into V–memory.
Writing ASCII Output Strings

The following instructions can be used to write ASCII output strings:
1) Print from V–memory (PRINTV) – Use this instruction to write raw ASCII strings out
of port 2 to a display panel or a serial printer, etc. The instruction features the starting
V–memory address, string length, byte swapping options, etc. When the instruction’s
permissive bit is enabled, the string is written to port 2.
2) Print to V–memory (VPRINT) – Use this instruction to create pre–coded ASCII strings in
the PLC (i.e. alarm messages). When the instruction’s permissive bit is enabled, the message
is loaded into a pre–defined V–memory address location. Then the (PRINTV) instruction
may be used to write the pre–coded ASCII string out of port 2. American, European and
Asian Time/Date stamps are supported.
Additionally, if a DL06 PLC is a master on a network, the Network Write instruction (WX)
can be used to write embedded ASCII data to an HMI or slave device directly from V–memory
via a supported communications protocol using port 2.

Managing the ASCII Strings

The following instructions can be helpful in managing the ASCII strings within the CPUs
V–memory:
ASCII Find (AFIND) – Finds where a specific portion of the ASCII string is located in
continuous V–memory addresses. Forward and reverse searches are supported.
ASCII Extract (AEX) – Extracts a specific portion (usually some data value) from the ASCII
find location or other known ASCII data location.
Compare V–memory (CMPV) – This instruction is used to compare two blocks of V–memory
addresses and is usually used to detect a change in an ASCII string. Compared data types must
be of the same format (i.e., BCD, ASCII, etc.).
Swap Bytes (SWAPB) – usually used to swap V–memory bytes on ASCII data that was written
directly to V–memory from an external HMI or similar master device via a communications
protocol. The AIN and AEX instructions have a built–in byte swap feature.

ASCII Input (AIN)

DS Used The ASCII Input instruction allows the CPU to receive ASCII strings through the specified
HPP N/A communications port and places the string into a series of specified V–memory registers. The
ASCII data can be received as a fixed number of bytes or as a variable length string with specified
termination character(s). Other features include, Byte Swap preferences, Character Timeout,
and user defined flag bits for Busy, Complete and Timeout Error.
AIN Fixed Length Configuration
ength Type: select fixed length
L
based on the length of the ASCII
string that will be sent to the CPU
port
Port Number: must be DL06 port
2 (K2)
Data Destination: specifies where
the ASCII string will be placed in
V–memory
Fixed Length: specifies the length,
in bytes, of the fixed length ASCII
string the port will receive
Inter–character Timeout: if the
amount of time between incoming
ASCII characters exceeds the set
time, the specified Timeout Error
bit will be set.
No data will be stored at the Data Destination V–memory location. The bit will reset when the
AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. 0ms selection disables this feature.
First Character Timeout: if the amount of time from when the AIN is enabled to the time the
first character is received exceeds the set time, the specified First Character Timeout bit will
be set. The bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. 0ms selection
disables this feature.
Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte within each V–memory register of the Fixed
Length ASCII string. See the SWAPB instruction for details.
Busy Bit: is ON while the AIN instruction is receiving ASCII data
Complete Bit: is set once the ASCII data has been received for the specified fixed length and
reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled.
Inter–character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the Character Timeout is exceeded. See
Character Timeout explanation above.
First Character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the First Character Timeout is exceeded. See
First Character Timeout explanation above.

Parameter
Data Destination All V–memory
Fixed Length K1–128
Bits: Busy, Complete, C0–3777
Timeout Error, Overflow
AIN Fixed Length Examples
Fixed Length example when the PLC is reading the port continuously and timing is not critical
Fixed Length example when character to character timing is critical

AIN Variable Length Configuration:

Length Type: select Variable Length if the ASCII string length followed by termination
characters will vary in length
Port Number: must be DL06 port 2
(K2)
Data Destination: specifies where
the ASCII string will be placed in V–
memory
M aximum Variable Length:
specifies, in bytes, the maximum
length of a Variable Length ASCII
string the port will receive
Inter–character Timeout: if the
amount of time between incoming
ASCII characters exceeds the set
time, the Timeout Error bit will be
set. No data will be stored at the Data
Destination V–memory location.
The Timeout Error bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. 0ms
selection disables this feature.
First Character Timeout: if the amount of time from when the AIN is enabled to the time the
first character is received exceeds the set time, the specified First Character Timeout bit will
be set. The bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. 0ms selection
disables this feature.
Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte within each V–memory register of the Variable
Length ASCII string. See the SWAPB instruction for details.
Termination Code Length: consists of either 1 or 2 characters. Refer to Appendix G, ASCII
Table.
Busy Bit: is ON while the AIN instruction is receiving ASCII data
Complete Bit: is set once the ASCII data has been received up to the termination code
characters. It will be reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled.
Inter–character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the Character Timeout is exceeded. See
Character Timeout explanation above.
First Character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the First Character Timeout is exceeded. See
First Character Timeout explanation above.
Overflow Error Bit: is set when the ASCII data received exceeds the Maximum Variable
Length specified.

Parameter
Data Destination All V–memory
Fixed Length K1–128
Bits: Busy, Complete, C0–3777
Timeout Error, Overflow
AIN Variable Length Example
AIN variable length example used to read barcodes on boxes (PE = photoelectric sensor)

ASCII Find (AFIND)

DS Used The ASCII Find instruction locates a specific ASCII string or portion of an ASCII string within
HPP N/A a range of V–memory registers and places the string’s Found Index number (byte number
where desired string is found), in Hex, into a specified V–memory register. Other features
include, Search Starting Index number for skipping over unnecessary bytes before beginning
the FIND operation, Forward or Reverse direction search, and From Beginning and From End
selections to reference the Found Index Value.
Base Address: specifies the beginning V–memory register where the entire ASCII string is
stored in memory
Total Number of Bytes: specifies the total number of bytes to search for the desired ASCII
string
Search Starting Index: specifies which byte to skip to (with respect to the Base Address) before
beginning the search
Direction: Forward begins the search from lower numbered V–memory registers to higher
numbered V–memory registers. Reverse does the search from higher numbered V–memory
registers to lower numbered V–memory registers.
Found Index Value: specifies whether the Beginning or the End byte of the ASCII string found
will be loaded into the Found Index register
Found Index: specifies the V–memory register where the Found Index Value will be stored. A
value of FFFF will result if the desired string is not located in the memory registers specified.
Search for String: up to 128 characters.
Parameter DL06 Range

Base Address All V–memory
Total Number of Bytes All V–memory or K1–128
Search Starting Index All V–memory or K0–127
Found Index All V–memory

AFIND Search Example

In the following example, the AFIND instruction is used to search for the “day” portion
of “Friday” in the ASCII string “Today is Friday.”, which had previously been loaded into
V–memory. Note that a Search Starting Index of constant (K) 5 combined with a Forward
Direction Search is used to prevent finding the “day” portion of the word “Today”. The Found
Index will be placed into V4000.
ASCII Characters
HEX Equivalent
Base Address 0 T 54h Low

1 o High V3000
6Fh
Reverse Direction Search 2 d 64h Low
3 a High V3001
61h
4 y 79h Low
Search start Index Number V3002
5 20h High
6 i 69h Low
s High V3003
7 73h
8 20h Low V3004
Forward Direction Search
9 F 46h High
10 r 72h Low
V3005
11 i 69h High
Beginning Index Number 12 d 64h Low
V3006
13 a 61h High
End Index Number 14 y 79h Low
. V3007
15 2Eh High
Found Index Number = 0012 V4000

AFIND Example Combined with AEX Instruction

When an AIN instruction has executed, its Complete bit can be used to trigger an AFIND
instruction to search for a desired portion of the ASCII string. Once the string is found, the
AEX instruction can be used to extract the located string.
AIN Complete AFIND

C1
15
Base Address: V2001
Total Number of Bytes: K32
Search Starting Index: K0
Direction: Forward
Found Index Value: From Beginning
Found Index: V2200
Code 39
Give delay time for
AFIND instruction
to complete
C7
SET
Give delay time for
AFIND instruction
to complete Search string not found Data not found with
in table AFIND
C7 Kffff
V2200 C10
16 SET
Give delay time for

AFIND instruction
to complete
C7
RST
Give delay time for
AFIND instruction TMR
Data not found with
to complete AFIND Delay for
C7 C10 AFIND to complete
17 T0
K2
Delay time for
AFIND to complete AEX
18 T0
Source Base Address: V2001
Extract at Index: K0
Number of Bytes: K4
Shift ASCII Option: None
Byte Swap: All
Convert ASCII: To BCD (HEX)
Destination Base Address: V3000
Give delay time for
AFIND instruction
to complete
C7
RST

ASCII Extract (AEX)

DS Used The ASCII Extract instruction extracts a specified number of bytes of ASCII data from one
HPP N/A series of V–memory registers and places it into another series of V–memory registers. Other
features include, Extract at Index for skipping over unnecessary bytes before beginning the
Extract operation, Shift ASCII Option, for One Byte Left or One Byte Right, Byte Swap and
Convert data to a BCD format number.
Source Base Address: specifies the beginning V–memory register where the entire ASCII string
is stored in memory
Extract at Index: specifies which byte to skip to (with respect to the Source Base Address)
before extracting the data
Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to be extracted
Shift ASCII Option: shifts all extracted data one byte left or one byte right to displace
“unwanted” characters if necessary
Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and the low–byte within each V–memory register of the
extracted data. See the SWAPB instruction for details.
Convert BCD(Hex) ASCII to BCD (Hex): if enabled, this will convert ASCII numerical
characters to Hexadecimal numerical values
Destination Base Address: specifies the V–memory register where the extracted data will be
stored
See the previous page for an example using the AEX instruction.

Source Base Address All V–memory
Extract at Index All V–memory or K0–127
Number of Bytes Constant range: V-memory location
“Convert BCD (HEX) ASCII” K1–128 containing BCD value:
not checked 1–128
Number of Bytes Constant range: V-memory location
“Convert BCD (HEX) ASCII” K1–4 containing BCD value:
checked 1–4
Destination Base All V–memory
Address

ASCII Compare (CMPV)

DS Used The ASCII Compare instruction compares
HPP N/A two groups of V–memory registers. The
CMPV will compare any data type (ASCII
to ASCII, BCD to BCD, etc.) of one series
(group) of V–memory registers to another
series of V–memory registers for a specified
byte length.
“Compare from” Starting Address: specifies
the beginning V–memory register of the SP61 = 1, the result is equal
first group of V–memory registers to be SP61 = 0, the result is not equal
compared from.
“Compare to” Starting Address: specifies the beginning V–memory register of the second group
of V–memory registers to be compared to.
Number of Bytes: specifies the length of each V–memory group to be compared

Compare from Starting Address All V–memory
Compare to Starting Address All V–memory
Number of Bytes K0–127
CMPV Example
The CMPV instruction executes when the AIN instruction is complete. If the compared V–
memory tables are equal, SP61 will turn ON.
AIN Complete
C1
CMPV
"Compare from" Starting Address: V2001

"Compare to" Starting Address: V10001
Number of Bytes: K32
Strings are equal

SP61 C11
OUT

ASCII Print to V–memory (VPRINT)

DS Used The ASCII Print to V–memory
HPP N/A instruction will write a specified ASCII
string into a series of V–memory
registers. Other features include Byte
Swap, options to suppress or convert
leading zeros or spaces, and _Date and
_Time options for U.S., European, and
Asian date formats and 12 or 24 hour
time formats.
Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and
low–byte within each V–memory
register the ASCII string is printed to.
See the SWAPB instruction for details.
Print to Starting V–memory Address:
specifies the beginning of a series of
V–memory addresses where the ASCII
string will be placed by the VPRINT
instruction.
Starting V–memory Address: the
first V–memory register of the series
of registers specified will contain the
ASCII string’s length in bytes.
tarting V–memory Address +1: the 2nd and subsequent registers will contain the ASCII
S
string printed to V–memory.

Print to Starting V–memory Address All V–memory
VPRINT Time/Date Stamping– the codes in the table below can be used in the VPRINT
ASCII string message to “print to V–memory” the current time and/or date.
# Character code Date / Time Stamp Options

1 _date:us American standard (month/day/2 digit year)
2 _date:e European standard (day/month/2 digit year)
3 _date:a Asian standard (2 digit year/month/day)
4 _time:12 Standard 12 hour clock (0–12 hour:min am/pm)
5 _time:24 Standard 24 hour clock (0–23 hour:min am/pm)

VPRINT V-memory element – the following modifiers can be used in the VPRINT ASCII
string message to “print to V–memory” register contents in integer format or real format. Use
V-memory number or V-memory number with “:” and data type. The data types are shown in
the table below. The Character code must be capital letters.
NOTE: There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to separate it from the text
string. Failure to do this will result in an error code 499.

1 none 16-bit binary (decimal number)
2 :B 4 digit BCD
3 :D 32-bit binary (decimal number)
4 :DB 8 digit BCD
5 :R Floating point number (real number)
6 :E Floating point number (real number with exponent)
Examples:
V2000 Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number
V2000 : B Print BCD data in V2000
V2000 : D Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number
V2000 : D B Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001
V2000 : R Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number
V2000 : E Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number with exponent
The following modifiers can be added to any of the modifies above to suppress or convert
leading zeros or spaces. The character code must be capital letters.
1 S Suppresses leading spaces
2 C0 Converts leading spaces to zeros
3 0 Suppresses leading zeros
Example with V2000 = 0018 (binary format)

V–memory Register Number of Characters
with Modifier 1 2 3 4
V2000 0 0 1 8
V2000:B 0 0 1 2
V2000:B0 1 2
Example with V2000 = sp sp18 (binary format) where sp = space

V–memory Register Number of Characters
with Modifier 1 2 3 4
V2000 sp sp 1 8
V2000:B sp sp 1 2
V2000:BS 1 2
V2000:BC0 0 0 1 2

VPRINT V-memory text element – the following is used for “printing to V–memory” text
stored in registers. Use the % followed by the number of characters after V-memory number
for representing the text. If you assign “0” as the number of characters, the function will read
the character count from the first location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location and
read that number of ASCII codes for the text from memory.
Example:
V2000 % 16 16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed.
V2000 % 0 The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number in V2000) will be
printed.
VPRINT Bit element – the following is used for “printing to V–memory” the state of the
designated bit in V-memory or a control relay bit. The bit element can be assigned by the
designating point (.) and bit number preceded by the V-memory number or relay number. The
output type is described as shown in the table below.
# Data format Description
1 none Print 1 for an ON state, and 0 for an OFF state
2 : BOOL Print “TRUE” for an ON state, and “FALSE” for an OFF state
3 : ONOFF Print “ON” for an ON state, and “OFF” for an OFF state
Example:
V2000 . 15 Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000, in 1/0 format
C100 Prints the status of C100 in 1/0 format
C100 : BOOL Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format
C100 : ON/OFF Prints the status of C100 in ON/OFF format
V2000.15 : BOOL Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format
The maximum numbers of characters you can VPRINT is 128. The number of characters
required for each element, regardless of whether the :S, :C0 or :0 modifiers are used, is listed
in the table below.
Maximum
Element type Characters
Text, 1 character 1
16 bit binary 6
32 bit binary 11
4 digit BCD 4
8 digit BCD 8
Floating point (real number) 3
Floating point (real with exponent) 13
V-memory/text 2
Bit (1/0 format) 1
Bit (TRUE/FALSE format) 5
Bit (ON/OFF format) 3

Text element – the following is used for “printing to V–memory” character strings. The
character strings are defined as the character (more than 0) ranged by the double quotation
marks. Two hex numbers preceded by the dollar sign means an 8-bit ASCII character code.
Also, two characters preceded by the dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table:

1 $$ Dollar sign ($)
2 $” Double quotation (”)
3 $Lor $l Line feed (LF)
4 $N or $n Carriage return line feed (CRLF)
5 $P or $p Form feed
6 $R or $r Carriage return (CR)
7 $T or $t Tab
The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the
printer.
”” Length 0 without character

”A” Length 1 with character A
” ” Length 1 with blank
” $” ” Length 1 with double quotation mark
”$R$L” Length 2 with one CR and one LF
”$0D$0A” Length 2 with one CR and one LF
”$$” Length 1 with one $ mark
In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks before and
after the text string. Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print instruction contains
invalid text or no quotations. It is important to test your VPRINT instruction data during the
application development.

VPRINT Example Combined with PRINTV Instruction
The VPRINT instruction is used to create a string in V–memory. The PRINTV is used to print the string out
of port 2.
Create String Permissive

C12 VPRINT
28 Byte Swap: All
"Print to" Address V4000
"STX" V3000:B"$0D"
Delay permissive for

VPRINT
C13
SET
Delay permissive for
VPRINT
C13 TMR
29
Delay for VPRINT
to complete
T1
Delay for Vprint to K10

complete
T1 PRINTV
30 Port Number: K2
Start Address: V4001
Number of Bytes: V4000
Append: None
Byte Swap: None
Busy: C15
Complete: C16
Delay Permissive for

VPRINT
C13
RST

ASCII Print from V–memory (PRINTV)

DS Used The ASCII Print from V–memory instruction will send an ASCII string out of the designated
HPP N/A communications port from a specified series of V–memory registers for a specified length in
number of bytes. Other features include user specified Append Characters to be placed after the
desired data string for devices that require specific termination character(s), Byte Swap options,
and user specified flags for Busy and Complete.
ort Number: must be DL06 port 2 (K2)
P
Start Address: specifies the beginning of
series of V–memory registers that contain
the ASCII string to print
Number of Bytes: specifies the length of
the string to print
Append Characters: specifies ASCII
characters to be added to the end of the
string for devices that require specific
termination characters
Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–
byte within each V–memory register of
the string while printing. See the SWAPB
instruction for details.
Busy Bit: will be ON while the instruction
is printing ASCII data
Complete Bit: will be set once the ASCII
data has been printed and reset when the
PRINTV instruction permissive bits are
disabled.
See the previous page for an example using the PRINTV instruction.

Port Number Port 2 (K2)
Start Address All V–memory
Number of Bytes All V–memory or k1–128
Bits: Busy, Complete C0–3777

ASCII Swap Bytes (SWAPB)

DS Used The ASCII Swap Bytes instruction swaps byte positions (high–byte to low–byte and low–byte
HPP N/A to high–byte) within each V–memory register of a series of V–memory registers for a specified
number of bytes.
• Starting Address: specifies the beginning
of a series of V–memory registers the
instruction will use to begin byte swapping
• Number of Bytes: specifies the
number of bytes, beginning with the
Starting Address, to byte swap.
• Byte Swap: All - swap all bytes specified.
All but null - swap all bytes specified
except the bytes with a null

Starting Address All V–memory
Number of Bytes All V–memory or K1–128

SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.
SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.
Byte Swap Preferences Byte

No Byte Swapping High Low
(AIN, AEX, PRINTV, VPRINT)
V2477 0005h
A B C D E xx V2500 B A
V2501 D C
V2502 xx E
Byte Swap All Byte
High Low
A B C D E xx
V2477 0005h
V2500 A B
V2501
C D
B A D C xx E V2502
E xx
Byte Swap All but Null Byte

High Low
A B C D E xx
V2477 0005h
V2500 B A
V2501 D C
B A D C E xx V2502 xx E

SWAPB Example
The AIN Complete bit is used to trigger the SWAPB instruction. Use a one–shot so the
SWAPB only executes once.
ASCII Clear Buffer (ACRB)

DS Used The ASCII Clear Buffer instruction will clear the ASCII receive buffer of the specified
HPP N/A communications port number. Port Number: must be DL06 port 2 (K2)
ACRB Example
The AIN Complete bit or the AIN diagnostic bits are used to clear the ASCII buffer.

This page intentionally left blank.

Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions

The Intelligent Box Instructions (IBox) listed in this section are additional instructions made
available when using DirectSOFT to program your DL06 PLC (the DL06 CPU requires
firmware version v2.10 or later to use the new features in DirectSOFT). For more information
on DirectSOFT and to download a free demo version, please visit our Web site at: www.
automationdirect.com.
Analog Helper IBoxes
Instruction Ibox # Page
Analog Input / Output Combo Module Pointer Setup (ANLGCMB) IB-462 5-232
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup (ANLGIN) IB-460 5-234
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup (ANLGOUT) IB-461 5-236
Analog Scale 12 Bit BCD to BCD (ANSCL) IB-423 5-238
Analog Scale 12 Bit Binary to Binary (ANSCLB) IB-403 5-239
Filter Over Time - BCD (FILTER) IB-422 5-240
Filter Over Time - Binary (FILTERB) IB-402 5-242
Hi/Low Alarm - BCD (HILOAL) IB-421 5-244
Hi/Low Alarm - Binary (HILOALB) IB-401 5-246
Discrete Helper IBoxes

Off Delay Timer (OFFDTMR) IB-302 5-248
On Delay Timer (ONDTMR) IB-301 5-250
One Shot (ONESHOT) IB-303 5-252
Push On / Push Off Circuit (PONOFF) IB-300 5-253
Memory IBoxes
Move Single Word (MOVEW) IB-200 5-254
Move Double Word (MOVED) IB-201 5-255
Math IBoxes
BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTOR) IB-560 5-256
Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTORD) IB-562 5-257
Math - BCD (MATHBCD) IB-521 5-258
Math - Binary (MATHBIN) IB-501 5-260
Math - Real (MATHR) IB-541 5-262
Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCD) IB-561 5-263
Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCDD) IB-563 5-264
Square BCD (SQUARE) IB-523 5-265
Square Binary (SQUAREB) IB-503 5-266
Square Real(SQUARER) IB-543 5-267
Sum BCD Numbers (SUMBCD) IB-522 5-268
Sum Binary Numbers (SUMBIN) IB-502 5-269
Sum Real Numbers (SUMR) IB-542 5-270

Communication IBoxes
ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) IB-710 5-272
ECOM100 Disable DHCP (ECDHCPD) IB-736 5-274
ECOM100 Enable DHCP (ECDHCPE) IB-735 5-276
ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting (ECDHCPQ) IB-734 5-278
ECOM100 Send E-mail (ECEMAIL) IB-711 5-280
ECOM100 Restore Default E-mail Setup (ECEMRDS) IB-713 5-283
ECOM100 E-mail Setup (ECEMSUP) IB-712 5-286
ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IB-717 5-290
ECOM100 Read Description (ECRDDES) IB-726 5-292
ECOM100 Read Gateway Address (ECRDGWA) IB-730 5-294
ECOM100 Read IP Address (ECRDIP) IB-722 5-296
ECOM100 Read Module ID (ECRDMID) IB-720 5-298
ECOM100 Read Module Name (ECRDNAM) IB-724 5-300
ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask (ECRDSNM) IB-732 5-302
ECOM100 Write Description (ECWRDES) IB-727 5-304
ECOM100 Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA) IB-731 5-306
ECOM100 Write IP Address (ECWRIP) IB-723 5-308
ECOM100 Write Module ID (ECWRMID) IB-721 5-310
ECOM100 Write Name (ECWRNAM) IB-725 5-312
ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM) IB-733 5-314
ECOM100 RX Network Read (ECRX) IB-740 5-316
ECOM100 WX Network Write(ECWX) IB-741 5-319
NETCFG Network Configuration (NETCFG) IB-700 5-322
Network RX Read (NETRX) IB-701 5-324
Network WX Write (NETWX) IB-702 5-327
Counter I/O IBoxes (Works with H0-CTRIO and H0-CTRIO2)

CTRIO Configuration (CTRIO) IB-1000 5-330
CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table (CTRADPT) IB-1005 5-332
CTRIO Clear Preset Table (CTRCLRT) IB-1007 5-335
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (CTREDPT) IB-1003 5-338
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (CTREDRL) IB-1002 5-342
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINPT) IB-1004 5-346
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINTR) IB-1010 5-350
CTRIO Load Profile (CTRLDPR) IB-1001 5-354
CTRIO Read Error (CTRRDER) IB-1014 5-357
CTRIO Run to Limit Mode (CTRRTLM) IB-1011 5-359
CTRIO Run to Position Mode (CTRRTPM) IB-1012 5-362
CTRIO Velocity Mode (CTRVELO) IB-1013 5-365
CTRIO Write File to ROM (CTRWFTR) IB-1006 5-368

Analog Input/Output Combo Module Pointer Setup (ANLGCMB) (IB-462)

DS Used The Analog Input/Output Combo Module Pointer Setup instruction generates the logic to
HPP N/A configure the pointer method for an analog input/output combination module on the first
PLC scan following a Program to Run transition.
The ANLGCMB IBox instruction
determines the data format and Pointer
addresses based on the CPU type, the
Base# and the module Slot#.
The Input Data Address is the starting
location in user V-memory where the
analog input data values will be stored,
one location for each input channel
enabled.
The Output Data Address is the starting
analog output data values will be placed
by ladder code or external device,
one location for each output channel
enabled
Since the IBox logic only executes on the first scan, the instruction cannot have any input logic.
ANLGCMB Parameters
• Base # (K0-Local): must be 0 for DL06 PLC
• Slot #: specifies which PLC option slot is occupied by the analog module (1–4)
• Number of Input Channels: specifies the number of analog input channels to scan
• Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the analog input data format (BCD
or Binary) - the binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels
• Input Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location
that will be used to store the analog input data
• Number of Output Channels: specifies the number of
analog output channels that will be used
• Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the format
of the analog output data (BCD or Binary)
• Output Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location
that will be used to source the analog output data
Base # (K0-Local) K K0 (local base only)
Slot # K K1-4
Number of Input Channels K K1-8
Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) K BCD: K0; Binary: K1
Input Data Address V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Number of Output Channels K K1-8
Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) K BCD: K0; Binary: K1
Output Data Address V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ANLGCMB Example
In the following example, the ANLGCMB instruction is used to setup the pointer method for
an analog I/O combination module that is installed in option slot 2. Four input channels are
enabled and the analog data will be written to V2000 - V2003 in BCD format. Two output
channels are enabled and the analog values will be read from V2100 - V2101 in BCD format.
Permissive contacts or input

logic cannot be used with this
instruction.

Analog Input Module Pointer Setup (ANLGIN) (IB-460)

DS Used Analog Input Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to configure the pointer method for
HPP N/A one analog input module on the first PLC scan following a Program to Run transition.
This IBox determines the data format and Pointer addresses based on the CPU type, the Base#,
and the Slot#.
The Input Data Address is the starting
analog input data values will be stored,
one location for each input channel
enabled.
Since this logic only executes on the
first scan, this IBox cannot have any
input logic.
ANLGIN Parameters
• Number of Input Channels: specifies the number of input channels to scan
• Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the analog input data format (BCD or
Binary) - the binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels
• Input Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location
that will be used to store the analog input data

Slot # K K1-4
Number of Input Channels K K1-8
Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) K BCD: K0; Binary: K1
Input Data Address V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ANLGIN Example
In the following example, the ANLGIN instruction is used to setup the pointer method for an
analog input module that is installed in option slot 1. Eight input channels are enabled and the
analog data will be written to V2000 - V2007 in BCD format.
Permissive contacts or input logic

cannot be used with this instruction.

Analog Output Module Pointer Setup (ANLGOUT) (IB-461)

DS Used Analog Output Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to configure the pointer method for
HPP N/A one analog output module on the first PLC scan following a Program to Run transition.
This IBox determines the data format
and Pointer addresses based on the
CPU type, the Base#, and the Slot#.
The Output Data Address is the
starting location in user V-memory
where the analog output data values
will be placed by ladder code or
external device, one location for each
output channel enabled.
Since this logic only executes on the
first scan, this IBox cannot have any
input logic.
ANLGOUT Parameters
• Number of Output Channels: specifies the number of
analog output channels that will be used
• Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the format
of the analog output data (BCD or Binary)
• Output Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location
that will be used to source the analog output data

Slot # K K1-4
Number of Output Channels K K1-8
Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) K BCD: K0; Binary: K1
Output Data Address V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ANLGOUT Example
In the following example, the ANLGOUT instruction is used to setup the pointer method for
an analog output module that is installed in option slot 3. Two output channels are enabled
and the analog data will be read from V2100 - V2101 in BCD format.
Permissive contacts or input logic cannot

be used with this instruction.

Analog Scale 12 Bit BCD to BCD (ANSCL) (IB-423)

DS Used Analog Scale 12 Bit BCD to BCD scales a 12
HPP N/A bit BCD analog value (0-4095 BCD) into BCD
engineering units. You specify the engineering
unit high value (when raw is 4095), and the
engineering low value (when raw is 0), and
the output V-Memory address you want the
to place the scaled engineering unit value. The
engineering units are generated as BCD and can
be the full range of 0 to 9999 (see ANSCLB -
Analog Scale 12 Bit Binary to Binary if your raw
units are in Binary format).
NOTE: This IBox only works with unipolar unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with bipolar or sign plus
magnitude raw values.
ANSCL Parameters
• Raw (0-4095 BCD): specifies the V-memory location of the unipolar unsigned raw 0-4095 unscaled
value
• High Engineering: specifies the high engineering value when the raw input is 4095
• Low Engineering: specifies the low engineering value when the raw input is 0
• Engineering (BCD): specifies the V-memory location where the scaled engineering BCD value will
be placed

Raw (0-4095 BCD) V,P See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
High Engineering K K0-9999
Low Engineering K K0-9999
Engineering (BCD) V,P See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
ANSCL Example
In the following example, the ANSCL instruction is used to scale a raw value (0-4095 BCD)
that is in V2000. The engineering scaling range is set 0-100 (low engineering value - high
engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V2100 in BCD format.

Analog Scale 12 Bit Binary to Binary (ANSCLB) (IB-403)

DS Used Analog Scale 12 Bit Binary to Binary scales a 12
HPP N/A bit binary analog value (0-4095 decimal) into
binary (decimal) engineering units. You specify
the engineering unit high value (when raw is
4095), and the engineering low value (when raw
is 0), and the output V-Memory address you
want to place the scaled engineering unit value.
The engineering units are generated as binary
and can be the full range of 0 to 65535 (see
ANSCL - Analog Scale 12 Bit BCD to BCD if
your raw units are in BCD format).
NOTE: This IBox only works with unipolar unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with
bipolar, sign plus magnitude, or signed 2’s complement raw values.
ANSCLB Parameters
• Raw (12 bit binary): specifies the V-memory location of the unipolar
unsigned raw decimal unscaled value (12 bit binary = 0-4095 decimal)
• High Engineering: specifies the high engineering value
when the raw input is 4095 decimal
• Low Engineering: specifies the low engineering value when the raw input is 0 decimal
• Engineering (binary): specifies the V-memory location where
the scaled engineering decimal value will be placed

Raw (12 bit binary) V,P See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
High Engineering K K0-65535
Low Engineering K K0-65535
Engineering (binary) V,P See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
ANSCLB Example
In the following example, the ANSCLB instruction is used to scale a raw value (0-4095 binary)
that is in V2000. The engineering scaling range is set 0-1000 (low engineering value - high
engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V2100 in binary format.

Filter Over Time - BCD (FILTER) (IB-422)

DS Used Filter Over Time BCD will perform a first-order filter on the Raw Data on a defined time
HPP N/A interval. The equation is:
New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / FDC] where,
New: New Filtered Value
Old: Old Filtered Value
FDC: Filter Divisor Constant
Raw: Raw Data
The Filter Divisor Constant is an integer in the

range K1 to K100, such that if it equaled K1 then no filtering would be done.
The rate at which the calculation is performed is specified by time in hundredths of a
second (0.01 seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is
embedded in the IBox and must NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Power flow
controls whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated.
On the first scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to 0 to give the
calculation a consistent starting point.
FILTER Parameters
• Filter Frequency Timer: specifies the Timer (T) number which is used by the Filter
instruction
• Filter Frequency Time (0.01sec): specifies the rate at which the calculation is performed
• Raw Data (BCD): specifies the V-memory location of the raw unfiltered BCD value
• Filter Divisor (1-100): this constant used to control the filtering effect. A larger value will
increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1 results with no filtering.
• Filtered Value (BCD): specifies the V-memory location where the filtered BCD value will
be placed
Filter Frequency Timer T T0-377
Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) K K0-9999
Raw Data (BCD) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Filter Divisor (1-100) K K1-100
Filtered Value (BCD) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

FILTER Example
In the following example, the Filter instruction is used to filter a BCD value that is in V2000.
Timer(T0) is set to 0.5 sec, the rate at which the filter calculation will be performed. The filter
constant is set to 2. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1
results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V2100.

Filter Over Time - Binary (FILTERB) (IB-402)

DS Used Filter Over Time in Binary (decimal) will perform a first-order filter on the Raw Data on a
HPP N/A defined time interval. The equation is
New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / FDC] where
New: New Filtered Value
Old: Old Filtered Value
FDC: Filter Divisor Constant
Raw: Raw Data
The Filter Divisor Constant is an integer in the range K1 to K100, such that if it equaled K1
then no filtering would be done.
The rate at which the calculation is performed is specified by time in hundredths of a second
(0.01 seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is embedded
in the IBox and must NOT be used any other place in your program. Power flow controls
whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated. On the first
scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to 0 to give the calculation a
consistent starting point.
FILTERB Parameters
• Filter Frequency Timer: specifies the Timer (T) number which is used by the Filter
instruction
• Filter Frequency Time (0.01sec): specifies the rate at which the calculation is performed
• Raw Data (Binary): specifies the V-memory location of the raw unfiltered binary (decimal)
value
• Filter Divisor (1-100): this constant used to control the filtering effect. A larger value will
increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1 results with no filtering.
• Filtered Value (Binary): specifies the V-memory location where the filtered binary (decimal)
value will be placed
Filter Frequency Timer T T0-377
Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) K K0-9999
Raw Data (Binary) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Filter Divisor (1-100) K K1-100
Filtered Value (Binary) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

FILTERB Example
In the following example, the FILTERB instruction is used to filter a binary value that is in
V2000. Timer (T1) is set to 0.5 sec, the rate at which the filter calculation will be performed.
The filter constant is set to 3.0. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A
value of 1 results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V2100

Hi/Low Alarm - BCD (HILOAL) (IB-421)

DS Used Hi/Low Alarm - BCD monitors a BCD value V-Memory location and sets four possible
HPP N/A alarm states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the IBox has power flow.
You enter the alarm thresholds as constant K BCD values (K0-K9999) and/or BCD value
V-Memory locations.
You must ensure that threshold limits are valid,
that is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when the
High-High or Low-Low alarm condition is true,
that the High and Low alarms will also be set,
respectively. This means you may use the same
threshold limit and same alarm bit for the High-
High and the High alarms in case you only need
one “High” alarm. Also note that the boundary
conditions are inclusive. That is, if the Low
boundary is K50, and the Low-Low boundary
is K10, and if the Monitoring Value equals 10,
then the Low Alarm AND the Low-Low alarm
will both be ON. If there is no power flow to the IBox, then all alarm bits will be turned off
regardless of the value of the Monitoring Value parameter.
HILOAL Parameters
• Monitoring Value (BCD): specifies the V-memory location of the BCD value to be
monitored
• High-High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high-high alarm limit
• High-High Alarm: On when the high-high limit is reached
• High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high alarm limit
• High Alarm: On when the high limit is reached
• Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low alarm limit
• Low Alarm: On when the low limit is reached
• Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low-low alarm limit
• Low-Low Alarm: On when the low-low limit is reached

Monitoring Value (BCD) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
High-High Limit V, K K0-9999; or see DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
High-High Alarm X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL06 V-memory map
High Limit V, K K0-9999; or see DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
High Alarm X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL06 V-memory map
Low Limit V, K K0-9999; or see DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Low Alarm X, Y, C, GX,GY,B See DL06 V-memory map
Low-Low Limit V, K K0-9999; or see DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Low-Low Alarm X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL06 V-memory map

HILOAL Example
In the following example, the HILOAL instruction is used to monitor a BCD value that is in
V2000. If the value in V2000 meets/exceeds the high limit of K900, C101 will turn on. If the
value continues to increase to meet/exceed the high-high limit, C100 will turn on. Both bits
would be on in this case. The high and high-high limits and alarms can be set to the same value
if one “high” limit or alarm is desired to be used.
If the value in V2000 meets or falls below the low limit of K200, C102 will turn on. If the value
continues to decrease to meet or fall below the low-low limit of K100, C103 will turn on. Both
bits would be on in this case. The low and low-low limits and alarms can be set to the same
value if one “low” limit or alarm is desired to be used.

Hi/Low Alarm - Binary (HILOALB) (IB-401)

DS Used Hi/Low Alarm - Binary monitors a binary (decimal) V-Memory location and sets four possible
HPP N/A alarm states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the IBox has power flow. You
enter the alarm thresholds as constant K decimal values (K0-K65535) and/or binary (decimal)
V-Memory locations.
You must ensure that threshold limits are valid,
that is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when
the High-High or Low-Low alarm condition is
true, that the High and Low alarms will also be
set, respectively. This means you may use the
same threshold limit and same alarm bit for the
High-High and the High alarms in case you
only need one “High” alarm. Also note that the
boundary conditions are inclusive. That is, if
the Low boundary is K50, and the Low-Low
boundary is K10, and if the Monitoring Value
equals 10, then the Low Alarm AND the
Low-Low alarm will both be ON. If there is no power flow to the IBox, then all alarm bits will
be turned off regardless of the value of the Monitoring Value parameter.
HILOALB Parameters
• Monitoring Value (Binary): specifies the V-memory location of the Binary value to be
monitored
• High-High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high-high alarm limit
• High-High Alarm: On when the high-high limit is reached
• High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high alarm limit
• High Alarm: On when the high limit is reached
• Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low alarm limit
• Low Alarm: On when the low limit is reached
• Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low-low alarm limit
• Low-Low Alarm: On when the low-low limit is reached

Monitoring Value (Binary) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
High-High Limit V, K K0-65535; or see DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
High-High Alarm X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL06 V-memory map
High Limit V, K K0-65535; or see DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
High Alarm X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL06 V-memory map
Low Limit V, K K0-65535; or see DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Low Alarm X, Y, C, GX,GY,B See DL06 V-memory map
Low-Low Limit V, K K0-65535; or see DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Low-Low Alarm X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL06 V-memory map

HILOALB Example
In the following example, the HILOALB instruction is used to monitor a binary value that is
in V2000. If the value in V2000 meets/exceeds the high limit of the binary value in V2011,
C101 will turn on. If the value continues to increase to meet/exceed the high-high limit value
in V2010, C100 will turn on. Both bits would be on in this case. The high and high-high
limits and alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one “high” limit or alarm
is desired to be used.
If the value in V2000 meets or falls below the low limit of the binary value in V2012, C102
will turn on. If the value continues to decrease to meet or fall below the low-low limit in
V2013, C103 will turn on. Both bits would be on in this case. The low and low-low limits
and alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one “low” limit or alarm is
desired to be used.

Off Delay Timer (OFFDTMR) (IB-

DS Used 302)
HPP N/A Off Delay Timer will delay the “turning off”
of the Output parameter by the specified Off
Delay Time (in hundredths of a second) based
on the power flow into the IBox. Once the
IBox receives power, the Output bit will turn on
immediately. When the power flow to the IBox
turns off, the Output bit WILL REMAIN ON
for the specified amount of time (in hundredths
of a second).
Once the Off Delay Time has expired, the output will turn Off. If the power flow to the IBox
comes back on BEFORE the Off Delay Time, then the timer is RESET and the Output will
remain On - so you must continuously have NO power flow to the IBox for AT LEAST the
specified Off Delay Time before the Output will turn Off.
This IBox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF), which cannot be used anywhere else in your
program.
OFFDTMR Parameters
• Timer Number: specifies the Timer(TMRF) number which is used by the OFFDTMR
instruction
• Off Delay Time (0.01 sec): specifies how long the Output will remain on once power flow
to the Ibox is removed
• Output: specifies the output that will be delayed “turning off ” by the Off Delay Time.

Timer Number T T0-377
Off Delay Time K,V K0-9999; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Output X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL06 V-memory map

OFFDTMR Example
In the following example, the OFFDTMR instruction is used to delay the “turning off”of
output C20. Timer 2 (T2) is set to 5 seconds, the “off-delay” period.
When C100 turns on, C20 turns on and will remain on while C100 is on. When C100 turns
off, C20 will remain for the specified Off Delay Time (5s), and then turn off.
Example timing diagram
C100
5 sec 5 sec
C20

On Delay Timer (ONDTMR) (IB-301)

DS Used On Delay Timer will delay the “turning on”
HPP N/A of the Output parameter by the specified
amount of time (in hundredths of a second)
based on the power flow into the IBox. Once
the IBox loses power, the Output is turned
off immediately. If the power flow turns off
BEFORE the On Delay Time, then the timer
is RESET and the Output is never turned
on, so you must have continuous power
flow to the IBox for at least the specified On
Delay Time before the Output turns On.
This IBox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF), which cannot be used anywhere else in your
program.
ONDTMR Parameters
• Timer Number: specifies the Timer(TMRF) number which is used by the ONDTMR
instruction
• On Delay Time (0.01sec): specifies how long the Output will remain off once power flow
to the Ibox is applied.
• Output: specifies the output that will be delayed “turning on” by the On Delay Time.

Timer Number T T0-377
On Delay Time K,V K0-9999; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Output X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL06 V-memory map

ONDTMR Example
In the following example, the ONDTMR instruction is used to delay the “turning on” of
output C21. Timer 1 (T1) is set to 2 seconds, the “on-delay” period.
When C101 turns on, C21 is delayed turning on by 2 seconds. When C101 turns off, C21
turns off immediately.
C101
2 sec 2 sec
C21

One Shot (ONESHOT) (IB-303)

DS Used One Shot will turn on the given bit output parameter for one scan on an OFF to ON transition
HPP N/A of the power flow into the IBox. This IBox is simply a different name for the PD Coil (Positive
Differential).
ONESHOT Parameters
• Discrete Output: specifies the output
that will be on for one scan

Discrete Output X, Y, C See DL06 V-memory map
ONESHOT Example
In the following example, the ONESHOT instruction is used to turn C100 on for one PLC
scan after C0 goes from an off to on transition. The input logic must produce an off to on
transition to execute the One Shot instruction.
C0
Scan time
C100

Push On / Push Off Circuit (PONOFF) (IB-300)

DS Used Push On/Push Off Circuit toggles an output state whenever its input power flow transitions
HPP N/A from off to on. Requires an extra bit parameter for scan-to-scan state information. This extra
bit must NOT be used anywhere else in the program. This is also known as a “flip-flop circuit”.
The PONOFF IBox cannot have any input
logic.
PONOFF Parameters
• Discrete Input: specifies the input that
will toggle the specified output
• Discrete Output: specifies the output that
will be “turned on/off ” or toggled
• Internal State: specifies a work bit that is
used by the instruction

Discrete Input X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,SP,B,PB See DL06 V-memory map
Discrete Output X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL06 V-memory map
Internal State X, Y, C See DL06 V-memory map
PONOFF Example
In the following example, the PONOFF instruction is used to control the on and off states of
the output C20 with a single input C10. When C10 is pressed once, C20 turns on. When C10
is pressed again, C20 turns off. C100 is an internal bit used by the instruction.
Permissive contacts or input logic are not

used with this instruction.

Move Single Word (MOVEW) (IB-200)

DS Used Move Single Word moves (copies) a word to a memory location directly or indirectly via a
HPP N/A pointer, either as a HEX constant, from a memory location, or indirectly through a pointer
MOVEW Parameters
• From WORD: specifies the word that
will be moved to another location
• To WORD: specifies the location where
the “From WORD” will be move to

From WORD V,P,K K0-FFFF; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
To WORD V,P See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
MOVEW Example
In the following example, the MOVEW instruction is used to move 16-bits of data from
V2000 to V3000 when C100 turns on.

Move Double Word (MOVED) (IB-201)

DS Used Move Double Word moves (copies) a double word to two consecutive memory locations
HPP N/A directly or indirectly via a pointer, either as a double HEX constant, from a double memory
location, or indirectly through a pointer to a double memory location.
MOVED Parameters
• From DWORD: specifies the double word
that will be moved to another location
• To DWORD: specifies the location where
the “From DWORD” will be move to

From DWORD V,P,K K0-FFFFFFFF; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
To DWORD V,P See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
MOVED Example
In the following example, the MOVED instruction is used to move 32-bits of data from V2000
and V2001 to V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.

BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTOR) (IB-560)

DS Used BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point converts the given 4 digit WORD BCD value to a
HPP N/A Real number, with the implied number of decimal points (K0-K4).
For example, BCDTOR K1234 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K1, would
yield R123.4
BCDTOR Parameters
• Value (WORD BCD): specifies the word or constant that will be converted to a Real
number
• Number of Decimal Points: specifies the number of implied decimal points in the Result
DWORD
• Result (DWORD REAL): specifies the location where the Real number will be placed

Value (WORD BCD) V,P,K K0-9999; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Number of Decimal Points K K0-4
Result (DWORD REAL) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
BCDTOR Example
In the following example, the BCDTOR instruction is used to convert the 16-bit data in
V2000 from a 4-digit BCD data format to a 32-bit REAL (floating point) data format and
stored into V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.
K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two digits to the right of the
decimal point.

Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTORD) (IB-562)

DS Used Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point converts the given 8 digit DWORD BCD
HPP N/A value to a Real number, given an implied number of decimal points (K0-K8).
For example, BCDTORD K12345678 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K5,
would yield R123.45678
BCDTORD Parameters
• Value (DWORD BCD): specifies the Dword or constant that will be converted to a Real
number
DWORD
• Result (DWORD REAL): specifies the location where the Real number will be placed

Value (DWORD BCD) V,P,K K0-99999999; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (DWORD REAL) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
BCDTORD Example
In the following example, the BCDTORD instruction is used to convert the 32-bit data in
V2000 from an 8-digit BCD data format to a 32-bit REAL (floating point) data format and
stored into V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.
K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two digits to the right of the
decimal point.

Math - BCD (MATHBCD) (IB-521)

DS Used Math - BCD Format lets you enter complex mathematical expressions like you would in
HPP N/A Visual Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4 levels
deep. In addition to + - * /, you can do Modulo (% aka Remainder), Bit-wise And (&) Or
(|) Xor (^), and some BCD functions - Convert to BCD (BCD), Convert to Binary (BIN),
BCD Complement (BCDCPL), Convert from Gray Code (GRAY), Invert Bits (INV), and
BCD/HEX to Seven Segment Display (SEG).
Example: ((V2000 + V2001) / (V2003 - K100)) *
GRAY(V3000 & K001F)
Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single word BCD formatted value. Intermediate
results can go up to 32 bit values, but as long as the final result fits in a 16 bit BCD word,
the calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V2000
* K1000) / K4095. The multiply term most likely will exceed 9999 but fits within 32 bits.
The divide operation will divide 4095 into the 32-bit accumulator, yielding a result that will
always fit in 16 bits.
You can reference binary V-memory values by using the BCD conversion function on a
V-Memory location but NOT an expression. That is BCD(V2000) is okay and will convert
V2000 from Binary to BCD, but BCD(V2000 + V3000) will add V2000 as BCD, to V3000
as BCD, then interpret the result as Binary and convert it to BCD - NOT GOOD.
Also, the final result is a 16 bit BCD number and so you could do BIN around the entire
operation to store the result as Binary.
MATHBCD Parameters
• WORD Result: specifies the location where the BCD result of the mathematical
expression will be placed (result must fit into 16 bit single V-memory location)
• Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed
and the result is stored in specified WORD Result. Each V-memory
location used in the expression must be in BCD format.

WORD Result V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Expression Text

MATHBCD Example
In the following example, the MATHBCD instruction is used to calculate the math expression
which multiplies the BCD value in V1200 by 1000 then divides by 4095 and loads the resulting
value in V2000 when C100 turns on.

Math - Binary (MATHBIN) (IB-501)

DS Used Math - Binary Format lets you enter complex mathematical expressions like you would in
HPP N/A Visual Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4 levels deep.
In addition to + - * /, you can do Modulo (% aka Remainder), Shift Right (>>) and Shift Left
(<<), Bit-wise And (&) Or (|) Xor (^), and some binary functions - Convert to BCD (BCD),
Convert to Binary (BIN), Decode Bits (DECO), Encode Bits (ENCO), Invert Bits (INV),
HEX to Seven Segment Display (SEG), and Sum Bits (SUM).
Example: ((V2000 + V2001) / (V2003 - K10)) *

SUM(V3000 & K001F)
Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single word binary formatted value. Intermediate
results can go up to 32 bit values, but as long as the final result fits in a 16 bit binary word,
the calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V2000
* K1000) / K4095. The multiply term most likely will exceed 65535 but fits within 32 bits.
The divide operation will divide 4095 into the 32-bit accumulator, yielding a result that will
always fit in 16 bits.
You can reference BCD V-Memory values by using the BIN conversion function on a
V-memory location but NOT an expression. That is, BIN(V2000) is okay and will convert
V2000 from BCD to Binary, but BIN(V2000 + V3000) will add V2000 as Binary, to V3000
as Binary, then interpret the result as BCD and convert it to Binary - NOT GOOD.
Also, the final result is a 16 bit binary number and so you could do BCD around the entire
operation to store the result as BCD.
MATHBIN Parameters
• WORD Result: specifies the location where the binary result of the mathematical
expression will be placed (result must fit into 16 bit single V-memory location)
• Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed
and the result is stored in specified WORD Result. Each V-memory
location used in the expression must be in binary format.

WORD Result V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Expression Text

MATHBIN Example
In the following example, the MATHBIN instruction is used to calculate the math expression
which multiplies the Binary value in V1200 by 1000 then divides by 4095 and loads the
resulting value in V2000 when C100 turns on.

Math - Real (MATHR) (IB-541)

DS Used Math - Real Format lets you enter complex mathematical expressions like you would in Visual
HPP N/A Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4 levels deep. In
addition to + - * /, you can do Bit-wise And (&) Or (|) Xor (^), and many Real functions -
Arc Cosine (ACOSR), Arc Sine (ASINR), Arc Tangent (ATANR), Cosine (COSR), Convert
Radians to Degrees (DEGR), Invert Bits (INV), Convert Degrees to Radians (RADR), HEX
to Seven Segment Display (SEG), Sine (SINR), Square Root (SQRTR), Tangent (TANR).
Example: ((V2000 + V2002) / (V2004 - R2.5)) *
SINR(RADR(V3000 / R10.0))
Every V-memory reference MUST be able to fit into a
double word Real formatted value.
MATHR Parameters
• DWORD Result: specifies the location where the Real result of the mathematical
expression will be placed (result must fit into a double word Real formatted location)
• Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the
result is stored in specified DWORD Result location. Each V-memory
location used in the expression must be in Real format.

DWORD Result V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Expression Text
MATHR Example
In the following example, the MATHR instruction is used to calculate the math expression
which multiplies the REAL (floating point) value in V1200 by 10.5 then divides by 2.7 and
loads the resulting 32-bit value in V2000 and V2001 when C100 turns on.

Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCD) (IB-561)
DS Used Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding converts the absolute value of the given
HPP N/A Real number to a 4 digit BCD number, compensating for an implied number of decimal points
(K0-K4) and performs rounding.
For example, RTOBCD R56.74 with an
implied number of decimal points equal to K1,
would yield 567 BCD. If the implied number of
decimal points was 0, then the function would
yield 57 BCD (note that it rounded up).
If the Real number is negative, the Result will
equal its positive, absolute value.
RTOBCD Parameters
• Value (DWORD Real): specifies the Real Dword location or number that will be converted
and rounded to a BCD number with decimal points
WORD
• Result (WORD BCD): specifies the location where the rounded/implied decimal points
BCD value will be placed

Value (DWORD Real) V,P,R R ; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (WORD BCD) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
RTOBCD Example
In the following example, the RTOBCD instruction is used to convert the 32-bit REAL (floating
point) data format in V3000 and V3001 to the 4-digit BCD data format and stored in V2000
when C100 turns on.
K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two implied decimal points.

Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding

(RTOBCDD) (IB-563)
DS Used Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal
HPP N/A Point and Rounding converts the absolute
value of the given Real number to an 8 digit
DWORD BCD number, compensating for an
implied number of decimal points (K0-K8) and
performs rounding.
For example, RTOBCDD R38156.74 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K1,
would yield 381567 BCD. If the implied number of decimal points was 0, then the function
would yield 38157 BCD (note that it rounded up).
If the Real number is negative, the Result will equal its positive, absolute value.
RTOBCDD Parameters
• Value (DWORD Real): specifies the Dword Real number that will be converted and
rounded to a BCD number with decimal points
DWORD
• Result (DWORD BCD): specifies the location where the rounded/implied decimal points
DWORD BCD value will be placed
Value (DWORD Real) V,P,R R ; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (DWORD BCD) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
RTOBCDD Example
In the following example, the RTOBCDD instruction is used to convert the 32-bit REAL
(floating point) data format in V3000 and V3001 to the 8-digit BCD data format and stored
in V2000 and V2001 when C100 turns on.
K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two implied decimal points.

Square BCD (SQUARE) (IB-523)

DS Used Square BCD squares the given 4-digit WORD BCD number and writes it in as an 8-digit
HPP N/A DWORD BCD result.
SQUARE Parameters
• Value (WORD BCD): specifies the BCD
Word or constant that will be squared
• Result (DWORD BCD): specifies the
location where the squared DWORD
BCD value will be placed

Value (WORD BCD) V,P,K K0-9999 ; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
SQUARE Example
In the following example, the SQUARE instruction is used to square the 4-digit BCD value in
V2000 and store the 8-digit double word BCD result in V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns
on.

Square Binary (SQUAREB) (IB-503)

DS Used Square Binary squares the given 16-bit WORD Binary number and writes it as a 32-bit
HPP N/A DWORD Binary result.
SQUAREB Parameters
• Value (WORD Binary): specifies the
binary Word or constant that will be
squared
• Result (DWORD Binary): specifies the
location where the squared DWORD
binary value will be placed

Value (WORD Binary) V,P,K K0-65535; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (DWORD Binary) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
SQUAREB Example
In the following example, the SQUAREB instruction is used to square the single word Binary
value in V2000 and store the 8-digit double word Binary result in V3000 and V3001 when
C100 turns on.

Square Real (SQUARER) (IB-543)

DS Used Square Real squares the given REAL DWORD number and writes it to a REAL DWORD
HPP N/A result.
SQUARER Parameters
• Value (REAL DWORD): specifies the Real
DWORD location or number that will be
squared
• Result (REAL DWORD): specifies the
location where the squared Real DWORD
value will be placed

Value (REAL DWORD) V,P,R R ; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (REAL DWORD) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
SQUARER Example
In the following example, the SQUARER instruction is used to square the 32-bit floating point
REAL value in V2000 and V2001 and store the REAL value result in V3000 and V3001 when
C100 turns on.

Sum BCD Numbers (SUMBCD) (IB-522)

DS Used Sum BCD Numbers sums up a list of consecutive 4-digit WORD BCD numbers into an
HPP N/A 8-digit DWORD BCD result.
You specify the group’s starting and ending V-
memory addresses (inclusive). When enabled,
this instruction will add up all the numbers
in the group (so you may want to place a
differential contact driving the enable).
SUMBCD could be used as the first part of
calculating an average.
SUMBCD Parameters
• Start Address: specifies the starting address of a block of V-memory location values to be
added together (BCD)
• End Addr (inclusive): specifies the ending address of a block of V-memory location values
to be added together (BCD)
• Result (DWORD BCD): specifies the location where the sum of the block of V-memory
BCD values will be placed

Start Address V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
End Address (inclusive) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
SUMBCD Example
In the following example, the SUMBCD instruction is used to total the sum of all BCD values
in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 8-digit double word BCD value in V3000
and V3001 when C100 turns on.

Sum Binary Numbers (SUMBIN) (IB-502)

DS Used Sum Binary Numbers sums up a list of consecutive 16-bit WORD Binary numbers into a
HPP N/A 32-bit DWORD binary result.
You specify the group’s starting and ending V-
memory addresses (inclusive). When enabled,
this instruction will add up all the numbers
in the group (so you may want to place a
differential contact driving the enable).
SUMBIN could be used as the first part of
calculating an average.
SUMBIN Parameters
• Start Address: specifies the starting address of a block of V-memory location values to be
added together (Binary)
• End Addr (inclusive): specifies the ending address of a block of V-memory location values
to be added together (Binary)
• Result (DWORD Binary): specifies the location where the sum of the block of V-memory
binary values will be placed
Start Address V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
End Address (inclusive) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (DWORD Binary) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
SUMBIN Example
In the following example, the SUMBIN instruction is used to total the sum of all Binary values
in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 8-digit double word Binary value in V3000
and V3001 when C100 turns on.

Sum Real Numbers (SUMR) (IB-542)

DS Used Sum Real Numbers sums up a list of consecutive REAL DWORD numbers into a REAL
HPP N/A DWORD result.
You specify the group’s starting and ending V- memory addresses (inclusive).
Remember that Real numbers are DWORDs
and occupy 2 words of V-Memory each, so
the number of Real values summed up is equal
to half the number of memory locations. Note
that the End Address can be EITHER word of
the 2 word ending address, for example, if you
wanted to add the 4 Real numbers stored in
V2000 thru V2007 (V2000, V2002, V2004,
and V2006), you can specify V2006 OR
V2007 for the ending address and you will get
the same result.
When enabled, this instruction will add up all the numbers in the group (so you may want to
place a differential contact driving the enable).
SUMR could be used as the first part of calculating an average.
SUMR Parameters
• Start Address (DWORD): specifies the starting address of a block of V-memory location
values to be added together (Real)
• End Addr (inclusive) (DWORD): specifies the ending address of a block of V-memory
location values to be added together (Real)
• Result (DWORD): specifies the location where the sum of the block of V-memory Real
values will be placed
Start Address (inclusive DWORD) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
End Address (inclusive DWORD) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (DWORD) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

SUMR Example
In the following example, the SUMR instruction is used to total the sum of all floating point
REAL number values in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 32-bit floating point
REAL number value in V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.

ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) (IB-710)
DS Used ECOM100 Configuration defines the parameters other ECOM100 IBoxes will use when
HPP N/A working with this specific ECOM100 module. Each ECOM100 module that will be used with
IBox instructions will require a unique ECOM1000 Configuration instruction. The addresses
used become workspaces for the IBox instruction to use.
The addresses used in this instruction must
not be used elsewhere in the program.
The instructions must be placed at the top of
ladder, without a contact. The instruction
will inherently run only once, on the first
scan.
IBoxes ECEMAIL, ECRX, ECIPSUP and
others require an ECOM100 Configuration
before they will operate properly.
In order for MOST ECOM100 IBoxes to function, DIP switch 7 on the ECOM100 circuit
board must be ON DIP switch 7 can remainOFF if ECOM100 Network Read and Write
IBoxes (ECRX, ECWX) are the only IBoxes that will be used.
ECOM100 Configuration Parameters

• ECOM100#: specify a logical number to be associated with this particular ECOM100
module. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM1000 module must
reference this logical number
• Slot: specifies the option slot the module occupies
• Status: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Msg Buffer: specifies the starting address of a 65 word buffer that will be used by the
module for configuration

ECOM100# K K0-255
Slot K K1-4
Status V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Workspace V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Msg Buffer (65 words used) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ECOM100 Example
The ECOM100 Config IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other ECOM100 based
IBoxes (ECxxxx). You must have an ECOM100 Config IBox for each ECOM100 module in
your system. Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every
scan.
This IBox defines ECOM100# K0 to be in slot 3. Any ECOM100 IBoxes that need to reference
this specific module (such as ECEMAIL, ECRX, ...) would enter K0 for their ECOM100#
parameter.
The Status register is for reporting any completion or error information to other ECOM100
IBoxes. This V-Memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the ECOM100, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other ECOM100 IBoxes in the program. This
V-Memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
The Message Buffer of 65 words (130 bytes) is a common pool of memory that is used by other
ECOM100 IBoxes (such as ECEMAIL). This way, you can have a bunch of ECEMAIL IBoxes,
but only need 1 common buffer for generating and sending each EMail. These V-Memory
registers must not be used anywhere else in your entire program.
Permissive contacts or input logic cannot K0

be used with this instruction. K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502

ECOM100 Disable DHCP (ECDHCPD) (IB-736)

DS Used ECOM100 Disable DHCP will setup the ECOM100 to use its internal TCP/IP settings on a
HPP N/A leading edge transition to the IBox. To configure the ECOM100’s TCP/IP settings manually,
use the NetEdit3 utility, or you can do it programmatically from your PLC program using
the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP), or the individual ECOM100 IBoxes: ECOM Write IP
Address (ECWRIP), ECOM Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA), and ECOM100 Write
Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM).
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST
NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will
turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report
an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or a
PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The “Disable DHCP” setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of
this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-
ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE,
on first scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
(STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECDHCPD Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written

ECOM100# K K0-255
Success X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL06 V-memory map
Error X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL06 V-memory map
Error Code V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ECDHCPD Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, disable DHCP in the ECOM100. DHCP is the same protocol used
by PCs for using a DHCP Server to automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address, Gateway
Address, and Subnet Mask. Typically disabling DHCP is done by assigning a hard-coded
IP Address either in NetEdit or using one of the ECOM100 IP Setup IBoxes, but this IBox
allows you to disable DHCP in the ECOM100 using your ladder program. The ECDHCPD
is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command
to disable DHCP will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes
from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you
can look at V2000 for the specific error code.

ECOM100 Enable DHCP (ECDHCPE) (IB-735)

DS Used ECOM100 Enable DHCP will tell the ECOM100 to obtain its TCP/IP setup from a DHCP
HPP N/A Server on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
The IBox will be successful once the ECOM100
has received its TCP/IP settings from the DHCP
server. Since it is possible for the DHCP server to be
unavailable, a Timeout parameter is provided so that
the IBox can complete, but with an Error (Error Code
= 1004 decimal).
See also the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox
717 to directly setup ALL of the TCP/IP parameters
in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The “Enable DHCP” setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of
this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-
ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE,
on first scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
ECDHCPE Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in
the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module
must reference this logical number
• Timeout(sec): specifies a timeout period so that the instruction may have time to complete

ECOM100# K K0-255
Timeout (sec) K K5-127

ECDHCPE Example
module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, enable DHCP in the ECOM100. DHCP is the same protocol
used by PCs for using a DHCP Server to automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address,
Gateway Address, and Subnet Mask. Typically this is done using NetEdit, but this IBox
allows you to enable DHCP in the ECOM100 using your ladder program. The ECDHCPE is
leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The commands
to enable DHCP will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes
from OFF to ON. The ECDHCPE does more than just set the bit to enable DHCP in the
ECOM100, but it then polls the ECOM100 once every second to see if the ECOM100 has
found a DHCP server and has a valid IP Address. Therefore, a timeout parameter is needed in
case the ECOM100 cannot find a DHCP server. If a timeout does occur, the Error bit will turn
on and the error code will be 1005 decimal. The Success bit will turn on only if the ECOM100
finds a DHCP Server and is assigned a valid IP Address. If successful, turn on C100. If there is
a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code.

ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting (ECDHCPQ) (IB-734)

DS Used ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting will determine if DHCP is enabled in the ECOM100 on a
HPP N/A leading edge transition to the IBox. The DHCP Enabled bit parameter will be ON if DHCP
is enabled, OFF if disabled.
turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function,
you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECDHCPQ Parameters
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction is completed successfully
• DHCP Enabled: specifies a bit that will turn on if the ECOM100’s DHCP is enabled or
remain off if disabled - after instruction query, be sure to check the state of the Success/
Error bit state along with DHCP Enabled bit state to confirm a successful module query

ECOM100# K K0-255
DHCP Enabled X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL06 V-memory map

ECDHCPQ Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read whether DHCP is enabled or disabled in the ECOM100
and store it in C5. DHCP is the same protocol used by PCs for using a DHCP Server to
automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address, Gateway Address, and Subnet Mask. The
ECDHCPQ is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to read (Query) whether DHCP is enabled or not will be sent to the ECOM100
whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If
there is a failure, turn on C101.

ECOM100 Send E-mail (ECEMAIL) (IB-711)

DS Used ECOM100 Send EMail, on a leading edge transition, will behave as an EMail client and send
HPP N/A an SMTP request to your SMTP Server to send the EMail message to the EMail addresses in
the To: field and also to those listed in the Cc: list hard coded in the ECOM100. It will send
the SMTP request based on the specified ECOM100#, which corresponds to a specific unique
ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) at the top of your program.
The Body: field supports what the PRINT and

VPRINT instructions support for text and embedded
variables, allowing you to embed real-time data in
your EMail (e.g. “V2000 = “ V2000:B).
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the request is complete. If there is an
error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), an SMPT
protocol error (between 100 and 999), or a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
Since the ECOM100 is only an EMail Client and requires access to an SMTP Server, you
MUST have the SMTP parameters configured properly in the ECOM100 via the ECOM100’s
Home Page and/or the EMail Setup instruction (ECEMSUP). To get to the ECOM100’s
Home Page, use your favorite Internet browser and browse to the ECOM100’s IP Address, e.g.
http://192.168.12.86
You are limited to approximately 100 characters of message data for the entire instruction,
including the To: Subject: and Body: fields. To save space, the ECOM100 supports a hard
coded list of EMail addresses for the Carbon Copy field (cc:) so that you can configure those
in the ECOM100, and keep the To: field small (or even empty), to leave more room for the
Subject: and Body: fields.

ECEMAIL Parameters
• To: specifies an E-mail address that the message will be sent to
• Subject: subject of the e-mail message
• Body: supports what the PRINT and VPRINT instructions support for text and embedded
variables, allowing you to embed real-time data in the EMail message

ECOM100# K K0-255
Error Code V See DL06 V-memory map
To: Text
Subject: Text
Body: See PRINT and VPRINT instructions

ECEMAIL Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: When a machine goes down, send an email to Joe in maintenance and to the VP over
production showing what machine is down along with the date/time stamp of when it went
down.
The ECEMAIL is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). An email will be sent whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. This
helps prevent self inflicted spamming.
If the EMail is sent, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look
at V2000 for the SMTP error code or other possible error codes.

ECEMAIL Decimal Status Codes

This list of status codes is based on the list in the ECOM100 Mock Slave Address 89 Command
Specification.
ECOM100 Status codes can be classified into four different areas based on its decimal value.
ECOM100 Status Code Areas
0-1 Normal Status - no error
2-99 Internal ECOM100 errors
100-999 Standard TCP/IP protocol errors (SMTP, HTTP, etc)
1000+ IBox ladder logic assigned errors (SP Slot Error, etc)
For the ECOM100 Send EMail IBOX, the status codes below are specific to this IBox.
Normal Status 0 - 1
ECOMM100 Send EMAIL IBOX Status Codes

0-1 Success - ECEMAIL completed successfully.
1 Busy - ECEMAIL IBOX logic sets the Error register to this value when the ECEMAIL starts a new request.
Internal ECOM100 Errors (2-99)
Internal ECOM 100 Errors (2-99)

Timeout Errors - last digit shows where in ECOM100’s SMTP state logic the timeout occurred; regardless of
10-19
the last digit, the SMTP conversation with the SMTP Server timed out.
SMTP Internal Errors (20-29)
20 TCP Write Error
21 No Sendee
22 Invalid State
23 Invalid Data
24 Invalid SMTP Configuration
25 Memory Allocation Error
ECEMAIL IBox Ladder Logic Assigned Errors (1000+)
ECEMAIL IBox Ladder Logic Assigned Errors (1000+)

SP Slot Error - the SP error bit for the ECOM100’s slot turned on. Possibly using RX or WX instructions on the
101
ECOM100 and walking on the ECEMAIL execution. Use should use ECRX and ECX IBoxes,

ECEMAIL Decimal Status Codes

SMTP Protocol Errors - SMTP (100-999)
SMTP Protocol Errors - SMTP (100-999)

Error Description
1xx Informational replies
2xx Success replies
200 (Non-standard success response)
211 System status or system help reply
214 Help message
220 <domain> Service ready. Ready to start TLS
221 <domain> Service closing transmission channel
250 Ok, queuing for node <node> started. Requested mail action okay, completed
251 Ok, no messages waiting for node <node>. User not local; will forward to <forward-path>
OK, pending messages for node <node> started. Cannot VRFY user (e.g., info is not local), but
252
will take message for this user and attempt delivery.
253 OK, messages pending messages for node <node> started
3xx (re) direction replies
354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
355 Octet-offset is the transaction offset.
4xx client/request error replies
421 <domain> Service not available, closing transmission channel
432 A password transition is needed
450 Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable. ATRN request refused.
451 Requested action aborted; local error in processing. Unable to process ATRN request now.
452 Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
453 You have no mail
TLS is not available due to temporary reason. Encryption required for requested authentication
454
mechanism.
458 Unable to queue messages for node <node>
459 Node <node> not allowed: <reason>
5xx Server/process error replies
500 Syntax error, command unrecognized. Syntax error.
501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments
502 Command not implemented
503 Bad sequence of commands
504 Command parameter not implemented
521 <domain> does not accept mail
Access denied. Must issue a STARTTLS command first. Encryption required for requested
530
authentication mechanism.

ECOM100 Restore Default E-mail Setup (ECEMRDS) (IB-713)

DS Used ECOM100 Restore Default EMail Setup, on a leading edge transition, will restore the original
HPP N/A EMail Setup data stored in the ECOM100 back to the working copy based on the specified
ECOM100#, which corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100)
at the top of your program.
When the ECOM100 is first powered up, it
copies the EMail setup data stored in ROM to
the working copy in RAM. You can then modify
this working copy from your program using the
ECOM100 EMail Setup (ECEMSUP) IBox.
After modifying the working copy, you can later
restore the original setup data via your program by
using this IBox.
ECEMRDS Parameters

ECOM100# K K0-255

ECEMRDS Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: Whenever an EStop is pushed, ensure that president of the company gets copies of all
EMails being sent.
The ECOM100 EMail Setup IBox allows you to set/change the SMTP EMail settings stored
in the ECOM100.
(example continued on next page)

ECEMRDS Example (cont’d)

Rung 3: Once the EStop is pulled out, take the president off the cc: list by restoring the default
EMail setup in the ECOM100.
The ECEMRDS is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The ROM based EMail configuration stored in the ECOM100 will be copied over the
“working copy” whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON (the working
copy can be changed by using the ECEMSUP IBox).
If successful, turn on C102. If there is a failure, turn on C103. If it fails, you can look at V2001
for the specific error code.

ECOM100 E-mail Setup (ECEMSUP) (IB-712)

DS Used ECOM100 E-Mail Setup, on a leading edge transition, will modify the working copy of
HPP N/A the E-Mail setup currently in the ECOM100 based on the specified ECOM100#, which
corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) at the top of your
program.
You may pick and choose any or all fields to be
modified using this instruction. Note that these
changes are cumulative: if you execute multiple
ECOM100 EMail Setup IBoxes, then all of the
changes are made in the order they are executed. Also
note that you can restore the original ECOM100
EMail Setup that is stored in the ECOM100 to
the working copy by using the ECOM100 Restore
Default EMail Setup (ECEMRDS) IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
You are limited to approximately 100 characters/bytes of setup data for the entire instruction.
So if needed, you could divide the entire setup across multiple ECEMSUP IBoxes on a field-
by-field basis, for example do the Carbon Copy (cc:) field in one ECEMSUP IBox and the
remaining setup parameters in another.
ECEMSUP Parameters
• SMTP Server IP Addr: optional parameter that specifies the IP Address of the SMTP
Server on the ECOM100’s network
• Sender Name: optional parameter that specifies the sender name that will appear in the
“From:” field to those who receive the e-mail
• Sender EMail: optional parameter that specifies the sender EMail address that will appear
in the “From:” field to those who receive the e-mail

ECEMSUP Parameters (cont’d)

• Port Number: optional parameter that specifies the TCP/IP Port Number to send SMTP
requests; usually this does not to be configured (see your network administrator for
information on this setting)
• Timeout (sec): optional parameter that specifies the number of seconds to wait for the
SMTP Server to send the EMail to all the recipients
• Cc: optional parameter that specifies a list of “carbon copy” Email addresses to send all
EMails to

ECOM100# K K0-255

ECEMSUP Example
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1
as ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to
move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox.
V400 is used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific
ECOM100 module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx
IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer
available for use by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502

ECEMSUP Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: Whenever an EStop is pushed, ensure that president of the company gets copies
of all EMails being sent.The ECOM100 EMail Setup IBox allows you to set/change the
SMTP EMail settings stored in the ECOM100. The ECEMSUP is leading edge triggered,
not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). At power-up, the ROM based EMail
configuration stored in the ECOM100 is copied to a RAM based “working copy”. You can
change this working copy by using the ECEMSUP IBox. To restore the original ROM based
configuration, use the Restore Default EMail Setup ECEMRDS IBox.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.
Rung 3: Once the EStop is pulled out, take the president off the cc: list by restoring the
default EMail setup in the ECOM100.

ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) (IB-717)

DS Used ECOM100 IP Setup will configure the three TCP/IP parameters in the ECOM100: IP
HPP N/A Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address, on a leading edge transition to the IBox. The
ECOM100 is specified by the ECOM100#, which corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100
Configuration (ECOM100) IBox at the top of your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on
once the command is complete. If there is an error,
the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100
error code (less than 100), or a PLC logic error
(greater than 1000).
This setup data is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and will disable the ECOM100
module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY
RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on first scan. Since it requires a
LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0 (NOT First Scan) to drive the
power flow to the IBox.
ECIPSUP Parameters
• IP Address: specifies the module’s IP Address
• Subnet Mask: specifies the Subnet Mask for the module to use
• Gateway Address: specifies the Gateway Address for the module to use
ECOM100# K K0-255
IP Address IP Address 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254
Subnet Mask Address IP Address Mask 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254
Gateway Address IP Address 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254

ECIPSUP Example
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1
as ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to
move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox.
V400 is used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific
ECOM100 module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx
IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer
available for use by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, configure all of the TCP/IP parameters in the ECOM100:
IP Address: 192.168. 12.100
Subnet Mask: 255.255. 0. 0
Gateway Address: 192.168. 0. 1
The ECIPSUP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to write the TCP/IP configuration parameters will be sent to the ECOM100
whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.

ECOM100 Read Description (ECRDDES) (IB-726)

DS Used ECOM100 Read Description will read the ECOM100’s Description field up to the number of
HPP N/A specified characters on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn
on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you
must turn ON dip switch 7 on the ECOM100
circuit board.
ECRDDES Parameters
• Description: specifies the starting buffer location where
the ECOM100’s Module Name will be placed
• Num Char: specifies the number of characters (bytes) to
read from the ECOM100’s Description field
ECOM100# K K0-255
Description V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Num Chars K K1-128

ECRDDES Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Module Description of the ECOM100 and store it in
V3000 thru V3007 (16 characters). This text can be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDDES is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the module description will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever
the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.

ECOM100 Read Gateway Address (ECRDGWA) (IB-730)

DS Used ECOM100 Read Gateway Address will read the 4 parts of the Gateway IP address and store
HPP N/A them in 4 consecutive V-Memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to
the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal,
private register used by this IBox and MUST
BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and
MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.
ECRDGWA Parameters
• Gateway IP Addr: specifies the starting address where the ECOM100’s Gateway Address
will be placed in 4 consecutive V-memory locations

ECOM100# K K0-255
Gateway IP Address (4 Words) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ECRDGWA Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Gateway Address of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000
thru V3003 (4 decimal numbers). The ECOM100’s Gateway Address could be displayed by
an HMI.
The ECRDGWA is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the Gateway Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.

ECOM100 Read IP Address (ECRDIP) (IB-722)

DS Used ECOM100 Read IP Address will read the 4 parts of the IP address and store them in 4
HPP N/A consecutive V-Memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
program.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to
function, you must turn ON dip switch 7
on the ECOM100 circuit board.
ECRDIP Parameters
• IP Address: specifies the starting address where the ECOM100’s IP
Address will be placed in 4 consecutive V-memory locations
ECOM100# K K0-255
IP Address (4 Words) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ECRDIP Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the IP Address of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000 thru
V3003 (4 decimal numbers). The ECOM100’s IP Address could be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDIP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to read the IP Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow
into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.

ECOM100 Read Module ID (ECRDMID) (IB-720)

DS Used ECOM100 Read Module ID will read the binary (decimal) WORD sized Module ID on a
HPP N/A leading edge transition to the IBox.

ECRDMID Parameters
• Module ID: specifies the location where the ECOM100’s
Module ID (decimal) will be placed

ECOM100# K K0-255
Module ID V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ECRDMID Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Module ID of the ECOM100 and store it in V2000.
The ECRDMID is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the module ID will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power
flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.

ECOM100 Read Module Name (ECRDNAM) (IB-724)

DS Used ECOM100 Read Name will read the Module Name up to the number of specified characters
HPP N/A on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you
must turn ON dip switch 7 on the ECOM100 circuit
board.
ECRDNAM Parameters
• Module Name: specifies the starting buffer location where the ECOM100’s Module Name
will be placed
• Num Chars: specifies the number of characters (bytes) to read from the ECOM100’s
Name field
ECOM100# K K0-255
Module Name V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Num Chars K K1-128

ECRDNAM Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Module Name of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000 thru
V3003 (8 characters). This text can be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDNAM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the module name will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the

ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask (ECRDSNM) (IB-732)

DS Used ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask will read the 4 parts of the Subnet Mask and store them in 4
HPP N/A consecutive V-Memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
program.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to
function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on
the ECOM100 circuit board.
ECRDSNM Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in the specified
slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module must reference this
logical number
• Subnet Mask: specifies the starting address where the ECOM100’s Subnet Mask will be placed in 4
consecutive V-memory locations
ECOM100# K K0-255
Subnet Mask (4 Words) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ECRDSNM Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Subnet Mask of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000 thru
V3003 (4 decimal numbers). The ECOM100’s Subnet Mask could be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDSNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the Subnet Mask will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the

ECOM100 Write Description (ECWRDES) (IB-727)

DS Used ECOM100 Write Description will write the given Description to the ECOM100 module on
HPP N/A a leading edge transition to the IBox. If you use a dollar sign ($) or double quote (“), use the
PRINT/VPRINT escape sequence of TWO dollar signs ($$) for a single dollar sign or dollar
sign-double quote ($”) for a double quote character.
on once the command is complete. If there is an
error, the Error Code parameter will report an
ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or a PLC
logic error (greater than 1000).
The Description is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM.
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on first
scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0 (STR
NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
ECWRDES Parameters
• Description: specifies the Description that will be written to the module
ECOM100# K K0-255
Description Text

ECWRDES Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, set the Module Description of the ECOM100. Typically this is done
using NetEdit, but this IBox allows you to configure the module description in the ECOM100
using your ladder program.
The EWRDES is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to write the module description will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the

ECOM100 Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA) (IB-731)

DS Used ECOM100 Write Gateway Address will write the given Gateway IP Address to the ECOM100
HPP N/A module on a leading edge transition to the IBox. See also ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP)
IBox 717 to setup ALL of the TCP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Gateway Address.
program.
turn on once the command is complete. If
there is an error, the Error Code parameter
will report an ECOM100 error code (less than
100), or a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The Gateway Address is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE, on first
ECWRGWA Parameters
logical number
• Gateway Address: specifies the Gateway IP Address that will be written to the module
ECOM100# K K0-255
Gateway Address 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254

ECWRGWA Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, assign the Gateway Address of the ECOM100 to 192.168.0.1
The ECWRGWA is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the Gateway Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP
Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox.

ECOM100 Write IP Address (ECWRIP) (IB-723)

DS Used ECOM100 Write IP Address will write the given IP Address to the ECOM100 module on
HPP N/A a leading edge transition to the IBox. See also ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox 717 to
setup ALL of the TCP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address.
The IP Address is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
ECWRIP Parameters
logical number
• IP Address: specifies the IP Address that will be written to the module

ECOM100# K K0-255
IP Address 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254

ECWRIP Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, assign the IP Address of the ECOM100 to 192.168.12.100
The ECWRIP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to write the IP Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow
into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.

ECOM100 Write Module ID (ECWRMID) (IB-721)

DS Used ECOM100 Write Module ID will write the given Module ID on a leading edge transition to
HPP N/A the IBox
If the Module ID is set in the hardware using the dipswitches, this IBox will fail and return
error code 1005 (decimal).
once the command is complete. If there is an error,
the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100
error code (less than 100), or a PLC logic error
(greater than 1000).
The Module ID is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
ECWRMID Parameters
• Module ID: specifies the Module ID that will be written to the module
ECOM100# K K0-255
Module ID K0-65535

ECWRMID Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, set the Module ID of the ECOM100. Typically this is done using
NetEdit, but this IBox allows you to configure the module ID of the ECOM100 using your
ladder program.
The EWRMID is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the module ID will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power
flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.

ECOM100 Write Name (ECWRNAM) (IB-725)

DS Used ECOM100 Write Name will write the given Name to the ECOM100 module on a leading
HPP N/A edge transition to the IBox. If you use a dollar sign ($) or double quote (“), use the PRINT/
VPRINT escape sequence of TWO dollar signs ($$) for a single dollar sign or dollar sign-
double quote ($”) for a double quote character.
The Name is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox will
disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM.
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on
first scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
ECWRNAM Parameters
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to
reference this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Module Name: specifies the Name that will be written to the module
ECOM100# K K0-255
Module Name Text

ECWRNAM Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, set the Module Name of the ECOM100. Typically this is done using
NetEdit, but this IBox allows you to configure the module name of the ECOM100 using your
ladder program.
The EWRNAM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the module name will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the

ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM) (IB-733)

DS Used ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask will write the given Subnet Mask to the ECOM100 module
HPP N/A on a leading edge transition to the IBox. See also ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox 717
to setup ALL of the TCP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address.
turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report
an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or a
PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The Subnet Mask is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
ECWRSNM Parameters
• Subnet Mask: specifies the Subnet Mask that will be written to the module

ECOM100# K K0-255
Subnet Mask Masked IP Address

ECWRSNM Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, assign the Subnet Mask of the ECOM100 to 255.255.0.0
The ECWRSNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the Subnet Mask will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the

ECOM100 RX Network Read (ECRX) (IB-740)

DS Used ECOM100 RX Network Read performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with
HPP N/A all other ECOM100 RX (ECRX) and ECOM100 WX (ECWX) IBoxes in your program to
simplify communications networking. It will perform the RX on the specified ECOM100#’s
network, which corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) IBox
Whenever this IBox has power, it will read
element data from the specified slave into the
given destination V-Memory buffer, giving other
ECOM100 RX and ECOM100 WX IBoxes on
that ECOM100# network a chance to execute.
For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from 5 different slaves, you can
have all of these ECRX and ECWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always On).
They will execute round-robin style, automatically.
ECRX Parameters
• Slave ID: specifies the slave ECOM(100) PLC that
will be targeted by the ECRX instruction
• From Slave Element (Src): specifies the slave address of the data to be read
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to read from the slave ECOM(100) PLC
• To Master Element (Dest): specifies the location where the slave
data will be placed in the master ECOM100 PLC

ECOM100# K K0-255
Slave ID K K0-90
From Slave Element (Src) X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V,P See DL06 V-memory map
Number of Bytes K K1-128
To Master Element (Dest) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

ECRX Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502

ECRX Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: Using ECOM100# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast
as possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in
slave K5.
Both the ECRX and ECWX work with the ECOM100 Config IBox to simplify all networking
by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified
error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP “busy bits” or “error bits”, or what
slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for
resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the ECRX and ECWX IBoxes in the same
rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same
scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program
would get a turn. If there are no pending ECOM100 IBoxes below the ECWX, then the very
next scan the ECRX would start its request again.
Using the ECRX and ECWX for all of your ECOM100 network reads and writes is the fastest
the PLC can do networking. For local Serial Ports, DCM modules, or the original ECOM
modules, use the NETCFG and NETRX/NETWX IBoxes.

ECOM100 WX Network Write(ECWX) (IB-741)

DS Used ECOM100 WX Network Write performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking with
HPP N/A all other ECOM100 RX (ECRX) and ECOM100 WX (ECWX) IBoxes in your program to
simplify communications networking. It will perform the WX on the specified ECOM100#’s
network, which corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) IBox
Whenever this IBox has power, it will write data
from the master’s V-Memory buffer to the specified
slave starting with the given slave element, giving
other ECOM100 RX and ECOM100 WX IBoxes
on that ECOM100# network a chance to execute.
have all of these ECRX and ECWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always On).
They will execute round-robin style, automatically.
ECWX Parameters
• Slave ID: specifies the slave ECOM(100) PLC that will
be targeted by the ECWX instruction
• From Master Element (Src): specifies the location in the master
ECOM100 PLC where the data will be sourced from
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to write to the slave ECOM(100) PLC
• To Slave Element (Dest): specifies the slave address the data will be written to

ECOM100# K K0-255
Slave ID K K0-90
From Master Element (Src) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
To Slave Element (Dest) X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V,P See DL06 V-memory map

ECWX Example
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402 - V502

ECWX Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: Using ECOM100# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast
as possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in
slave K5.
Both the ECRX and ECWX work with the ECOM100 Config IBox to simplify all networking
slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for
resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the ECRX and ECWX IBoxes in the same
rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same
scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program
would get a turn. If there are no pending ECOM100 IBoxes below the ECWX, then the very
next scan the ECRX would start its request again.
Using the ECRX and ECWX for all of your ECOM100 network reads and writes is the fastest
the PLC can do networking. For local Serial Ports, DCM modules, or the original ECOM
modules, use the NETCFG and NETRX/NETWX IBoxes.

NETCFG Network Configuration (NETCFG) (IB-700)

DS Used Network Config defines all the common information necessary for performing RX/WX
HPP N/A Networking using the NETRX and NETWX IBox instructions via a local CPU serial port,
DCM or ECOM module.
You must have the Network Config instruction at the top of your ladder/stage program with
any other configuration IBoxes.
If you use more than one local serial port, DCM or ECOM in your PLC for RX/WX
Networking, you must have a different Network Config instruction for EACH RX/WX
network in your system that utilizes any NETRX/NETWX IBox instructions.

register used by the Network Config IBox and
MUST BE UNIQUE in this one instruction
and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.
The 2nd parameter “CPU Port or Slot” is the same value as in the high byte of the first LD
instruction if you were coding the RX or WX rung yourself. This value is CPU and port specific
(check your PLC manual). Use KF2 for the DL06 CPU serial port 2. If using a DCM or
ECOM module, use Kx, where x equals the slot where the module is installed.
Since this logic only executes on the first scan, this IBox cannot have any input logic.
NETCFG Parameters
• Network#: specifies a unique # for each ECOM(100) or DCM network to use
• CPU Port or Slot: specifies the CPU port number or
slot number of DCM/ECOM(100) used

Network# K K0-255
CPU Port or Slot K K0-FF

NETCFG Example
The Network Configuration IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other Network
IBoxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network Configuration IBox for each serial
port network, DCM module network, or original ECOM module network in your system.
Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan.
This IBox defines Network# K0 to be for the local CPU serial port #2 (KF2). For local CPU
serial ports or DCM/ECOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant
byte of the first LD instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. Any
NETRX or NETWX IBoxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K0 for
their Network# parameter.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
Permissive contacts or input logic

cannot be used with this instruction.

Network RX Read (NETRX) (IB-701)

DS Used Network RX Read performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
HPP N/A Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify
communications networking. It will perform the RX on the specified Network #, which
corresponds to a specific unique Network Configuration (NETCFG) at the top of your
program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will read
element data from the specified slave into the
given destination V-Memory buffer, giving other
Network RX and Network WX IBoxes on that
Network # a chance to execute.
have all of these NETRX and NETWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always
On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically.
NETRX Parameters
• Network#: specifies the (CPU port’s, DCM’s, ECOM’s) Network # defined by the
NETCFG instruction
• Slave ID: specifies the slave PLC that will be targeted by the NETRX instruction
• From Slave Element (Src): specifies the slave address of the data to be read
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to read from the slave device
• To Master Element (Dest): specifies the location where the slave data will be placed in the
master PLC
Network# K K0-255
Slave ID K, V K0-90: See DL06 V-memory map
From Slave Element (Src) X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V,P See DL06 V-memory map
To Master Element (Dest) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

NETRX Example
Rung 1: The Network Configuration IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other
Network IBoxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network Configuration IBox for
each serial port network, DCM module network, or original ECOM module network in your
system. Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan.
This IBox defines Network# K0 to be for the local CPU serial port #2 (KF2). For local
CPU serial ports or DCM/ECOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most
significant byte of the first LD instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or
module. Any NETRX or NETWX IBoxes that need to reference this specific network would
enter K0 for their Network# parameter.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module,
along with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in
the program. This V-Memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.


NETRX Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: Using Network# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast as
possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in slave
K5.
Both the NETRX and NETWX work with the Network Config IBox to simplify all networking
port number or slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other
interlocks for resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that
same scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the
program would get a turn. If there are no pending NETRX or NETWX IBoxes below this
IBox, then the very next scan the NETRX would start its request again.
Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, DCM, or original ECOM network
reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For ECOM100 modules, use the
ECOM100 and ECRX/ECWX IBoxes.

Network WX Write (NETWX) (IB-702)

DS Used Network WX Write performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
HPP N/A Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify
communications networking. It will perform the WX on the specified Network #, which
corresponds to a specific unique Network Configuration (NETCFG) at the top of your
program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will write data
from the master’s V-Memory buffer to the specified
slave starting with the given slave element, giving
other Network RX and Network WX IBoxes on
that Network # a chance to execute.
have all of these NETRX and NETWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always
On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically.
NETWX Parameters
• Network#: specifies the (CPU port’s, DCM’s, ECOM’s)
Network # defined by the NETCFG instruction
• Slave ID: specifies the slave PLC that will be targeted by the NETWX instruction
• From Master Element (Src): specifies the location in the
master PLC where the data will be sourced from
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to write to the slave PLC
• To Slave Element (Dest): specifies the slave address the data will be written to

Network# K K0-255
Slave ID K,V K0-90: See DL06 V-memory map
From Master Element (Src) V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
To Slave Element (Dest) X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V,P See DL06 V-memory map

NETWX Example
Rung 1: The Network Configuration IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other
Network IBoxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network Configuration IBox for
each serial port network, DCM module network, or original ECOM module network in your
system. Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan.
This IBox defines Network# K0 to be for the local CPU serial port #2 (KF2). For local CPU
serial ports or DCM/ECOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant
byte of the first LD instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. Any
NETRX or NETWX IBoxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K0 for
their Network# parameter.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
program. This V-Memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.


NETWX Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: Using Network# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast as
possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in slave
K5.
Both the NETRX and NETWX work with the Network Config IBox to simplify all networking
port number or slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other
interlocks for resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that
same scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the
program would get a turn. If there are no pending NETRX or NETWX IBoxes below this
IBox, then the very next scan the NETRX would start its request again.
Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, DCM, or original ECOM network
reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For ECOM100 modules, use the
ECOM100 and ECRX/ECWX IBoxes.

CTRIO Configuration (CTRIO) (IB-1000)

DS Used CTRIO Config defines all the common information for one specific CTRIO module which is
HPP N/A used by the other CTRIO IBox instructions (for example, CTRLDPR - CTRIO Load Profile,
CTREDRL - CTRIO Edit and Reload Preset Table, CTRRTLM - CTRIO Run to Limit
Mode, ...).
The Input/Output parameters for this instruction
can be copied directly from the CTRIO Workbench
configuration for this CTRIO module. Since the
behavior is slightly different when the CTRIO module is
in an EBC Base via an ERM, you must specify whether
the CTRIO module is in a local base or in an EBC base.
The DL06 PLC only supports local base operation at
this time.
You must have the CTRIO Config IBox at the top
of your ladder/stage program along with any other
configuration IBoxes.
If you have more than one CTRIO in your PLC, you must have a different CTRIO Config
IBox for EACH CTRIO module in your system that utilizes any CTRIO IBox instructions.
Each CTRIO Config IBox must have a UNIQUE CTRIO# value. This is how the CTRIO
IBoxes differentiate between the different CTRIO modules in your system.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by the CTRIO Config IBox and
MUST BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.
Since this logic only executes on the first scan, this IBox cannot have any input logic.
CTRIO Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a user defined number
• Slot: specifies which PLC option slot the CTRIO module occupies
• CTRIO Location: specifies where the module is located (local base only for DL06)
• Input: This needs to be set to the same V-memory register as is specified in
CTRIO Workbench as ‘Starting V address for inputs’ for this unique CTRIO.
• Output: This needs to be set to the same V-memory register as is specified in
CTRIO Workbench as ‘Starting V address for outputs’ for this unique CTRIO.


CTRIO# K K0-255
Slot K K1-4
Input V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Output V See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
CTRIO Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

be used with this instruction

CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table (CTRADPT) (IB-1005)

DS Used CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will
HPP N/A append an entry to the end of a memory based Preset Table on a specific CTRIO Output
resource. This IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit
will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO
Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored
by some Entry Types.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
CTRAPT Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to be added to the end of a Preset Table
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3
Entry Type V,K K0-5; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Pulse Time V,K K0-65535; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Preset Count V,K K0-2147434528; See DL06 V-memory map

CTRADPT Example

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRADPT command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRADPT instruction to add a new preset to the preset table for
output #0 on the CTRIO in slot 2. The new preset will be a command to RESET (entry type
K1=reset), pulse time is left at zero as the reset type does not use this, and the count at which
it will reset will be 20.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRADPT_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on and stay on for all counts past 10. Now reset the counter with C1, enable C0 to execute
CTRADPT command to add a reset for output #0 at a count of 20, turn on C2 to enable
output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and then continue on
to count of 20+ (output #0 should turn off).

CTRADPT Example (cont’d)

Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.
Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.

CTRIO Clear Preset Table (CTRCLRT) (IB-1007)

DS Used CTRIO Clear Preset Table will clear the RAM
HPP N/A based Preset Table on a leading edge transition to
this IBox. This IBox will take more than 1 PLC
scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will
turn on when the command is complete. If the
Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error
Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error
information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by
this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
CTRCLRT Parameters

CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3

CTRCLRT Example

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRCLRT command. A C-bit is used
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRCLRT instruction to clear the preset table for output #0 on
the CTRIO in slot 2.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRCLRT_ex1.cwb file to your
on and stay on until a count of 20 is reached, where it will turn off. Now reset the counter with
C1, enable C0 to execute CTRCLRT command to clear the preset table, turn on C2 to enable
output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should NOT turn on).

CTRCLRT Example (cont’d)


CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (CTREDPT) (IB-1003)

DS Used CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will edit a single
HPP N/A entry in a Preset Table on a specific CTRIO Output resource. This IBox is good if you are
editing more than one entry in a file at a time. If you wish to do just one edit and then reload
the table immediately, see the CTRIO Edit and Reload Preset Table Entry (CTREDRL) IBox.
This IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn
on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error
Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
CTREDPT Parameters
user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Table#: specifies the Table number of which an Entry is to be edited
• Entry#: specifies the Entry location in the Preset Table to be edited
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the edit
•


CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3
Table# V,K K0-255; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Entry# V,K K0-255; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
CTREDPT Example


CTREDPT Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTREDPT command. A C-bit is used
Turning on C0 will cause the CTREDPT instruction to change the second preset from a reset
at a count of 20 to a reset at a count of 30 for output #0 on the CTRIO in slot 2.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTREDPT_ex1.cwb file to your
on and stay on until a count of 20 is reached, where it will turn off. Now reset the counter
with C1, enable C0 to execute CTREDPT command to change the second preset, turn on C2
to enable output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and then
continue past a count of 30 (output #0 should turn off).
Note that we must also reload the profile after changing the preset(s), this is why the CTRLDPR
command follows the CTREDPT command in this example.

CTREDPT Example (cont’d)


CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (CTREDRL) (IB-1002)

DS Used CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will
HPP N/A perform this dual operation to a CTRIO Output resource in one CTRIO command. This IBox
will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when
the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error Code
(CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by
some Entry Types.
CTREDRL Parameters
• Table#: specifies the Table number of which an Entry is to be edited
• Entry#: specifies the Entry location in the Preset Table to be edited
•


CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3
Table# V,K K0-255; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Entry# V,K K0-255; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
CTREDRL Example



CTREDRL Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTREDRL command. A C-bit is used
Turning on C0 will cause the CTREDRL instruction to change the second preset in file 1 from
a reset at a value of 20 to a reset at a value of 30.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTREDRL_ex1.cwb file to your
on, continue to a count above 20 and the output #0 light will turn off. Now reset the counter
with C1, enable C0 to execute CTREDRL command to change the second preset count value
to 30, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and continue on to a value
of 30+ and the output #0 light will turn off.
Note that it is not necessary to reload this file separately, however, the command can only
change one value at a time.

CTREDRL Example (cont’d)


CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINPT) (IB-1004)

DS Used CTRIO Initialize Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will create a single
HPP N/A entry Preset Table in memory but not as a file, on a specific CTRIO Output resource. This
IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on
when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
CTRINPT Parameters
•


CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3
CTRINPT Example


CTRINPT Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRINPT command. A C-bit is used
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRINPT instruction to create a single entry preset table, but
not as a file, and use it for the output #0. In this case the single preset will be a set at a count
of 15 for output #0.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRINPT_ex1.cwb file to your
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 15 and output #0 light will not
come on. Now reset the counter with C1, enable C0 to execute CTRINPT command to create
a single preset table with a preset to set output #0 at a count of 15, then turn encoder to value
of 15+ (output #0 should turn on).

CTRINPT Example (cont’d)


CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINTR) (IB-1010)

DS Used CTRIO Initialize Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will create a single
HPP N/A entry Preset Table in memory but not as a file, on a specific CTRIO Output resource.This IBox
will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when
the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error Code
(CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by
some Entry Types.
CTRINTR Parameters


CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3
CTRINTR Example



CTRINTR Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRINTR command. A C-bit is used
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRINTR instruction to create a single entry preset table, but
not as a file, and use it for output #0, the new preset will be loaded when the current count is
reset. In this case the single preset will be a set at a count of 25 for output #0.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRINTR_ex1.cwb file to your
on. Now turn on C0 to execute the CTRINTR command, reset the counter with C1, then turn
encoder to value of 25+ (output #0 should turn on).

CTRINTR Example (cont’d)


CTRIO Load Profile (CTRLDPR) (IB-1001)

DS Used CTRIO Load Profile loads a CTRIO Profile File
HPP N/A to a CTRIO Output resource on a leading edge
transition to this IBox. This IBox will take more
than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success
or Error bit will turn on when the command is
complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the
CTRIO Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to
get extended error information.
CTRLDPR Parameters
• File#: specifies a CTRIO profile File number to be loaded

CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3
File# V,K K0-255; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words

CTRLDPR Example

Rung 2: This CTRIO Load Profile IBox will load File #1 into the working memory of Output
0 in CTRIO #1. This example program requires that you load CTRLDPR_IBox.cwb into your
Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

CTRLDPR Example (cont’d)

Rung 3: If the file is successfully loaded, set Profile_Loaded.

CTRIO Read Error (CTRRDER) (IB-1014)

DS Used CTRIO Read Error Code will get the decimal error code value from the CTRIO module (listed
HPP N/A below) and place it into the given Error Code register, on a leading edge transition to the IBox
Since the Error Code in the CTRIO is only
maintained until another CTRIO command is
given, you must use this instruction immediately
after the CTRIO IBox that reports an error via its
Error bit parameter.
Error Codes:
0: No Error
100: Specified command code is unknown or unsupported
101: File number not found in the file system
102: File type is incorrect for specified output function
103: Profile type is unknown
104: Specified input is not configured as a limit on this output
105: Specified limit input edge is out of range
106: Specified input function is un configured or invalid
107: Specified input function number is out of range
108: Specified preset function is invalid
109: Preset table is full
110: Specified Table entry is out of range
111: Specified register number is out of range
112: Specified register is an unconfigured input or output
2001: Error reading Error Code - cannot access CTRIO via ERM
CTRRDER Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a user defined number
(see CTRIO Config)

CTRIO# K K0-255

CTRRDER Example

Rung 2: This CTRIO Read Error Code IBox will read the Extended Error information from
CTRIO #1. This example program requires that you load CTRRDER_IBox.cwb into your
Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

CTRIO Run to Limit Mode (CTRRTLM) (IB-1011)

DS Used CTRIO Run To Limit Mode, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, loads the Run to Limit
HPP N/A command and given parameters on a specific Output resource. The CTRIO’s Input(s) must be
configured as Limit(s) for this function to work.
Valid Hexadecimal Limit Values:
K00 - Rising Edge of Ch1/C
K10 - Falling Edge of Ch1/C
K20 - Both Edges of Ch1/C
K01 - Rising Edge of Ch1/D
K11 - Falling Edge of Ch1/D
K21 - Both Edges of Ch1/D
K02 - Rising Edge of Ch2/C
K12 - Falling Edge of Ch2/C
K22 - Both Edges of Ch2/C
K03 - Rising Edge of Ch2/D
K13 - Falling Edge of Ch2/D
K23 - Both Edges of Ch2/D
CTRRTLM Parameters
• Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (H0-CTRIO:
20Hz - 25KHz / H0-CTRIO2: 20Hz - 250 KHz)
• Limit: the CTRIO’s Input(s) must be configured as Limit(s) for this function to operate
• Duty Cycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time. This is a hex
number. Default of 0 is 50%, also entering 50 will yield 50%. 50%
duty cycle is defined as on half the time and off half the time


CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3
Frequency V,K K20-20000; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Limit V,K K0-FF; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
Duty Cycle V,K K0-99; See DL06 V-memory map - Data Words
CTRRTLM Example

Rung 2: This CTRIO Run To Limit Mode IBox sets up Output #0 in CTRIO #1 to output
pulses at a Frequency of 1000 Hz until Llimit #0 comes on. This example program requires
that you load CTRRTLM_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

CTRRTLM Example (cont’d)

Rung 3: If the Run To Limit Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable the
output.

CTRIO Run to Position Mode (CTRRTPM) (IB-1012)

DS Used CTRIO Run To Position Mode, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, loads the Run to
HPP N/A Position command and given parameters on a specific Output resource.
Valid Function Values are:

00: Less Than Ch1/Fn1
10: Greater Than Ch1/Fn1
CTRRTPM Parameters
• Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (H0-CTRIO:
20Hz - 25KHz / H0-CTRIO2: 20Hz - 250 KHz)
• Duty Cycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time. This is a hex
number. Default of 0 is 50%, also entering 50 will yield 50%. 50%
duty cycle is defined as on half the time and off half the time
• Position: specifies the count value, as measured on the encoder
input, at which the output pulse train will be turned off


CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3
Duty Cycle V,K K0-99; See DL06 V-memory map
Position V,K K0-2147434528; See DL06 V-memory map
CTRRTPM Example


CTRRTPM Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: This CTRIO Run To Position Mode IBox sets up Output #0 in CTRIO #1 to
output pulses at a Frequency of 1000 Hz, use the ‘Greater than Ch1/Fn1’ comparison operator,
until the input position of 1500 is reached. This example program requires that you load
CTRRTPM_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.
Rung 3: If the Run To Position Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable
the output.

CTRIO Velocity Mode (CTRVELO) (IB-1013)

DS Used CTRIO Velocity Mode loads the Velocity command and given parameters on a specific Output
HPP N/A resource on a leading edge transition to this IBox.
This IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to

execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn
on when the command is complete. If the Error
Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error
Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error
information.
CTRVELO Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a user defined number (see CTRIO
Config Ibox)
• Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (H0-CTRIO: 20Hz - 25KHz / H0-CTRIO2:
20Hz - 250 KHz)
• Duty Cycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time. This is a hex number. Default of
0 is 50%, also entering 50 will yield 50%. 50% duty cycle is defined as on half the time
and off half the time
• Step Count: This DWORD value specifies the number of pulses to output. A Step Count
value of -1 (or 0XFFFFFFFF) causes the CTRIO to output pulses continuously. Negative
Step Count values must be V-Memory references.

CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3
Duty Cycle V,K K0-99; See DL06 V-memory map
Step Count V,K K0-2147434528; See DL06 V-memory map

CTRVELO Example

Rung 2: This CTRIO Velocity Mode IBox sets up Output #0 in CTRIO #1 to output 10,000
pulses at a Frequency of 1000 Hz. This example program requires that you load CTRVELO_
IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

CTRVELO Example (cont’d)

Rung 3: If the Velocity Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable the output.

CTRIO Write File to ROM (CTRWFTR) (IB-1006)

DS Used CTRIO Write File to ROM writes the runtime changes made to a loaded CTRIO Preset
HPP N/A Table back to Flash ROM on a leading edge transition to this IBox. This IBox will take more
than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is
complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox
to get extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox
instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in
your program.
CTRWFTR Parameters

CTRIO# K K0-255
Output# K K0-3

CTRWFTR Example

Rung 2: This CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry IBox will change Entry 0 in Table #2 to be a
RESET at Count 3456. This example program requires that you load CTRWFTR_IBox.cwb
into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

CTRWFTR Example (cont’d)

Rung 3: If the file is successfully edited, use a Write File To ROM IBox to save the edited table
back to the CTRIO’s ROM, thereby making the changes retentive.

CH 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CH 5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CH 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard RLL Chapter

Instruction Page Instruction Page

5-2 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

Instruction Page Instruction Page

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-3

5-4 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

Using Boolean Instructions

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-5

Normally Closed Contact

5-6 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

Joining Series Branches in Parallel

Joining Parallel Branches in Series

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-7

STR X0 STR X1 STR X2 AND X3

ORSTR AND X4 ORNOT X5

5-8 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

PORT1 PORT2 RUN STOP

The CPU reads the inputs from the local

Read Inputs from Specialty I/O

Immediate instruction does not use the

Write Outputs to Specialty I/O

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-9

Operand Data Type DL06 Range

5-10 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

Store Bit-of-Word (STRB)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-11

Operand Data Type DL06 Range

In the following Or example, when input X1 or X2 is on, output Y5 will energize.

5-12 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

Operand Data Type DL06 Range

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-13

AND (AND) Aaaa

Operand Data Type DL06 Range

5-14 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

AND Bit-of-Word (AND)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-15

And Store (ANDSTR)

Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

5-16 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-17

Out Bit-of-Word (OUT)

Operand Data Type DL06 Range

5-18 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

Positive Differential (PD)

Operand Data Type DL06 Range

DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G 5-19

Store Positive Differential (STRPD)

Operand Data Type DL06 Range

5-20 DL06 Micro PLC User Manual, 3rd Edition, Rev. G

Or Positive Differential (ORPD)

Operand Data Type DL06 Range